Power Flex 525 Manual

User Manual
PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable Frequency AC Drive

PowerFlex 523 Catalog Number 25A, Series B
PowerFlex 525 Catalog Number 25B
Original Instructions
Important User Information

Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety
Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-1.1 available from
your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/) describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference,
and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment
must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, PowerFlex, Connected Components Workbench, Studio 5000, Studio 5000 Logix Designer, DriveTools SP, AppView, CustomView, QuickView, MainsFree
Programming, PointStop, and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Table of Contents
Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Summary of Changes
New and Updated Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Preface
Overview
Who Should Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Recommended Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Drive Frame Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Mounting Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Supply Source Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power and Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Module Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Module Terminal Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Bus/Precharge Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control I/O Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start and Speed Reference Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
19
20
23
28
31
31
32
35
36
36
37
49
52
Chapter 2
Start Up
Prepare for Drive Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display and Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing and Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Programming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Start-Up with Basic Program Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Display with QuickView Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016
59
62
63
64
64
65
67
67
Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Programming and Parameters
About Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Basic Display Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Basic Program Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Terminal Block Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Communications Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Logic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Advanced Display Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Advanced Program Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Network Parameter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Modified Parameter Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fault and Diagnostic Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
AppView Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
CustomView Parameter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Parameter Cross Reference by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting
Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
157
159
162
Appendix A
Supplemental Drive Information
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
168
169
172
Appendix B
Accessories and Dimensions
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Product Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Optional Accessories and Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Appendix C
RS485 (DSI) Protocol
Network Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing (06) Logic Command Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing (06) Comm Frequency Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading (03) Logic Status Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading (03) Drive Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading (03) Drive Operational Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading (03) and Writing (06) Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
201
202
203
203
205
205
207
208
208
208
Table of Contents
Appendix D
Velocity StepLogic, Basic Logic and
Timer/Counter Functions
Velocity StepLogic Using Timed Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Velocity StepLogic Using Basic Logic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Velocity StepLogic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
210
210
211
212
213
Appendix E
Encoder/Pulse Train Usage and
Position StepLogic Application
Encoder and Pulse Train Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Determine Encoder Pulse Per Revolution (PPR) Specification Based on
Speed Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Positioning Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Common Guidelines for All Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Positioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Homing Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Encoder and Position Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Use Over Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Setup Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Appendix F
PID Set Up
PID Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

PID Reference and Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Analog PID Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Appendix G
Safe-Torque-Off Function
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EC Type Examination Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMC Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PowerFlex 525 Certification for Safe-Torque-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
235
236
236
236
237
239
239
239
240
241
245
Appendix H
EtherNet/IP
Establishing A Connection With EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Ground Connections for EtherNet/IP Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Table of Contents
Appendix I
Control Diagrams
Induction Motor Tuning Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Adjusting Speed Control Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Appendix J
PowerFlex 525 PM Motor
Configuration
Download Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Configuration Using Drive Startup Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Configuration Using Drive Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional PM Motor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Parameter Adjustments for Optimum Performance . . . . . . .
Index
252
254
261
262
266
Summary of Changes
This manual contains new and updated information.
New and Updated

Information
This table contains the changes made to this revision.

Topic
Page
Added footnote to indicate that circuit breaker selection is not available for certain drive
ratings.
24...27
Added PowerFlex 523 series B to Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram.
38
Added PowerFlex 523 series B to Control I/O Terminal Designations.
40
Added PowerFlex 523 series B I/O wiring examples for analog input and analog output.
45
Added note to PowerFlex 525 I/O wiring example for pulse train input.
46
Added footnote to enum 4 for P053 [Reset to Defalts] under Smart Start-Up with Basic
Program Group Parameters.
67
Added new sub topic for 32-bit parameters.
72
Added footnotes to parameters that are available in PowerFlex 523 FRN 3.xxx and later.
Chapter 3
Updated descriptions for parameters that are available in PowerFlex 523 FRN 3.xxx and later.
Added formula for calculating scaled process value to parameter b010 [Process Display].
79
Added recommendation to perform rotate tune when using VVC mode to parameter P040
[Autotune].
85
Added footnote to indicate which settings are PowerFlex 525 only for parameter d394 [Dig
Out Status].
114
Updated descriptions for parameters A465 [PID 1 Deadband] and A477 [PID 2 Deadband].
123
Added corrective action to fault F114 (uC Failure).
162
Added analog output to PowerFlex 523 drives.
171
Added new topic Determine Encoder Pulse Per Revolution (PPR) Specification Based on
Speed Resolution to Appendix E.
217
Updated information to verify operation of the safety inputs in Appendix G.
240
General maintenance updates.
Throughout manual
Summary of Changes
Notes:
Preface
Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed
to install, start-up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable
Frequency AC Drive.
For information on
Who Should Use this Manual
Recommended Documentation
Manual Conventions
Drive Frame Sizes
General Precautions
Catalog Number Explanation
See page
9
9
10
11
12
13
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to program
and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In addition, you must have
an understanding of the parameter settings and functions.
Recommended
Documentation
All the recommended documentation listed in this section is available online at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.
The following publications provide general drive information:
Title
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives
Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams
Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage
Publication
DRIVES-IN001
DRIVES-TD001
SGI-1.1
100-2.10
8000-4.5.2
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex 520-Series information on

drive installation, features, specifications, and service:
Title
PowerFlex 520-Series AC Drive Specifications
PowerFlex Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator
PowerFlex AC Drives in Common Bus Configurations
Publication
520-TD001
PFLEX-AT001
DRIVES-AT002
Preface
Overview
The following publications provide specific Network Communications

information:
Title
PowerFlex 525 Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter
PowerFlex 25-COMM-D DeviceNet Adapter
PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Adapter
PowerFlex 25-COMM-P PROFIBUS DPV1 Adapter
Manual Conventions
Publication
520COM-UM001
520COM-UM002
520COM-UM003
520COM-UM004
In this manual we refer to PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable Frequency AC

Drive as; drive, PowerFlex 520-series, PowerFlex 520-series drive or
PowerFlex 520-series AC drive.
Specific drives within the PowerFlex 520-series may be referred to as:
PowerFlex 523, PowerFlex 523 drive or PowerFlex 523 AC drive.
PowerFlex 525, PowerFlex 525 drive or PowerFlex 525 AC drive.
Parameter numbers and names are shown in this format:
P 031 [Motor NP Volts]
Name
Number
Group
b = Basic Display
P = Basic Program
t = Terminal Blocks
C = Communications
L = Logic
d = Advanced Display
A = Advanced Program
N = Network
M = Modified
f = Fault and Diagnostic
G = AppView and CustomView
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an

action:
Words
Can
Cannot
May
Must
Shall
Should
Should Not
10
Meaning
Possible, able to do something
Not possible, not able to do something
Permitted, allowed
Unavoidable, you must do this
Required and necessary
Recommended
Not Recommended
Overview
Preface
The Studio 5000 Engineering and Design Environment combines

engineering and design elements into a common environment. The first
element in the Studio 5000 environment is the Logix Designer
application. The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application is the
rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software and will continue to be the product
to program Logix 5000 controllers for discrete, process, batch, motion,
safety, and drive-based solutions. The Studio 5000 environment is the
foundation for the future of Rockwell Automation engineering design
tools and capabilities. It is the one place for design engineers to develop all
the elements of their control system.
Drive Frame Sizes
Similar PowerFlex 520-series drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify
spare parts ordering, dimensioning, etc. A cross reference of drive catalog
numbers and their respective frame sizes is provided in Appendix B.
11
Preface
Overview
General Precautions
ATTENTION: The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time to
discharge after removal of mains supply. After power has been removed from
the drive, wait three minutes to make sure DC bus capacitors are discharged.
After three minutes, verify AC voltage L1, L2, L3 (Line to Line and Line to
Ground) to ensure mains power has been disconnected. Measure DC voltage
across DC- and DC+ bus terminals to verify DC Bus has discharged to zero volts.
Measure DC voltage from L1, L2, L3, T1, T2, T3 DC and DC+ terminals to
ground and keep the meter on the terminals until the voltage discharges to zero
volts. The discharge process may take several minutes to reach zero volts.
Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to
safe voltage levels.
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC
drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation,
start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts
and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing,
servicing or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD
control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control
procedures, reference A-B publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding Against
Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component
damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as
undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient
temperatures may result in malfunction of the system.
ATTENTION: The bus regulator function is extremely useful for preventing
nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations,
overhauling loads, and eccentric loads. However, it can also cause either of the
following two conditions to occur.
1. Fast positive changes in input voltage or imbalanced input voltages can cause
uncommanded positive speed changes;
2. Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times
However, a Stall Fault is generated if the drive remains in this state for 1
minute. If this condition is unacceptable, the bus regulator must be disabled
(see parameter A550 [Bus Reg Enable]). In addition, installing a properly sized
dynamic brake resistor will provide proper stopping requirements based on
braking resistor sizing.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Drive does not contain
user-serviceable components. Do not disassemble drive chassis.
12
Overview
Preface
Catalog Number Explanation

1-3
6-8
10
11
12
13
14
25B
2P3
Drive
Dash
Voltage Rating
Rating
Enclosure
Reserved
Emission Class
Reserved
Dash
Dash
Code
25A
25B
Type
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Code
V
A
B
D
E
Code
0
1
Voltage
120V AC
240V AC
240V AC
480V AC
600V AC
Phase
1
1
3
3
3
Code
1
Code
N
EMC Filter
No Filter
Filter
Code
4
Braking
Standard
Interface Module
Standard
Enclosure
IP20 NEMA / Open
Output Current @ 1 Phase, 100...120V Input

Code
Amps Frame ND
HD
HP kW HP
1P6(1) 1.6
A
0.25 0.2 0.25
2P5
2.5
A
0.5 0.4 0.5
4P8
4.8
B
1.0 0.75 1.0
6P0
6.0
B
1.5 1.1 1.5
kW
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.1

Code
Amps Frame ND
HD
HP kW HP
A
0.25 0.2 0.25
1P6(1) 1.6
2P5
2.5
A
0.5 0.4 0.5
4P8
4.8
A
1.0 0.75 1.0
8P0
8.0
B
2.0 1.5 2.0
011
11.0
B
3.0 2.2 3.0
kW
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
Output Current @ 3Phase, 200...240V Input

Code
Amps Frame ND
HD
HP kW HP
A
0.25 0.2 0.25
1P6(1) 1.6
2P5
2.5
A
0.5 0.4 0.5
5P0
5.0
A
1.0 0.75 1.0
8P0
8.0
A
2.0 1.5 2.0
011
11.0
A
3.0 2.2 3.0
017
17.5
B
5.0 4.0 5.0
024
24.0
C
7.5 5.5 7.5
032
32.2
D
10.0 7.5 10.0
(2)
048
48.3
E
15.0 11.0 10.0
062(2) 62.1
E
20.0 15.0 15.0
kW
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
7.5
11.0

Code
Amps Frame ND
HD
HP kW HP
1P4
1.4
A
0.5 0.4 0.5
2P3
2.3
A
1.0 0.75 1.0
4P0
4.0
A
2.0 1.5 2.0
6P0
6.0
A
3.0 2.2 3.0
010
10.5
B
5.0 4.0 5.0
013
13.0
C
7.5 5.5 7.5
017
17.0
C
10.0 7.5 10.0
024
24.0
D
15.0 11.0 15.0
030(2) 30.0
D
20.0 15.0 15.0
037(2) 37.0
E
25.0 18.5 20.0
043(2) 43.0
E
30.0 22.0 25.0
kW
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
11.0
15.0
18.5

Code
Amps Frame ND
HD
HP kW HP
0P9
0.9
A
0.5 0.4 0.5
1P7
1.7
A
1.0 0.75 1.0
3P0
3.0
A
2.0 1.5 2.0
4P2
4.2
A
3.0 2.2 3.0
6P6
6.6
B
5.0 4.0 5.0
9P9
9.9
C
7.5 5.5 7.5
012
12.0
C
10.0 7.5 10.0
019
19.0
D
15.0 11.0 15.0
022(2) 22.0
D
20.0 15.0 15.0
027(2) 27.0
E
25.0 18.5 20.0
032(2) 32.0
E
30.0 22.0 25.0
kW
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
11.0
15.0
18.5
(1) This rating is only available for PowerFlex 523 drives.

(2)
Normal and Heavy Duty ratings are available for this drive.
13
Preface
Overview
Notes:
14
Chapter
Installation/Wiring
This chapter provides information on mounting and wiring the PowerFlex 520series drives.
For information on...
Mounting Considerations
AC Supply Source Considerations
General Grounding Requirements
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Power and Control Module
Control Module Cover
Power Module Terminal Guard
Power Wiring
Power Terminal Block
Common Bus/Precharge Notes
I/O Wiring
Control I/O Terminal Block
Start and Speed Reference Control
CE Conformity
See page...
15
19
20
23
28
31
31
32
35
36
36
37
49
52
Most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring. Every precaution must
be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed. All items must be read and
understood before the actual installation begins.
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper
installation. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the
compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for
the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of
personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during
installation.
Mounting Considerations
Mount the drive upright on a flat, vertical and level surface.

Frame
A
B
C
D
E
Screw Size
M5 (#10...24)
M5 (#10...24)
M5 (#10...24)
M5 (#10...24)
M8 (5/16 in.)
Screw Torque
1.56...1.96 Nm (14...17 lb-in.)
1.56...1.96 Nm (14...17 lb-in.)
1.56...1.96 Nm (14...17 lb-in.)
2.45...2.94 Nm (22...26 lb-in.)
6.0...7.4 Nm (53...65 lb-in.)
Protect the cooling fan by avoiding dust or metallic particles.
15
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere.

Protect from moisture and direct sunlight.
Minimum Mounting Clearances

See Appendix B for mounting dimensions.
Vertical, Zero Stacking
No clearance between drives.
Vertical
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
Esc
Sel
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
25 mm
(1.0 in.)
Esc
Vertical with Control Module Fan Kit
Esc
Sel
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)(1)
Esc
Sel
Esc
Sel
Esc
25 mm
(1.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)(1)
Sel
(2)
Esc
Sel
Esc
Sel
25 mm
(1.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
Horizontal with Control Module Fan Kit
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
Horizontal, Zero Stacking with

Control Module Fan Kit
(1) For Frame E with Control Module Fan Kit only, clearance of 95 mm (3.7 in.) is required.
(2) For Frame E with Control Module Fan Kit only, clearance of 12 mm (0.5 in.) is required.
16
Sel
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
Esc
Sel
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)(1)
Esc
Sel
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)(1)
Esc
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
Sel
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
Vertical, Zero Stacking with

Esc
Sel
(2)
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
Ambient Operating Temperatures

See Appendix B for option kits.
Mounting
Enclosure Rating(1)
Vertical
IP 20/Open Type
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1
IP 20/Open Type
IP 20/Open Type
Vertical, Zero Stacking

Horizontal with
Control Module Fan Kit(4)(5)
Horizontal, Zero Stacking
with Control Module Fan Kit(4)(5)
Ambient Temperature
Minimum
Maximum (No Derate) Maximum (Derate)(2) Maximum with
Control Module Fan Kit (Derate)(3)(5)
50 C (122 F)
60 C (140 F)
70 C (158 F)
45 C (113 F)
55 C (131 F)
45 C (113 F)
55 C (131 F)
65 C (149 F)
40
C
(104
F)
50
C
(122
F)
-20 C (-4 F)
50 C (122 F)
70 C (158 F)
IP 20/Open Type
45 C (113 F)
65 C (149 F)
(1) IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 rating requires installation of the PowerFlex 520-Series IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 option kit, catalog number 25-JBAx.
(2) For catalogs 25x-D1P4N104 and 25x-E0P9N104, the temperature listed under the Maximum (Derate) column is reduced by 5 C (9 F) for all mounting methods.
(3) For catalogs 25x-D1P4N104 and 25x-E0P9N104, the temperature listed under the Maximum with Control Module Fan Kit (Derate) column is reduced by 10 C (18 F) for vertical and vertical with zero
stacking mounting methods only.
(4) Catalogs 25x-D1P4N104 and 25x-E0P9N104 cannot be mounted using either of the horizontal mounting methods.
(5) Requires installation of the PowerFlex 520-Series Control Module Fan Kit, catalog number 25-FANx-70C.
Current Derating Curves

Single Drive
Zero Stacking
120
with Control
IP 30/NEMA 1
Module Fan Kit
110
100
90
IP 20/Open Type
80
70
60
50
40
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
120
with Control
IP 30/NEMA 1
Module Fan Kit
110
100
90
IP 20/Open Type
80
70
60
50
40
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Percentage of Rated Current (%)
Vertical Mounting
Ambient Temperature (C)
Single Drive
Zero Stacking
120
with Control
Module Fan Kit
110
100
90
IP 20/Open Type
80
70
60
50
40
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
120
with Control
Module Fan Kit
110
100
90
IP 20/Open Type
80
70
60
50
40
30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Horizontal/Floor Mounting
17
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Derating Guidelines for High Altitude

The drive can be used without derating at a maximum altitude of
1000 m (3300 ft). If the drive is used above 1000 m (3300 ft):
Derate the maximum ambient temperature by 5 C (9 F) for every
additional 1000 m (3300 ft), subject to limits listed in the Altitude Limit
(Based on Voltage) table below.
Or
Derate the output current by 10% for every additional 1000 m (3300 ft),
up to 3000 m (9900 ft), subject to limits listed in the Altitude Limit
(Based on Voltage) table below.
Altitude Limit (Based on Voltage)
Drive Rating
Center Ground (Wye Neutral)
100...120V 1-Phase
200...240V 1-Phase
200...240V 3-Phase
380...480V 3-Phase
525...600V 3-Phase
6000 m
2000 m
6000 m
4000 m
2000 m
Corner Ground, Impedance

Ground, or Ungrounded
6000 m
2000 m
2000 m
2000 m
2000 m
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
60
High Altitude
1000
2000
3000
4000
Altitude (m)
50
40
30
20
1000
2000
3000
4000
Altitude (m)
Debris Protection
Take precautions to prevent debris from falling through the vents of the drive
housing during installation.
Storage
Store within an ambient temperature range of -40...85C(1).
Store within a relative humidity range of 0...95%, noncondensing.
Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere.
(1) The maximum ambient temperature for storing a Frame E drive is 70 C.
18
Installation/Wiring
AC Supply Source
Considerations
Chapter 1
Ungrounded Distribution Systems

ATTENTION: PowerFlex 520-series drives contain protective MOVs that are
referenced to ground. These devices must be disconnected if the drive is
installed on an ungrounded or resistive grounded distribution system.
ATTENTION: Removing MOVs in drives with an embedded filter will also
disconnect the filter capacitor from earth ground.
Disconnecting MOVs
To prevent drive damage, the MOVs connected to ground shall be disconnected
if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution system (IT mains) where
the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the nominal lineto-line voltage. To disconnect these devices, remove the jumper shown in the
diagrams below.
1. Turn the screw counterclockwise to loosen.
2. Pull the jumper completely out of the drive chassis.
3. Tighten the screw to keep it in place.
Jumper Location (Typical)
Power Module
IMPORTANT
Tighten screw after jumper removal.
Phase to Ground MOV Removal

R/L1
Three-Phase
AC Input S/L2
T/L3
Jumper
19
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Input Power Conditioning

The drive is suitable for direct connection to input power within the rated
voltage of the drive (see page 169). Listed in the Input Power Conditions table
below are certain input power conditions which may cause component damage or
reduction in product life. If any of these conditions exist, install one of the devices
listed under the heading Corrective Action on the line side of the drive.
IMPORTANT
Only one device per branch circuit is required. It should be mounted closest to
the branch and sized to handle the total current of the branch circuit.
Input Power Conditions

Input Power Condition
Low Line Impedance (less than 1% line reactance)
Greater than 120 kVA supply transformer
Line has power factor correction capacitors
Line has frequent power interruptions
Line has intermittent noise spikes in excess of 6000V (lightning)
Phase to ground voltage exceeds 125% of normal line to line voltage
Ungrounded distribution system
B-phase grounded distribution system
240V open delta configuration (stinger leg)(1)
Corrective Action
Install Line Reactor(2)
or Isolation Transformer
or Isolation Transformer
Remove MOV jumper to ground.
or Install Isolation Transformer with
grounded secondary if necessary.
(1) For drives applied on an open delta with a middle phase grounded neutral system, the phase opposite the phase that is tapped in
the middle to the neutral or earth is referred to as the stinger leg, high leg, red leg, etc. This leg should be identified throughout
the system with red or orange tape on the wire at each connection point. The stinger leg should be connected to the center Phase B
on the reactor. See Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors on page 183 for specific line reactor part numbers.
(2) See Appendix B for accessory ordering information.
General Grounding
Requirements
The drive Safety Ground - (PE) must be connected to system ground. Ground
impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of all ground connections
should be periodically checked.
Typical Grounding
Esc
Sel
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
SHLD
20
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
Ground Fault Monitoring

If a system ground fault monitor (RCD) is to be used, only Type B (adjustable)
devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping.
Safety Ground -
(PE)
This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code. One of these
points must be connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground
rod or bus bar. Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes.
Network Ground
Connect terminal C1 to a clean earth ground when using a network with a star
topology (EtherNet/IP) or daisy-chain (RS485). It is acceptable to ground both
C1 and C2 terminals.
Connect terminal CS1 or CS2 to a clean ground when using a network with a
ring topology (EtherNet/IP).
For more information on EtherNet/IP networks, see Ground Connections for
EtherNet/IP Networks on page 248.
For more information on RS485 networks, see Network Wiring on page 201.
Motor Ground
The motor ground must be connected to one of the ground terminals on the
drive.
Shield Termination - SHLD

Either of the safety ground terminals located on the power terminal block
provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield. The motor cable shield
connected to one of these terminals (drive end) should also be connected to the
motor frame (motor end). Use a shield terminating or EMI clamp to connect the
shield to the safety ground terminal. The earthing plate or conduit box option
may be used with a cable clamp for a grounding point for the cable shield.
When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring, the shield should be
grounded at the source end only, not at the drive end.
21
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
RFI Filter Grounding

Using a drive with filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents.
Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC
supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded)
to the building power distribution ground. Ensure that the incoming supply
neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same building power distribution
ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any
form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local
codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all
connections should be periodically checked.
22
Installation/Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Chapter 1
The PowerFlex 520-series drive does not provide branch short circuit protection.
This product should be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit
breaker. National and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes
may determine additional requirements for these installations.
The tables found on pages 24...27 provide recommended AC line input fuse and
circuit breaker information. See Fusing and Circuit Breakers below for UL and
IEC requirements. Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 C
(104 F) and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or local codes may require
different ratings.
Fusing
The recommended fuse types are listed in the tables found on pages 24...27. If
available current ratings do not match those listed in the tables provided, choose
the next higher fuse rating.
IEC BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2(1), EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2,
type GG or equivalent should be used.
UL UL Class CC, T, RK1, or J should be used.
Circuit Breakers
The non-fuse listings in the tables found on pages 24...27 include inverse time
circuit breakers, instantaneous trip circuit breakers (motor circuit protectors)
and 140M self-protected combination motor controllers. If one of these is chosen
as the desired protection method, the following requirements apply:
IEC Both types of circuit breakers and 140M self-protected
combination motor controllers are acceptable for IEC installations.
UL Only inverse time circuit breakers and the specified 140M selfprotected combination motor controllers are acceptable for UL
installations.
Bulletin 140M (Self-Protected Combination Controller)/UL489 Circuit Breakers

When using Bulletin 140M or UL489 rated circuit breakers, the guidelines listed
below must be followed in order to meet the NEC requirements for branch
circuit protection.
Bulletin 140M can be used in single motor applications.
Bulletin 140M can be used up stream from the drive without the need for
fuses.
(1) Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following;
Parts 1 & 2: AC, AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH.
23
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
0.8
1.3
2.5
3.2
A
A
B
B
100-C09
100-C12
100-C23
100-C23
10
16
25
32
16
20
40
50
140U-D6D2-B80
140U-D6D2-C12
140U-D6D2-C25
140U-D6D2-C30
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-D8E-C20
140M-F8E-C25
Fuses (Rating) Circuit Breakers

Min. Max. 140U/140G
140M
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
4.8
4.8
8.0
8.0
11.0
11.0
1.4
1.4
1.7
1.7
2.8
2.8
4.8
4.8
6.0
6.0
Max
Amps(1)
5.3
5.3
6.5
6.5
10.7
10.7
18.0
18.0
22.9
22.9
Input
Ratings
A 100-C09 6
A 100-C09 6
A 100-C09 10
A 100-C09 10
A 100-C12 16
A 100-C12 16
B 100-C23 25
B 100-C23 25
B 100-C37 32
B 100-C37 32
10
10
16
16
25
25
40
40
50
50
140U-D6D2-C10
140U-D6D2-C10
140U-D6D2-C10
140U-D6D2-C10
140U-D6D2-C15
140U-D6D2-C15
140U-D6D2-C25
140U-D6D2-C25
140G-G6C3-C35
140G-G6C3-C35
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-C2E-C16
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25

Min. Max. 140U/140G
140M
IEC Applications (Non-UL)
200...240V 1-Phase Input Protection Devices Frames A...B
1.6
2.5
4.8
6.0
Max
Amps(1)
6.4
9.6
19.2
24.0
CLASS RK5, CC, J, or T / DLS-R-15

CLASS CC, J, or T / 40
Fuses (Max. Rating)

Class / Catalog No.
UL Applications

Fuses (Max. Rating)

Class / Catalog No.
UL Applications
When the drive is controlling motors with lower amp ratings, refer to the drive nameplate for drive input current rating.
The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 140M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings.
Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip.
Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 480Y/277 and 600Y/347 AC input. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta, corner ground, or high-resistance ground systems.
Circuit breaker selection is not available for this drive rating.
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
25B-A2P5N104
25B-A2P5N114
25B-A4P8N104
25B-A4P8N114
25B-A8P0N104
25B-A8P0N114
25B-A011N104
25B-A011N114
25A-A1P6N104
25A-A1P6N114
25A-A2P5N104
25A-A2P5N114
25A-A4P8N104
25A-A4P8N114
25A-A8P0N104
25A-A8P0N114
25A-A011N104
25A-A011N114
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
ND
HD
HP kW HP kW
PF 525
PF 523
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.1
Output Ratings
0.25
0.5
1.0
1.5
Catalog No.
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.1
25B-V2P5N104
25B-V4P8N104
25B-V6P0N104
25A-V1P6N104
25A-V2P5N104
25A-V4P8N104
25A-V6P0N104
0.25
0.5
1.0
1.5
ND
HD
HP kW HP kW
PF 525
Amps
Amps
PF 523
Input
Ratings
kVA
kVA
Output Ratings
Frame Size
Catalog No.
Frame Size
100...120V 1-Phase Input Protection Devices Frames A...B
Fuses and Circuit Breakers for PowerFlex 520-Series Drives
Contactor
Catalog No.
24
Contactor
Catalog No.
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-D8E-C20
140M-F8E-C25
140U-D6D2-C10
140U-D6D2-C10
140U-D6D2-C10
140U-D6D2-C10
140U-D6D2-C15
140U-D6D2-C15
140U-D6D2-C25
140U-D6D2-C25
(5)
(5)
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-C2E-C16
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C25
Circuit Breakers
140U/140G
140M(2)(3)(4)
140U-D6D2-B80
140U-D6C2-C12
140U-D6D2-C25
140U-D6D2-C30
Circuit Breakers
140U/140G
140M(2)(3)(4)
Min.
Enclosure
Vol. (in.3)
Min.
Enclosure
Vol. (in.3)
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
7.5
11.0
Amps
1.6
2.5
5.0
8.0
11.0
17.5
24.0
32.2
48.3
62.1
kVA
0.9
1.2
2.7
4.3
6.3
9.6
12.2
15.9
20.1
25.6
Max
Amps(2)
1.9
2.7
5.8
9.5
13.8
21.1
26.6
34.8
44.0
56.0
Input
Ratings
A
A
A
A
A
B
C
D
E
E
Frame Size
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C12
100-C23
100-C23
100-C37
100-C43
100-C60
100-C72
3
6
10
16
20
32
35
45
63
70
6
6
16
20
32
45
63
70
90
125
140U-D6D3-B30
140U-D6D3-B40
140U-D6D3-B80
140U-D6D3-C10
140U-D6D3-C15
140U-D6D3-C25
140G-G6C3-C35
140G-G6C3-C60
140G-G6C3-C70
140G-G6C3-C90
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C32
140M-F8E-C45
140M-F8E-C45
(7)

Min. Max. 140U/140G
140M

Fuses (Max. Rating)

Class / Catalog No.
UL Applications
140U-D6D3-B30
140U-D6D3-B40
140U-D6D3-B80
140U-D6D3-C10
140U-D6D3-C15
140U-D6D3-C25
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C32
140M-F8E-C45
140M-F8E-C45
(7)
Circuit Breakers
140U/140G
140M(3)(4)(5)
Min.
Enclosure
Vol. (in.3)
1416.0(6)
Normal Duty (ND) and Heavy Duty (HD) ratings are available for this drive.
When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller with this drive power rating, the drive must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this column. Application specific thermal
considerations may require a larger enclosure.
(7) Circuit breaker selection is not available for this drive rating.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.25
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
10.0
15.0
25B-B2P5N104
25B-B5P0N104
25B-B8P0N104
25B-B011N104
25B-B017N104
25B-B024N104
25B-B032N104
25B-B048N104
25B-B062N104
25A-B1P6N104
25A-B2P5N104
25A-B5P0N104
25A-B8P0N104
25A-B011N104
25A-B017N104
25A-B024N104
25A-B032N104
25A-B048N104
25A-B062N104
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
ND
HD
HP kW HP kW
PF 525
PF 523
0.25
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
Output Ratings
Catalog No.(1)
Contactor
Catalog No.
200...240V 3-Phase Input Protection Devices Frames A...E
Fuses and Circuit Breakers for PowerFlex 520-Series Drives (continued)
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
25
0.4
0.4
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
4.0
4.0
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
11.0
11.0
11.0
11.0
15.0
18.5
1.4
1.4
2.3
2.3
4.0
4.0
6.0
6.0
10.5
10.5
13.0
13.0
17.0
17.0
24.0
24.0
30.0
30.0
37.0
43.0
1.7
1.7
2.9
2.9
5.2
5.2
6.9
6.9
12.6
12.6
14.1
14.1
16.8
16.8
24.1
24.1
30.2
30.2
30.8
35.6
Max
Amps(2)
1.9
1.9
3.2
3.2
5.7
5.7
7.5
7.5
13.8
13.8
15.4
15.4
18.4
18.4
26.4
26.4
33.0
33.0
33.7
38.9
Input
Ratings
kVA
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
E
E
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C23
100-C23
100-C23
100-C23
100-C23
100-C23
100-C37
100-C37
100-C43
100-C43
100-C43
100-C60
3
3
6
6
10
10
10
10
20
20
20
20
25
25
35
35
45
45
45
50
6
6
10
10
16
16
16
16
32
32
35
35
40
40
63
63
70
70
70
80
140U-D6D3-B30
140U-D6D3-B30
140U-D6D3-B60
140U-D6D3-B60
140U-D6D3-B60
140U-D6D3-B60
140U-D6D3-C10
140U-D6D3-C10
140U-D6D3-C15
140U-D6D3-C15
140U-D6D3-C25
140U-D6D3-C25
140U-D6D3-C25
140U-D6D3-C25
140G-G6C3-C40
140G-G6C3-C40
140G-G6C3-C50
140G-G6C3-C50
140G-G6C3-C50
140G-G6C3-C60
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-C2E-C16
140M-D8E-C20
140M-D8E-C20
140M-D8E-C20
140M-D8E-C20
140M-F8E-C32
140M-F8E-C32
140M-F8E-C45
140M-F8E-C45
140M-F8E-C45
140M-F8E-C45

Min. Max. 140U/140G
140M

Fuses (Max. Rating)

Class / Catalog No.
UL Applications
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-C2E-C16
140M-D8E-C20
140M-D8E-C20
140M-D8E-C20
140M-D8E-C20
140M-F8E-C32
140M-F8E-C32
140M-F8E-C45
140M-F8E-C45
140M-F8E-C45
140M-F8E-C45
Circuit Breakers
140U/140G
140M(3)(4)(5)
Min.
Enclosure
Vol. (in.3)
656.7(6)
656.7(6)
656.7(6)
656.7(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
7.5
10.0
10.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
25B-D1P4N104
25B-D1P4N114
25B-D2P3N104
25B-D2P3N114
25B-D4P0N104
25B-D4P0N114
25B-D6P0N104
25B-D6P0N114
25B-D010N104
25B-D010N114
25B-D013N104
25B-D013N114
25B-D017N104
25B-D017N114
25B-D024N104
25B-D024N114
25B-D030N104
25B-D030N114
25B-D037N114
25B-D043N114
25A-D1P4N104
25A-D1P4N114
25A-D2P3N104
25A-D2P3N114
25A-D4P0N104
25A-D4P0N114
25A-D6P0N104
25A-D6P0N114
25A-D010N104
25A-D010N114
25A-D013N104
25A-D013N114
25A-D017N104
25A-D017N114
25A-D024N104
25A-D024N114
25A-D030N104
25A-D030N114
25A-D037N114
25A-D043N114
0.4
0.4
0.75
0.75
1.5
1.5
2.2
2.2
4.0
4.0
5.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
11.0
11.0
15.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
ND
HD
HP kW HP kW
PF 525
PF 523
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
5.0
5.0
7.5
7.5
10.0
10.0
15.0
15.0
20.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
Output Ratings
Catalog No.(1)
Amps
Frame Size
26
Contactor
Catalog No.
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
11.0
15.0
18.5
Amps
0.9
1.7
3.0
4.2
6.6
9.9
12.0
19.0
22.0
27.0
32.0
kVA
1.4
2.6
4.3
6.1
9.1
12.8
15.4
27.4
31.2
28.2
33.4
Max
Amps(2)
1.2
2.3
3.8
5.3
8.0
11.2
13.5
24.0
27.3
24.7
29.2
Input
Ratings
6
6
10
16
20
25
32
50
63
50
63
140U-D6D3-B20
140U-D6D3-B30
140U-D6D3-B50
140U-D6D3-B80
140U-D6D3-C10
140U-D6D3-C15
140U-D6D3-C20
140G-G6C3-C30
140G-G6C3-C35
140G-G6C3-C35
140G-G6C3-C50
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-C2E-C16
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C32
140M-F8E-C32
140M-F8E-C32

Min. Max. 140U/140G
140M
A 100-C09 3
A 100-C09 3
A 100-C09 6
A 100-C09 10
B 100-C09 10
C 100-C16 16
C 100-C23 20
D 100-C30 32
D 100-C30 35
E 100-C30 35
E 100-C37 40
Frame Size

Fuses (Max. Rating)

Class / Catalog No.
UL Applications
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
Min.
Enclosure
Vol. (in.3)
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B40
140M-D8E-B63
140M-D8E-C10
140M-D8E-C16(6)
140M-D8E-C16
140M-F8E-C25 656.7(7)
140M-F8E-C32 656.7(7)
140M-F8E-C32 1416.0(7)
140M-F8E-C32 1416.0(7)
Circuit Breakers
140U/140G
140M(3)(4)(5)
When used with the 140M circuit breaker, the 25A-E9P9104 must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum size of 457.2 x 457.2 x 269.8 mm (18 x 18 x 10.62 in.).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
25B-E0P9N104
25B-E1P7N104
25B-E3P0N104
25B-E4P2N104
25B-E6P6N104
25B-E9P9N104
25B-E012N104
25B-E019N104
25B-E022N104
25B-E027N104
25B-E032N104
25A-E0P9N104
25A-E1P7N104
25A-E3P0N104
25A-E4P2N104
25A-E6P6N104
25A-E9P9N104
25A-E012N104
25A-E019N104
25A-E022N104
25A-E027N104
25A-E032N104
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
ND
HD
HP kW HP kW
PF 525
PF 523
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
Output Ratings
Catalog No.(1)
Contactor
Catalog No.
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
27
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Power and Control Module
PowerFlex 520-series drives consist of a Power Module and Control Module.
Separating the Power and Control Module
ATTENTION: Perform this action only when drive is NOT powered.
1. Press and hold down the catch on both sides of the frame cover, then pull
out and swing upwards to remove (Frames B...E only).
2. Press down and slide out the top cover of the Control Module to unlock it
from the Power Module.
28
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
3. Hold the sides and top of the Control Module firmly, then pull out to
separate it from the Power Module.
Connecting the Power and Control Module

1. Align the connectors on the Power Module and Control Module, then
push the Control Module firmly onto the Power Module.
29
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
2. Push the top cover of the Control Module towards the Power Module to
lock it.
3. Insert the catch at the top of the frame cover into the Power Module, then
swing the frame cover to snap the side catches onto the Power Module
(Frames B...E only).
30
Installation/Wiring
Control Module Cover
Chapter 1
To access the control terminals, DSI port, and Ethernet port, the front cover must
be removed. To remove:
1. Press and hold down the arrow on the front of the cover.
2. Slide the front cover down to remove from the Control Module.
Re-attach the front cover when wiring is complete.
Power Module Terminal

Guard
To access the power terminals, the terminal guard must be removed. To remove:
1. Press and hold down the catch on both sides of the frame cover, then pull
out and swing upwards to remove (Frames B...E only).
31
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
2. Press and hold down the locking tab on the terminal guard.
3. Slide the terminal guard down to remove from the Power Module.
Re-attach the terminal guard when wiring is complete.

To access the power terminals for Frame A, you need to separate the Power and
Control Modules. See Separating the Power and Control Module on page 28 for
instructions.
Power Wiring
ATTENTION: National Codes and standards (NEC, VDE, BSI, etc.) and local codes
outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment. Installation must
comply with specifications regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit
protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages,
unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends. For the same
reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using
this conduit should be disabled. This will help minimize the possible shock
hazard from cross coupled power leads.
Motor Cable Types Acceptable for 100...600 Volt Installations

A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many
installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated from
sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3 m (1 ft) for
every 10 m (32.8 ft) of length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do
not use cable with an insulation thickness less than 15 mils (0.4 mm/0.015 in.).
Do not route more than three sets of motor leads in a single conduit to minimize
cross talk. If more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required,
shielded cable must be used.
32
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
UL installations above 50 C ambient must use 600V, 90 C wire.

UL installations in 50 C ambient must use 600V, 75 C or 90 C wire.
UL installations in 40 C ambient should use 600V, 75 C or 90 C wire.
Use copper wire only. Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based
on 75 C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire.
WARNING: The distance between the drive and motor must not exceed the
maximum cable length stated in the Motor Cable Length Restrictions Tables in
Wiring and Grounding Guide, (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001.
Unshielded
THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry
environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates limits are
provided. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 mils
and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity.
ATTENTION: Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas.
Shielded/Armored Cable
Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable with
the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise
generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should
be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive
proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in
the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar
location, imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications /
networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.
Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents
for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of shielded cable may
help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the
addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks. Refer to
Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guide, (PWM) AC Drives,
publication DRIVES-IN001.
Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the
environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility, moisture
characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided shield should be
included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at
least 75%. An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment.
A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx (xx determines gauge).
This cable has four (4) XLPE insulated conductors with a 100% coverage foil and
an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire) surrounded by a
PVC jacket.
33
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types may
limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables twist 4
conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield. This
construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce
the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individual distance tables as
tested with the drive, these cables are not recommended and their performance
against the lead length limits supplied is not known.
Recommended Shielded Wire
Location
Rating/Type
Description
Standard (Option 1) 600V, 90 C (194 F) XHHW2/RHW-2 Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
Anixter B209500-B209507, Belden Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and
29501-29507, or equivalent
tinned copper drain wire.
PVC jacket.
Standard (Option 2) Tray rated 600V, 90 C (194 F)
Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
RHH/RHW-2 Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or 5 mil single helical copper tape (25% overlap min.)
equivalent
with three bare copper grounds in contact with shield.
PVC jacket.
Class I & II;
Tray rated 600V, 90 C (194 F)
Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation
Division I & II
RHH/RHW-2 Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G or
and impervious corrugated continuously welded
equivalent
aluminum armor.
Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall.
Three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller.
Reflected Wave Protection

The drive should be installed as close to the motor as possible. Installations with
long motor cables may require the addition of external devices to limit voltage
reflections at the motor (reflected wave phenomena). Refer to Reflected Wave in
Wiring and Grounding Guide, (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVESIN001.
The reflected wave data applies to all carrier frequencies 2...16 kHz.
For 240V ratings and lower, reflected wave effects do not need to be considered.
Output Disconnect
The drive is intended to be commanded by control input signals that will start
and stop the motor. A device that routinely disconnects then reapplies output
power to the motor for the purpose of starting and stopping the motor should
not be used. If it is necessary to disconnect power to the motor with the drive
outputting power, an auxiliary contact should be used to simultaneously disable
drive (Aux Fault or Coast to Stop).
34
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1

Frame A, B, C & D
Frame E
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
DC-
DC- DC+ BRBR+
Terminal
R/L1, S/L2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
Description
1-Phase Input Line Voltage Connection
3-Phase Input Line Voltage Connection
Motor Phase Connection =
DC+, DCBR+, BR-
DC Bus Connection (except for 110V 1-Phase)

Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection
Safety Ground - PE
IMPORTANT
DC+
BR+
BR-
Switch any two motor leads to change

forward direction.
Terminal screws may become loose during shipment. Ensure that all terminal
screws are tightened to the recommended torque before applying power to the
drive.
Power Terminal Block Wire Specifications

Frame
A
B
C
D
E
Maximum Wire Size(1)

5.3 mm2 (10 AWG)
8.4 mm2 (8 AWG)
8.4 mm2 (8 AWG)
13.3 mm2 (6 AWG)
26.7 mm2 (3 AWG)
Minimum Wire Size(1)

0.8 mm2 (18 AWG)
2.1 mm2 (14 AWG)
2.1 mm2 (14 AWG)
5.3 mm2 (10 AWG)
8.4 mm2 (8 AWG)
Torque
1.76...2.16 Nm (15.6...19.1 lb-in.)
1.76...2.16 Nm (15.6...19.1 lb-in.)
1.76...2.16 Nm (15.6...19.1 lb-in.)
1.76...2.16 Nm (15.6...19.1 lb-in.)
3.09...3.77 Nm (27.3...33.4 lb-in.)
(1) Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations.
35
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Common Bus/Precharge
Notes
If drives are used with a disconnect switch to the common DC bus, then an
auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the
drive. The corresponding input (parameter t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn
TermBlk xx]) must be set to 30, Precharge En This provides the proper
precharge interlock, guarding against possible damage to the drive when
connected to a common DC bus. For more information, see Drives in Common
Bus Configurations, publication DRIVES-AT002.
I/O Wiring
Motor Start/Stop Precautions

ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and
reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive
hardware damage. The drive is designed to use control input signals that will
start and stop the motor. If used, the input device must not exceed one
operation per minute or drive damage can occur.
ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry includes solid-state
components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or
unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop
circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive. When the AC line is
removed, there will be a loss of any inherent regenerative braking effect that
might be present - the motor will coast to a stop. An auxiliary braking method
may be required. Alternatively, use the drives safety input function.
Important points to remember about I/O wiring:
Always use copper wire.
Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended.
Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least
0.3 m (1 ft).
IMPORTANT
I/O terminals labeled Common are not referenced to the safety ground (PE)
terminal and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference.
ATTENTION: Driving the 4-20 mA analog input from a voltage source could
cause component damage. Verify proper configuration prior to applying input
signals.
Signal and Control Wire Types

Recommendations are for 50 C ambient temperature.
75 C wire must be used for 60 C ambient temperature.
36
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
Recommended Signal Wire

Belden Wire Type(s)(1) Description
(or equivalent)
8760/9460
0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), twisted pair,
100% shield with drain(2)
Remote Pot
8770
0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded
Encoder/Pulse I/O 9728/9730
0.196 mm2 (24 AWG), individually shielded pairs
Signal Type/
Where Used
Analog I/O & PTC
Min. Insulation
Rating
300V,
60 C (140 F)
(1) Stranded or solid wire.

(2) If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire may not be necessary,
but is always recommended.
Recommended Control Wire for Digital I/O

Type
Wire Type(s)
Unshielded
Per US NEC or applicable

national or local code
Multi-conductor shielded 0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded.
cable such as Belden 8770
(or equivalent)
Shielded
Description
Min. Insulation
Rating
300V,
60 C (140 F)
Maximum Control Wire Recommendations

Do not exceed control wiring length of 30 m (100 ft). Control signal cable length
is highly dependent on electrical environment and installation practices. To
improve noise immunity, the I/O terminal block Common may be connected to
ground terminal/protective earth.
Control I/O Terminal Block
Control I/O Terminal Block Wire Specifications

Frame
A...E
Maximum Wire Size(1)

1.3 mm2 (16 AWG)
Minimum Wire Size(1)

0.13 mm2 (26 AWG)
Torque
0.71...0.86 Nm (6.2...7.6 lb-in.)
(1) Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations.
37
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 523 Control I/O Terminal Block

PowerFlex 523 Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram
Series A
01
02
03
SNK
SRC
04
05
06
+24V
Relay N.O.
Relay Common
Relay N.C.
11
R1
+10V
R2
12
13
R3
14
15
C1
C2
Digital In
DigIn TermBlk 05 Sel
J8
SNK
SRC
R1
R2
R3
38
01
11
02
12
J7
Pulse In
04
14
05
15
06
C1
C2
Typical
SNK wiring
DigIn TermBlk 05/Pulse

DigIn TermBlk 06
+24V DC
+10V DC
0-10V Input
Analog Common
4-20mA Input
RJ45 Shield
Comm Common
RS485
(DSI)
Digital
Input
Typical
SRC wiring
Digital Common
81
03
13
(1)
Stop
DigIn TermBlk 02/(2)
Start/Run FWD
DigIn TermBlk 03/
Direction/Run REV
Pot must be
1...10 k ohm
2 W min.
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
Series B
01
02
03
SNK
SRC
04
05
06
Relay N.O.
Relay Common
Relay N.C.
(1)
Stop
Start/Run FWD
DigIn TermBlk 03/
Direction/Run REV
Typical
SRC wiring
Typical
SNK wiring
Digital Common
DigIn TermBlk 06
R1
R2
+24V
R3
+10V
11
12
0-10V
4-20 mA
13
14
0-10V
0/4-20 mA
15
C1
J4
J13
J8
SNK
0-10V
R1
0-10V
R2
R3
Digital In
Analog In
Analog Out
4-20 mA 0/4-20 mA
01
11
SRC
02
12
C2
03
13
J7
Pulse In
+10V DC
Analog Input
Analog Common
(3)
Analog Output
RJ45 Shield
13
14
(4)
Pot must be 4-20 mA
1...10 k ohm source
2 W min.
Comm Common
RS485
(DSI)
81
Digital
Input
04
14
+24V DC
05
15
06
C1
C2
Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram Notes

(1) See Digital Input Selection for Start Source on page 50 for more information on configuring the digital inputs.
IMPORTANT
I/O Terminal 01 is always a stop input. The stopping mode is determined by the
drive setting. See the tables below for more information.
Start Method
P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x]
1 Keypad
2 DigIn TrmBlk
3 Serial/DSI
4 Network Opt
5 Ethernet/IP (1)
Stop Method
I/O Terminal 01 Stop
Coast
See t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx] below
Coast
Coast
Coast
Normal Stop
Per P045
[Stop Mode]
(1) Setting is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
39
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Start Method
t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx]
48 2-Wire FWD
49 3-Wire Start
50 2-Wire REV
51 3-Wire Dir
IMPORTANT
Stop Method
t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to:
0, 1, or 2 = Coast
3 = per P045 [Stop Mode]
Per P045 [Stop Mode]
0, 1, or 2 = Coast
Normal Stop
Per P045
[Stop Mode]
The drive is shipped with a jumper installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 11.
Remove this jumper when using I/O Terminal 01 as a stop or enable input.
(2) Two wire control shown. For three wire control use a momentary input
on I/O Terminal 02 to command a start. Use a
maintained input
for I/O Terminal 03 to change direction.
(3) Analog output (terminal 15) is only available on PowerFlex 523 series B drive, and requires firmware 3.001 and later to configure the
analog output parameters (t088, t089, and t090).
(4) Potentiometer connection is only applicable when the 0-10V setting (default) is selected for jumper J4.
(5) Only one analog frequency source may be connected at a time. If more than one reference is connected at the same time, an
undetermined frequency reference will result.
Control I/O Terminal Designations

No.
R1
R2
R3
01
Signal
Relay N.O.
Relay Common
Relay N.C.
Stop
Default
Fault
Fault
Motor Running
Coast
02 DigIn TermBlk 02/ Run FWD

Start/Run FWD
03 DigIn TermBlk 03/ Run REV

Dir/Run REV
04 Digital Common
05 DigIn TermBlk 05/ Preset Freq

Pulse In
06 DigIn TermBlk 06 Preset Freq
40
11 +24V DC
12 +10V DC
Description
Normally open contact for output relay.
Common for output relay.
Normally closed contact for output relay.
Three wire stop. However, it functions as a stop under all input
modes and cannot be disabled.
Used to initiate motion and also can be used as a programmable
digital input. It can be programmed with t062 [DigIn TermBlk
02] as three wire (Start/Dir with Stop) or two wire (Run FWD/
Run REV) control. Current consumption is 6 mA.
Return for digital I/O. Electrically isolated (along with the digital
I/O) from the rest of the drive.
Program with t065 [DigIn TermBlk 05].
Also functions as a Pulse Train input for reference or speed
feedback. Requires an NPN pulse input. The maximum
frequency is 100 kHz. Current consumption is 6 mA.
Current consumption is 6 mA.
Referenced to Digital Common.
Drive supplied power for digital inputs.
Maximum output current is 100 mA.
Referenced to Analog Common.
Drive supplied power for 0...10V external potentiometer.
Parameter
t076
t081
P045(2)
P045, P046,
P048, P050,
A544, t062
t063
t065
t066
P047, P049
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1

No. Signal
13 For Series A
0-10V In(1)
Default
Not Active
For Series B
Analog Input
Not Active
14 Analog Common
15 For Series A
4-20mA In(1)
For Series B
Analog Output
Not Active
OutFreq 0-10
C1 C1
C2 C2
Description
For external 0-10V (unipolar) input supply or potentiometer
wiper.
Input impedance:
Voltage source = 100 k
Allowable potentiometer resistance range = 1...10 k
External analog input supply, selectable by Analog Input
jumper. Default is 0-10V (unipolar) input supply or
potentiometer wiper.
Input impedance:
Change Analog Input jumper to 4-20 mA for external 4-20 mA
input supply. Input impedance = 250
Return for the analog I/O. Electrically isolated (along with the
analog I/O) from the rest of the drive.
For external 4-20 mA input supply.
Input impedance = 250
Parameter
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
t093, A459,
A471
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
t093, A459,
A471
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
A459, A471
t088, t089
The default analog output is 0-10V. To convert a current value,

change the Analog Output jumper to 0-20 mA. Program with
t088 [Analog Out Sel]. Maximum analog value can be scaled
with t089 [Analog Out High].
Maximum Load: 4-20 mA = 525 (10.5V)
0-10V = 1 k (10 mA)
This terminal is tied to the RJ-45 port shield. Tie this terminal to
a clean ground in order to improve noise immunity when using
external communication peripherals.
This is the signal common for the communication signals.
(1) Only one analog frequency source may be connected at a time. If more than one reference is connected at the same time, an
undetermined frequency reference will result.
(2) See Footnote (1) on page 39.
41
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 525 Control I/O Terminal Block

PowerFlex 525 Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram
Safety 1
Safety 2
Safety +24V
01
S1
Safe-Torque-Off
02
S2
03
S+
SNK
SRC
04
05
06
07
08
+24V
Relay 1 N.O.
Relay 1 Common
Relay 2 Common
Relay 2 N.C.
11
R1
+10V
12
R2
13
R5
14
R6
15
0-10V
16
0/4-20 mA
17
18
30V DC
50 mA
Non-inductive
19
(1)
Stop
Start/Run FWD
DigIn TermBlk 03/
Direction/Run REV
DigIn TermBlk 05
DigIn TermBlk 06
DigIn TermBlk 08
+24V DC
+10V DC
0-10V (or 10V) Input
Analog Common
R1
R2
S1
R5
S2
Analog Output
Opto Output 1
Opto Common
RJ45 Shield
Comm Common
J5
SNK
Digital
Input
R6
S+
24V
(3)
Common
Opto Output 2
Digital In
Analog Out
0-10V
Pot must be
1...10 k ohm
2 W min.
4-20mA Input
C2
J9
Pulse In
Typical
SNK wiring
Digital Common
C1
J10
0/4-20mA
Typical
SRC wiring
SRC
01
11
12
02
13
03
14
04
15
05
16
06
17
07
18
08
C1
C2
19
Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram Notes

(1) See Digital Input Selection for Start Source on page 50 for more information on configuring the digital inputs.
IMPORTANT
I/O Terminal 01 is always a stop input. The stopping mode is determined by the
drive setting. See the tables below for more information.
Start Method
P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x]
1 Keypad
2 DigIn TrmBlk
3 Serial/DSI
4 Network Opt
5 EtherNet/IP
42
Stop Method
Coast
See t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx] below
Coast
Coast
Coast
Normal Stop
Per P045
[Stop Mode]
Installation/Wiring
Start Method
t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx]
48 2-Wire FWD
49 3-Wire Start
50 2-Wire REV
51 3-Wire Dir
IMPORTANT
Stop Method
0, 1, or 2 = Coast
0, 1, or 2 = Coast
Chapter 1
Normal Stop
Per P045
[Stop Mode]
The drive is shipped with a jumper installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 11.
Remove this jumper when using I/O Terminal 01 as a stop or enable input.
(2) Two wire control shown. For three wire control use a momentary input
on I/O Terminal 02 to command a start. Use a
maintained input
for I/O Terminal 03 to change direction.
(3) When using an opto output with an inductive load such as a relay, install a recovery diode parallel to the relay as shown, to prevent
damage to the output.

No.
R1
R2
R5
R6
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
C1
C2
S1
S2
S+
11
Signal
Relay 1 N.O.
Relay 1 Common
Relay 2 Common
Relay 2 N.C.
Stop
Default
Fault
Fault
Motor Running
Motor Running
Coast
Description
Normally open contact for output relay.
Normally closed contact for output relay.
Three wire stop. However, it functions as a stop under all input
modes and cannot be disabled.
DigIn TermBlk 02/ Run FWD
Start/Run FWD
DigIn TermBlk 03/ Run REV
Dir/Run REV
Digital Common
Return for digital I/O. Electrically isolated (along with the digital
I/O) from the rest of the drive.
DigIn TermBlk 05 Preset Freq
DigIn TermBlk 06 Preset Freq
DigIn TermBlk 07/ Start Source 2 Program with t067 [DigIn TermBlk 07].
Pulse In
+ Speed
Also functions as a Pulse Train input for reference or speed
Reference2
feedback. Requires an NPN pulse input. Maximum frequency is
100 kHz. Current consumption is 6 mA.
DigIn TermBlk 08 Jog Forward Program with t068 [DigIn TermBlk 08].
C1
This terminal is tied to the RJ-45 port shield. Tie this terminal to
a clean ground in order to improve noise immunity when using
external communication peripherals.
C2
This is the signal common for the communication signals.

Safety 1
Safety input 1. Current consumption is 6 mA.

Safety 2
Safety input 2. Current consumption is 6 mA.

Safety +24V
+24V supply for safety circuit. Internally tied to the +24V DC

source (Pin 11).
+24V DC
Referenced to Digital Common.

Drive supplied power for digital inputs.
Parameter
t076
t081
P045(1)
P045, P046,
P048, P050,
A544, t062
t063
t065
t066
t067
t068
43
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring

No. Signal
12 +10V DC
Default
13 10V In
Not Active
14 Analog Common
15 4-20mA In
Not Active
16 Analog Output
OutFreq 0-10
17 Opto Output 1
18 Opto Output 2
19 Opto Common
Description
Referenced to Analog Common.
Drive supplied power for 0...10V external potentiometer.
For external 0-10V (unipolar) or 10V (bipolar) input supply or
potentiometer wiper.
Input impedance:
Return for the analog I/O. Electrically isolated (along with the
analog I/O) from the rest of the drive.
For external 4-20 mA input supply.
Input impedance = 250
The default analog output is 0-10V. To convert a current value,

change the Analog Output jumper to 0-20 mA. Program with
t088 [Analog Out Sel]. Maximum analog value can be scaled
with t089 [Analog Out High].
Maximum Load: 4-20 mA = 525 (10.5V)
0-10V = 1 k (10 mA)
Motor Running Program with t069 [Opto Out1 Sel].
Each Opto-Output is rated 30V DC 50 mA (Non-inductive).
At Frequency Program with t072 [Opto Out1 Sel].
Each Opto-Output is rated 30V DC 50 mA (Non-inductive).
The emitters of the Optocoupler Outputs (1 and 2) are tied

together at Optocoupler Common. Electrically isolated from the
rest of the drive.
(1) See Footnote (1) on page 39.
44
Parameter
P047, P049
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
t093, A459,
A471
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
A459, A471
t088, t089
t069, t070,
t075
t072, t073,
t075
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
I/O Wiring Examples

I/O
Potentiometer
1...10k Pot.
Recommended
(2 W minimum)
Connection Example
P047 [Speed Reference1] = 5 0-10V Input
12
13
14
Analog Input
Unipolar (Voltage)
Bipolar
0-10V, 100k impedance P047 [Speed Reference1] = 5 0-10V Input P047 [Speed Reference1] = 5 0-10V Input
and t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] = 1 Bi-Polar In
4-20 mA, 250
impedance
10V
Common
13
14
+
Common
13
14
Unipolar (Current)
P047 [Speed Reference1] = 6 4-20mA Input
Common
+
PowerFlex 523 Series B
+
Common
14
15
13
14
4-20 mA
Analog In
PowerFlex 523 Series A,

PowerFlex 525
0-10V
Analog Input, PTC

For Drive Fault
Wire the PTC and External Resistor (typically matched to the PTC Hot Resistance) to I/O
Terminals 12, 13, 14.
Wire R2/R3 Relay Output (SRC) to I/O Terminals 5 & 11.
t065 [DigIn TermBlk 05] = 12 Aux Fault
t081 [Relay Out 2 Sel] = 10 Above Anlg V
t082 [Relay Out 2 Level] = % Voltage Trip
R5
R6
Re
RPTC
11
12
13
14
%VTrip =
RPTC (hot)
X 100
RPTC (hot) + Re
05
45
Installation/Wiring
Use P047, P049 and P051

[Speed Referencex] to
select pulse input.
Jumper for DigIn TermBlk
05 or 07 Sel must be
moved to Pulse In.
2 Wire SRC Control Non-Reversing
P046 [Start Source 1] = 2
and t062 [DigIn TermBlk
02] = 48
Input must be active for
the drive to run. When
input is opened, the drive
will stop as specified by
P045 [Stop Mode].
If desired, a User Supplied
24V DC power source can
be used. Refer to the
External Supply (SRC)
example.
2 Wire SNK Control Non-Reversing
Connection Example
PowerFlex 523
Common
Pulse In
PowerFlex 525
04
05
Common
Digital
Input
04
Pulse In
07
Pulse In
Digital
Input
The device connected to terminal 5 (for PowerFlex 523) or terminal 7 (for PowerFlex 525)
needs to be NPN or push-pull output driver.
Internal Supply (SRC)
11
Stop-Run
01
02
01
02
Stop-Run
04
+24V Common
Each digital input draws 6 mA.
Internal Supply (SNK)
Stop-Run
01
02
03
04
2 Wire SRC Control Internal Supply (SRC)

Run FWD/Run REV
11
P046 [Start Source 1] = 2,
t062 [DigIn TermBlk 02]
= 48 and t063 [DigIn
TermBlk 03] = 50
Stop-Run
Forward
Input must be active for
the drive to run. When
input is opened, the drive
Stop-Run
Reverse
will stop as specified by
P045 [Stop Mode].
If both Run Forward and
Run Reverse inputs are
closed at the same time,
an undetermined state
could occur.
2 Wire SNK Control Internal Supply (SNK)
Run FWD/Run REV
Stop-Run
Forward
01
02
03
Stop-Run
Forward
01
02
03
04
Stop-Run
Reverse
+24V
Common
01
02
03
04
Stop-Run
Reverse
46
Pulse In
I/O
Pulse Train Input
PowerFlex 523
= 52
PowerFlex 525
= 52
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
I/O
Connection Example
3 Wire SRC Control Internal Supply (SRC)
Non-Reversing
Stop 11
Start
TermBlk 03] = 51
A momentary input will
start the drive. A stop
input to I/O Terminal 01
will stop the drive as
specified by P045 [Stop
Mode].
Non-Reversing
Stop
Start

Stop
01
02
Start
Start
01
02
04
+24V Common
01
02
04
Internal Supply (SRC)

3 Wire SRC Control Reversing
11
Stop
TermBlk 03] = 51
Start
A momentary input will
start the drive. A stop
Direction
input to I/O Terminal 01
will stop the drive as
specified by P045 [Stop
Mode]. I/O Terminal 03
determines direction.
Reversing
Stop
Chapter 1

Stop
01
02
03
01
02
03
04
Start
Direction
+24V
Common
01
02
03
04
Direction
Opto Output (1 & 2)(1) Opto-Output 1

t069 [Opto Out1 Sel]
determines Opto-Output 1
(I/O Terminal 17)
operation.
determines Opto-Output 2
17
(I/O Terminal 18)
operation.
CR
19
When using Opto-Output
with an inductive load
+24V
Common
such as a relay, install a Each Opto-Output is rated 30V DC 50 mA (Non-inductive).
recovery diode parallel to
the relay as shown, to
prevent damage to the
output.
47
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
I/O
Analog Output(2)
t088 [Analog Out Sel]
determines analog output
type and drive conditions.
0-10V,
1k minimum
0-20 mA/4-20 mA,
525 maximum
Connection Example
t088 [Analog Out Sel] = 0 through 23
The Analog Output Select jumper must be set to match the analog output signal mode set in
t088 [Analog Out Sel].
PowerFlex 523 Series B
Common
+
PowerFlex 525
14
15
Common
14
16
(1) Feature is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only

(2) Feature is not applicable to PowerFlex 523 series A drives.
Typical Multiple Drive Connection Examples

Input/Output
Connection Example
Multiple Digital Input
02
04
Connections
Customer Inputs can be
wired per External Supply
(SRC).
Customer Inputs
02
04
02
04
Optional Ground Connection
When connecting a single input such as Run, Stop, Reverse or Preset Speeds to multiple
drives, it is important to connect I/O Terminal 04 common together for all drives. If they are to
be tied into another common (such as earth ground or separate apparatus ground) only one
point of the daisy chain of I/O Terminal 04 should be connected.
ATTENTION: I/O Common terminals should not be tied

together when using SNK (Internal Supply) mode. In
SNK mode, if power is removed from one drive,
inadvertent operation of other drives that share the
same I/O Common connection may occur.
Multiple Analog
Connections
12 13 14
Remote Potentiometer
13 14
13 14
Optional Ground Connection
When connecting a single potentiometer to multiple drives it is important to connect I/O

Terminal 14 common together for all drives. I/O Terminal 14 common and I/O Terminal 13
(potentiometer wiper) should be daisy-chained to each drive. All drives must be powered up
for the analog signal to be read correctly.
48
Installation/Wiring
Start and Speed Reference

Control
Chapter 1
Start Source and Speed Reference Selection

The start and drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different
sources. By default, start source is determined by P046 [Start Source 1] and drive
speed source is determined by P047 [Speed Reference1]. However, various inputs
can override this selection, See below for the override priority.
Purge Input Enabled Yes

AND Active
Drive will start and

run at Purge Speed.
Direction is always
FORWARD.
No
Drive will start and run at

Jog Speed.
Jog Input Enabled

AND Active
Yes
Drive stopped
(NOT running)
Yes
No
Direction is from Terminal

Block REV terminal (03),
Comms,
OR
FWD/REV determined by
Jog FWD/Jog REV command.
No
Preset Inputs Active
Yes
[Speed Referencex]
= 11 or 12 (PIDx Output)
AND
[PID x Ref Sel]
= 7 (Preset Freq)
Yes
No
No
Run as specified by
[Speed Reference3].
Yes
[Speed Reference3]
select(1)
[Start Source 3]
select(1)
No
Run as specified by
[Speed Reference2].
Yes
[Speed Reference2]
select(1)
Run as specified by
[PIDx Output].
Start and Direction

commands come from
[Start Source x].
Start and Direction

commands come from
[Start Source x].
Yes
Start and Direction

command from
[Start Source 3].(2)
No
[Start Source 2]
select(1)
No
Run as specified by
[Speed Reference1].
Run as specified by
[Preset Freq x].
Yes
Start and Direction

command from
[Start Source 2].(2)
No
Start and Direction

command from
[Start Source 1].
(1) [Start Source 2/3] and [Speed Reference2/3] can be selected by the control terminal block or communication commands.
(2) See Digital Input Selection for Start Source on page 50 for information on selecting the correct digital input.
49
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Digital Input Selection for Start Source

If P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] has been set to 2, DigIn TermBlk, then
t062 and t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx] must be configured for 2-Wire or 3-Wire
control for the drive to function properly.
[Start Source x]
[Start Source x]
= 2 (DigIn TrmBlk)
Yes
[DigIn TermBlk
02/03] = 48/49/50/51
(2-Wire or
3-Wire)
No
Start and Direction

command from
[Start Source x].
50
No
Drive will not start.
Yes
Start and Direction

command from
Terminal Block.
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
Accel/Decel Selection
The Accel/Decel rate can be obtained by a variety of methods. The default rate is
determined by P041 [Accel Time 1] and P042 [Decel Time 1]. Alternative
Accel/Decel rates can be made through digital inputs, communications and/or
parameters. See below for the override priority.
Purge Input Enabled

AND Active
Yes
Accel/Decel always
Accel/Decel 1.
Yes
[Sync Time] is used

for Accel/Decel rate
No
Active [DigIn TermBlk xx]

= 32 (Sync Enable)
No
Traverse active if
[Max Traverse] > 0 Hz
Yes
Traverse Inc/Dec
is used for
Accel/Decel rate
No
Terminal Block Jog

Input Enabled AND
Active
Yes
Drive stopped
(NOT running)
Yes
Accel/Decel from
[Jog Acc/Dec].
No
No
Input(s) is
programmed as
Acc/Dec
(2/3/4)
Yes
Accel/Decel 2 is active
when input is selected
by Accel and Decel input.
No
Is speed controlled
by [Preset Freq x]
Yes
Accel/Decel 1/2/3/4 is
selected by the default
[Preset Freq x] setting.
No
Active
[Speed Referencex]
= Comms
and
[Start Source x]
= 3 Serial/DSI or
4 Network Opt or
5 EtherNet/IP
Yes
Accel/Decel 1 or 2 is
selected according
to Comms.
No
Active
[Speed Referencex]
= 13 (Step Logic)(1)
Yes
Accel/Decel 1/2/3/4 is
selected according to
Step Logic
No
Drive uses Accel 1

and Decel 1.
51
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
CE Conformity
Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility

Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm (EN)
standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities.
PowerFlex 520-series drives comply with the EN standards listed below when
installed according to the installation instructions in this manual.
CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/.
Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC and 2014/35/EU)

EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-1:
Safety requirements Electrical, thermal and energy.
Pollution Degree Ratings According to EN 61800-5-1
Pollution
Degree
1
2
Description
No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has no influence.
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary
conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected, when the drive is out of operation.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC and 2014/30/EU)

EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3:
EMC requirements and specific test methods
Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)

EN ISO 13849-1 Safety of machinery Safety related parts of control
systems -Part 1: General principles for design
EN 62061 Safety of machinery Functional safety of safety-related
electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1: General requirements
EN 61800-5-2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-2:
Safety requirement Functional
Refer to Appendix G for installation consideration related to Machinery
Directive.
ATEX Directive (94/9/EC and 2014/34/EU)

EN 50495 Safety devices required for the safe functioning of equipment
with respect to explosion risks.
52
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
General Considerations
For CE compliance, drives must satisfy installation requirements related to
both EN 61800-5-1 and EN 61800-3 provided in this document.
PowerFlex 520-series drives must be installed in a pollution degree 1 or 2
environment to be compliant with the CE LV Directive. See Pollution
Degree Ratings According to EN 61800-5-1 on page 52 for descriptions of
each pollution degree rating.
PowerFlex 520-series drives comply with the EMC requirements of EN
61800-3 when installed according to good EMC practices and the
instructions provided in this document. However, many factors can
influence the EMC compliance of an entire machine or installation, and
compliance of the drive itself does not ensure compliance of all
applications.
PowerFlex 520-series drives are not intended to be used on public lowvoltage networks which supply domestic premises. Without additional
mitigation, radio frequency interference is expected if used on such a
network. The installer is responsible for taking measures such as a
supplementary line filter and enclosure (see Connections and Grounding
on page 55) to prevent interference, in addition to the installation
requirements of this document.
ATTENTION: NEMA/UL Open Type drives must either be installed in a
supplementary enclosure or equipped with a NEMA Type 1 Kit to be
CE compliant with respect to protection against electrical shock.
PowerFlex 520-series drives generate harmonic current emissions on the
AC supply system. When operated on a public low-voltage network it is
the responsibility of the installer or user to ensure that applicable
requirements of the distribution network operator have been met.
Consultation with the network operator and Rockwell Automation may
be necessary.
If the optional NEMA 1 kit is not installed, the drive must be installed in
an enclosure with side openings less than 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) and top
openings less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) to maintain compliance with the LV
Directive.
The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid
electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents.
Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended.
In CE installations, input power must be a Balanced Wye with Center
Ground configuration for EMC compliance.
Installation Requirements Related to EN 61800-5-1 and the Low Voltage Directive

600V PowerFlex 520-series drives can only be used on a center grounded
supply system for altitudes up to and including 2000 m (6562 ft).
53
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
When used at altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft) up to a maximum of

4800 m (15,748 ft), PowerFlex 520-series drives of voltage classes up to
480V may not be powered from a corner-earthed supply system in order
to maintain compliance with the CE LV Directive. See Derating
Guidelines for High Altitude on page 18.
PowerFlex 520-series drives produce leakage current in the protective
earthing conductor which exceeds 3.5 mA AC and/or 10 mA DC. The
minimum size of the protective earthing (grounding) conductor used in
the application must comply with local safety regulations for high
protective earthing conductor current equipment.
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 520-series drives produce DC current in the
protective earthing conductor which may reduce the ability of RCDs
(residual current-operated protective devices) or RCMs (residual
current-operated monitoring devices) of type A or AC to provide
protection for other equipment in the installation. Where an RCD or
RCM is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only an
RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on the supply side of this product.
Installation Requirements Related to EN 61800-3 and the EMC Directive

The drive must be earthed (grounded) as described in Connections and
Grounding on page 55. See General Grounding Requirements on page 20
for additional grounding recommendations.
Output power wiring to the motor must employ cables with a braided
shield providing 75% or greater coverage, or the cables must be housed in
metal conduit, or equivalent shield must be provided. Continuous
shielding must be provided from the drive enclosure to the motor
enclosure. Both ends of the motor cable shield (or conduit) must terminate
with a low-impedance connection to earth.
Drive Frames A...E: At the drive end of the motor, either
a. The cable shield must be clamped to a properly installed EMC Plate
for the drive. Kit number 25-EMC1-Fx.
or
b. The cable shield or conduit must terminate in a shielded connector
installed in an EMC plate, conduit box, or similar.
At the motor end, the motor cable shield or conduit must terminate in a
shielded connector which must be properly installed in an earthed motor
wiring box attached to the motor. The motor wiring box cover must be
installed and earthed.
All control (I/O) and signal wiring to the drive must use cable with a
braided shield providing 75% or greater coverage, or the cables must be
housed in metal conduit, or equivalent shielding must be provided. When
shielded cable is used, the cable shield should be terminated with a low
impedance connection to earth at only one end of the cable, preferably the
end where the receiver is located. When the cable shield is terminated at
the drive end, it may be terminated either by using a shielded connector in
conjunction with a conduit plate or conduit box, or the shield may be
clamped to an EMC plate.
54
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
Motor cabling must be separated from control and signal wiring wherever
possible.
Maximum motor cable length must not exceed the maximum length
indicated in PowerFlex 520-Series RF Emission Compliance and
Installation Requirements on page 55 for compliance with radio frequency
emission limits for the specific standard and installation environment.
Connections and Grounding
Shielded enclosure(1)
Esc

option kit or EMC kit
Sel
EMI fittings and metal conduit

EMI filter
L1
L1'
L2
L2'
L3
L3'
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Enclosure ground connection
Shielded motor cable
Building structure steel

(1) Some installations require a shielded enclosure. Keep wire length as short as possible between the enclosure entry point and the
EMI filter.
PowerFlex 520-Series RF Emission Compliance and Installation Requirements

Filter Type
Internal
External(1)
Standard/Limits
EN61800-3 Category C1
EN61000-6-3
CISPR11 Group 1 Class B
30 m (16 ft)
EN61000-6-4
CISPR11 Group 1 Class A
(Input power 20 kVA)
10 m (33 ft)
100 m (328 ft)
(I 100 A)
CISPR11 Group 1 Class A
(Input power > 20 kVA)
20 m (66 ft)
100 m (328 ft)
(1) See Appendix B for more information on optional external filters.
Additional Installation Requirements

This section provides information on additional requirements for category C1
and C2 installation, such as enclosures and EMC cores.
IMPORTANT
EMC cores are included with:

drives that have an internal EMC filter (25x-xxxxN114)
external EMC filter accessory kit (25-RFxxx)
IMPORTANT
An enclosure, shielded input cable, and EMC cores are not required to meet
category C3 requirements.
55
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Additional Installation Requirements

Frame
Size
Category C1
Enclosure
Category C2
Conduit or Shielded EMC Cores Required
Enclosure
Cable @ Input
(Included with product)
100...120V AC (-15%, +10%) 1-Phase Input with External EMC Filter, 0...120V 1-Phase Output
A
No
No
No
No
B
No
No
No
No
A
Yes
Yes
No
No
B
Yes
Yes
Output only
No
200...240V AC (-15%, +10%) 1-Phase Input with Internal EMC Filter, 0...230V 3-Phase Output(1)
A
*
*
*
Yes
B
*
*
*
Yes
A
Yes
Yes
Output only
No
B
Yes
Yes
Output only
No
C
Yes
Yes
Output only
No
D
Yes
Yes
No
No
E
Yes
Yes
Output only
No
A
Yes
Yes
No
No
B
Yes
Yes
No
No
C
Yes
Yes
No
No
D
Yes
Yes
Output only
No
E
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
380...480V AC (-15%, +10%) 3-Phase Input with Internal EMC Filter, 0...460V 3-Phase Output(1)
A
*
*
*
No
B
*
*
*
No
C
*
*
*
No
D
*
*
*
No
E
*
*
*
No
A
Yes
Yes
No
No
B
Yes
Yes
No
No
C
Yes
Yes
No
No
D
Yes
Yes
No
No
E
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Conduit or Shielded
Cable @ Input
EMC Cores Required

(Included with product)
No
No
No
No
No
No
Input/Output
Input/Output
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input only
Input only
No
No
No
No
No
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input only
Input/Output
Input/Output
No
No
No
No
No
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
No
No
No
No
No
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
No
(1) An (*) indicates that EMC requirements are not met.
56
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 1
Recommended Placement of EMC Cores

Frame A
Frame B
With optional EMC plate (25-EMC-Fx)
Frame C
Frame D
Frame E
Ground
cable
CORE-E-1
CORE-xx-B-1
CORE-xx-A-1
CORE-xx-A-2
CORE-xx-B-2
CORE-E-3
CORE-xx-D-1
CORE-xx-C-1
CORE-E-2
CORE-xx-D-2
CORE-xx-C-2
CORE-E-4
Without EMC plate

Ground
cable
CORE-E-1
CORE-E-3
CORE-E-4
CORE-xx-x-1
CORE-E-2
CORE-xx-x-2
Input cable to drive (Shielded or Unshielded)
Output cable from drive (Shielded)

Secure EMC core by
using cable/zip ties
Shows contact to
shielded layer
IMPORTANT
The ground cable/shield for both input and output must pass through the EMC core(s), except for the following:
Frame E drives with internal filters where the grounded input cable must not pass through EMC CORE-E-1.
600V drives with external filters where the grounded output cable must not pass through the EMC core(s).
Recommended Placement of EMC Cores Relative to External Filter

All Frame sizes
Incoming power
EMC Filter
Drive
Input core
Motor
Output core
57
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
Notes:
58
Chapter
Start Up
This chapter describes how to start up the PowerFlex 520-series drive. To simplify
drive setup, the most commonly programmed parameters are organized in a
single Basic Program Group.
Prepare for Drive Start-Up
Display and Control Keys
Viewing and Editing Parameters
Drive Programming Tools
Smart Start-Up with Basic Program Group Parameters
LCD Display with QuickView Technology
Using the USB Port
IMPORTANT
See page...
59
62
63
64
65
67
67
Read the General Precautions section before proceeding.

ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following
start-up procedures. Some of the voltages present are at incoming line
potential. To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment, only
qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure.
Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning. If an event
does not occur while performing this procedure, Do Not Proceed. Remove All
Power including user supplied control voltages. User supplied voltages may
exist even when main AC power is not applied to the drive. Correct the
malfunction before continuing.
Prepare for Drive Start-Up
Drive Startup Task List

1. Disconnect and lock out power to the machine.
2. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value
of the drive.
3. If replacing a drive, verify the current drives catalog number. Verify all
options installed on the drive.
4. Verify that any digital control power is 24 volts.
5. Inspect grounding, wiring, connections, and environmental compatibility.
59
Chapter 2
Start Up
6. Verify that the Sink (SNK)/Source (SRC) jumper is set to match your
control wiring scheme. See the PowerFlex 523 Control I/O Wiring Block
Diagram on page 38 and PowerFlex 525 Control I/O Wiring Block
Diagram on page 42 for location.
IMPORTANT
The default control scheme is Source (SRC). The Stop terminal is jumpered to
allow starting from the keypad or comms. If the control scheme is changed to
Sink (SNK), the jumper must be removed from I/O Terminals 01 and 11 and
installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 04.
7. Wire I/O as required for the application.

8. Wire the power input and output terminals.
9. Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are
secure.
10. Collect and record motor nameplate and encoder or feedback device
information. Verify motor connections.
Is the motor uncoupled?
What direction will the motor need to turn for the application?
11. Verify the input voltage to the drive. Verify if the drive is on a grounded
system. Ensure the MOV jumpers are in the correct position. See AC
Supply Source Considerations on page 19 for more information.
12. Apply power and reset the drive and communication adapters to factory
default settings. To reset the drive, see parameter P053 [Reset to Defalts].
To reset the communication adapters, see the user manual of the adapter
for more information.
13. Configure the basic program parameters related to the motor. See Smart
Start-Up with Basic Program Group Parameters on page 65.
14. Complete the autotune procedure for the drive. See parameter P040
[Autotune] for more information.
15. If you are replacing a drive and have a backup of the parameter settings
obtained using the USB utility application, use the USB utility application
to apply the backup to the new drive. See Using the USB Port on page 67
for more information.
Otherwise, set the necessary parameters for your application using the
LCD keypad interface, Connected Components Workbench, or RSLogix
or Logix Designer if using an Add-on Profile through EtherNet/IP.
Configure the communication parameters needed for the application
(node number, IP address, Datalinks in and out, communication rate,
speed reference, start source, and so on). Record these settings for your
reference.
Configure the other drive parameters needed for the drive analog and
digital I/O to work correctly. Verify the operation. Record these
settings for your reference.
60
Start Up
Chapter 2
16. Verify the drive and motor perform as specified.

Verify that the Stop input is present or the drive will not start.
IMPORTANT
If I/O Terminal 01 is used as a stop input, the jumper between I/O

Terminals 01 and 11 must be removed.
Verify the drive is receiving the speed reference from the correct place
and that the reference is scaled correctly.
Verify the drive is receiving start and stop commands correctly.
Verify input currents are balanced.
Verify motor currents are balanced.
17. Save a backup of the drive settings using the USB utility application. See
Using the USB Port on page 67 for more information.
Start, Stop, Direction and Speed Control

Factory default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the
keypad. No programming is required to start, stop, change direction and control
speed directly from the keypad.
IMPORTANT
To disable reverse operation, see A544 [Reverse Disable].
If a fault appears on power up, see Fault Descriptions on page 159 for an
explanation of the fault code.
Variable Torque Fan/Pump Applications

For improved motor and drive performance, tune the motor in SVC mode using
parameter P040 [Autotune]. If V/Hz mode is selected, use parameter A530
[Boost Select] to adjust the boost.
61
Chapter 2
Start Up
Display and Control Keys
PowerFlex 523
Menu
FWD
Esc
Sel
PowerFlex 525
FWD
ENET LINK
EtherNet/IP
Esc
Sel
Parameter Group and Description

Basic Display
Commonly viewed drive operating conditions.
Basic Program
Commonly used programmable functions.
Terminal Blocks
Programmable terminal functions.
Communications
Programmable communication functions.
Logic (PowerFlex 525 only)
Programmable logic functions.
Advanced Display
Advanced drive operating conditions.
Advanced Program
Remaining programmable functions.
Network
Network functions that are shown only when a comm
card is used.
Modified
Functions from the other groups with values changed
from default.
Fault and Diagnostic
Consists of list of codes for specific fault conditions.
AppView and CustomView
Functions from the other groups organized for specific
applications.
Control and Navigation Keys

Display
ENET (PowerFlex 525 only)
LINK (PowerFlex 525 only)
Display State Description

Off
Adapter is not connected to the network.
Steady
Adapter is connected to the network and drive is controlled
through Ethernet.
Flashing
Adapter is connected to the network but drive is not controlled
through Ethernet.
Off
Adapter is not connected to the network.
Steady
Adapter is connected to the network but not transmitting data.
Flashing
Adapter is connected to the network and transmitting data.
LED
FAULT
LED State
Flashing Red
Description
Indicates drive is faulted.
Key
Name
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Description
Scroll through user-selectable display parameters or groups.
Increment values.
Escape
Back one step in programming menu.

Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program Mode.
Select
Advance one step in programming menu.

Select a digit when viewing parameter value.
Enter
Advance one step in programming menu.

Save a change to a parameter value.
Esc
Sel
62
Start Up
Key
Viewing and Editing

Parameters
Chapter 2
Name
Reverse
Description
Used to reverse direction of the drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameters P046, P048 and P050 [Start Source x]
and A544 [Reverse Disable].
Start
Used to start the drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameters P046, P048 and P050 [Start Source x].
Stop
Used to stop the drive or clear a fault.
This key is always active.
Controlled by parameter P045 [Stop Mode].
Potentiometer Used to control speed of drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameters P047, P049 and P051
[Speed Referencex].
The following is an example of basic integral keypad and display functions. This
example provides basic navigation instructions and illustrates how to program
a parameter.
Step
Key(s)
1. When power is applied, the last user-selected
Basic Display Group parameter number is briefly
displayed with flashing characters. The display
then defaults to that parameters current value.
(Example shows the value of b001 [Output
Freq] with the drive stopped.)
2. Press Esc to display the Basic Display Group
parameter number shown on power-up. The
parameter number will flash.
Esc
Example Display
FWD
HERTZ
FWD
3. Press Esc to enter the parameter group list. The

parameter group letter will flash.
FWD
Esc
4. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll

through the group list (b, P, t, C, L, d, A, f and
Gx).
5. Press Enter or Sel to enter a group. The right
digit of the last viewed parameter in that group
will flash.

through the parameter list.
or
or Sel
or
7. Press Enter to view the value of the parameter.

Or
Press Esc to return to the parameter list.
8. Press Enter or Sel to enter Program Mode and
edit the value. The right digit will flash and the
word Program on the LCD display will light up.
9. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change

the parameter value.
FWD
FWD
FWD
VOLTS
FWD
VOLTS
or Sel
or
FWD
PROGRAM
VOLTS
FWD
PROGRAM
63
Chapter 2
Start Up
Step
Key(s)
10. If desired, press Sel to move from digit to digit
or bit to bit. The digit or bit that you can change Sel
will flash.
11. Press Esc to cancel a change and exit Program
Mode.
Or
Press Enter to save a change and exit Program
Mode.
The digit will stop flashing and the word
Program on the LCD display will turn off.
12. Press Esc to return to the parameter list.
Continue to press Esc to back out of the
programming menu.
If pressing Esc does not change the display, then
b001 [Output Freq] is displayed. Press Enter or
Sel to enter the group list again.
Drive Programming Tools
Example Display
VOLTS
FWD
PROGRAM
VOLTS
FWD
Esc
or
or
VOLTS
FWD
FWD
Esc
Some features in the PowerFlex 520-series drive are not supported by older
configuration software tools. It is strongly recommended that customers using
such tools migrate to RSLogix 5000 (version 17.0 or greater) or Logix Designer
(version 21.0 or greater) with Add-On-Profile (AOP), or Connected
Components Workbench (version 5.0 or greater) to enjoy a richer, full-featured
configuration experience. For Automatic Device Configuration (ADC) support,
RSLogix 5000 version 20.0 or greater is required.
Description
Connected Components Workbench(1)
Logix Designer
RSLogix 5000
Built-in USB software tool
Serial Converter Module(2)
USB Converter Module(2)
Remote Panel Mount, LCD Display(2)
Remote Handheld, LCD Display(2)
Catalog Number/Release Version

Version 5.0 or greater
22-SCM-232
1203-USB
22-HIM-C2S
22-HIM-A3
(1) Available as a free download at http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/programmable-controllers/connected-componentsworkbench-software.

(2) Does not support the new dynamic parameter groups (AppView, CustomView), and CopyCat functionality is limited to the linear
parameter list.
Language Support
64
Language
Keypad/LCD Display
English
French
Spanish
Italian
German
Japanese
Portuguese
Chinese Simplified
Korean
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RSLogix 5000/
Logix Designer
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Connected Components
Workbench
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Start Up
Language
Keypad/LCD Display
Polish(1)
Turkish(1)
Czech(1)
Y
Y
Y
RSLogix 5000/
Logix Designer
Chapter 2
Workbench
(1) Due to a limitation of the LCD Display, some of the characters for Polish, Turkish, and Czech will be modified.
Smart Start-Up with Basic

Program Group Parameters
The PowerFlex 520-series drive is designed so that start up is simple and efficient.
The Basic Program Group contains the most commonly used parameters. See
Programming and Parameters on page 71 for detailed descriptions of the
parameters listed here, as well as the full list of available parameters.
= Stop drive before changing this parameter.
= Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
No.
Parameter
Min/Max
P030 [Language]
1/15
Selects the language displayed.
Important: The setting takes effect after the drive
is power cycled.
PF 525
P031
P032
P033
P034
P035
P036
P037
PF 525
P038
[Motor NP Volts]
10V (for 200V Drives), 20V

(for 400V Drives), 25V (for
600V Drives)/Drive Rated
Volts
Sets the motor nameplate rated volts.
[Motor NP Hertz]
15/500 Hz
Sets the motor nameplate rated frequency.
[Motor OL Current] 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps x 2)
Sets the motor nameplate overload current.
[Motor NP FLA]
0.0/(Drive Rated Amps x 2)
Sets the motor nameplate FLA.
[Motor NP Poles]
2/40
Sets the number of poles in the motor.
[Motor NP RPM]
0/24000 rpm
Sets the rated nameplate rpm of motor.
Display/Options
1 = English
2 = Franais
3 = Espaol
4 = Italiano
5 = Deutsch
6 = Reserved
7 = Portugus
8 = Reserved
9 = Reserved
10 = Reserved
11 = Reserved
12 = Polish
13 = Reserved
14 = Turkish
15 = Czech
1V
Default
1
1 Hz
60 Hz
0.1 A
Based on Drive Rating
0.1 A
Drive Rated Amps
1 rpm
1750 rpm
[Motor NP Power] 0.00/Drive Rated Power

0.01 kW
Sets the motor nameplate power. Used in PM
regulator.
[Voltage Class]
2/3
2 = 480V
Sets the voltage class of 600V drives. Only applicable 3 = 600V
to 600V drives.
Drive Rated Power
65
Chapter 2
Start Up

No.
Parameter
Min/Max
Display/Options
P039 [Torque Perf Mode] 0/4
0 = V/Hz
1 = SVC
Selects the motor control mode.
2 = Economize
3 = Vector(1)
(1)(2)(3)
(2) Setting is available in PowerFlex 525 FRN 5.xxx and 4 = PM Control
PF 525
Default
1
later.
(3) When P039 [Torque Perf Mode] is set to 4 and
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] is set to 0, 1, 2 or 3, the drive
is in open loop PM motor control mode.
When P039 [Torque Perf Mode] is set to 4 and
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] is set to 4 or 5, the drive is in
closed loop PM motor control mode.
P040
[Autotune]
0/2
Enables a static (not spinning) or dynamic (motor
spinning) autotune.
[Accel Time 1]
0.00/600.00 s
Sets the time for the drive to accel from 0 Hz to
[Maximum Freq].
[Decel Time 1]
0.00/600.00 s
Sets the time for the drive to decel from [Maximum
Freq] to 0 Hz.
[Minimum Freq]
0.00/500.00 Hz
Sets the lowest frequency the drive outputs.
0 = Ready/Idle
1 = Static Tune
2 = Rotate Tune
0.01 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
10.00 s
0.01 Hz
0.00 Hz
P044
[Maximum Freq]
0.00/500.00 Hz
Sets the highest frequency the drive outputs.
0.01 Hz
60.00 Hz
P045
[Stop Mode]
0/11
Stop command for normal stop.
Important: I/O Terminal 01 is always a stop input.
The stopping mode is determined by the drive
setting.
Important: The drive is shipped with a jumper
installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 11. Remove
this jumper when using I/O Terminal 01 as a stop or
enable input.
0 = Ramp, CF(1)
1 = Coast, CF(1)
2 = DC Brake, CF(1)
3 = DCBrkAuto,CF(1)
4 = Ramp
5 = Coast
6 = DC Brake
7 = DC BrakeAuto
8 = Ramp+EM B,CF(1)
9 = Ramp+EM Brk
10 = PointStp,CF(1)
11 = PointStop
1 = Keypad(1)
2 = DigIn TrmBlk(2)
3 = Serial/DSI
4 = Network Opt
5 = Ethernet/IP(3)
P041
P042
P043
(1) Stop input also clears active fault.
P046, [Start Source 1]

1/5
P048, Sets the default control scheme used to start the
P050 drive unless overriden by P048 [Start Source 2] or
P050 [Start Source 3].
(1) When active, the Reverse key is also active unless
disabled by A544 [Reverse Disable].
(2) If DigIn TrmBlk is selected, ensure that the digital
inputs are properly configured.
66
P046 = 1
P048 = 2
P050 = 3 (PowerFlex 523)
5 (PowerFlex 525)
Start Up

No.
Parameter
Min/Max
P047, [Speed Reference1] 1/16
P049, Sets the default speed command of the drive unless
P051 overridden by P049 [Speed Reference2] or P051
[Speed Reference3].
Chapter 2
PF 525
P052
P053
[Average kWh Cost] 0.00/655.35

Sets the average cost per kWh.
[Reset To Defalts]
0/4
Resets parameters to their factory defaults values.
After a Reset command, the value of this parameter
returns to zero.
Display/Options
1 = Drive Pot
2 = Keypad Freq
3 = Serial/DSI
4 = Network Opt
5 = 0-10V Input
6 = 4-20mA Input
7 = Preset Freq
8 = Anlg In Mult(1)
9 = MOP
10 = Pulse Input
11 = PID1 Output
12 = PID2 Output(1)
13 = Step Logic(1)
14 = Encoder(1)
15 = Ethernet/IP(1)
16 = Positioning(1)
0.01
Default
P047 = 1
P049 = 5
P051 = 3 (PowerFlex 523)
15 (PowerFlex 525)
0.00
0
0 = Ready/Idle
1 = Param Reset
2 = Factory Rset
3 = Power Reset
4 = Module Reset(1)(2)(3)
(1) Power cycle of the drive, NO parameters are reset.

(2) Setting is available in PowerFlex 525 FRN 5.xxx and
later.
(3) Setting is available in PowerFlex 523 FRN 3.xxx and
later.
LCD Display with QuickView

Technology
QuickView technology enables text to scroll across the LCD display of the
PowerFlex 520-series drive. This allows you to easily configure parameters,
troubleshoot faults and view diagnostic items without using a separate device.
Use parameter A556 [Text Scroll] to set the speed at which the text scrolls across
the display. Select 0 Off to turn off text scrolling. See Language Support on
page 64 for the languages supported by the PowerFlex 520-series drive.
Using the USB Port
The PowerFlex 520-series drive has a USB port that connects to a PC for the
purpose of upgrading drive firmware or uploading/downloading a parameter
configuration.
IMPORTANT
To use the USB feature of the PowerFlex 520-series drive, Microsoft .Net
Framework 2.0 and Windows XP or later is required.
MainsFree Programming
The MainsFree programming feature allows you to quickly configure your
PowerFlex 520-series drive without having to power up the control module or
install additional software. Simply connect the control module to your PC with a
USB Type B cable and you can download a parameter configuration to your
drive. You can also easily upgrade your drive with the latest firmware.
67
Chapter 2
Start Up
Connecting a PowerFlex 520-series drive to a PC

Control Module
USB port
USB Type B cable
Connect to PC
Connect to Control Module
When connected, the drive appears on the PC and contains two files:
GUIDE.PDF
This file contains links to relevant product documentation and software
downloads.
PF52XUSB.EXE
This file is an application to flash upgrade firmware or upload/download a
parameter configuration.
It is not possible to delete these files or add more to the drive.
Double-click on the PF52XUSB.EXE file to launch the USB utility application.

The main menu is displayed. Follow the program instructions to upgrade the
firmware or upload/download configuration data.
IMPORTANT
68
Make sure your PC is powered by an AC power outlet or has a fully charged

battery before starting any operation. This prevents the operation from
terminating before completion due to insufficient power.
Start Up
Chapter 2
Limitation in Downloading .pf5 Configuration Files with the USB

Utility Application
Before downloading a .pf5 configuration file using the USB utility application,
parameter C169 [MultiDrv Sel] in the destination drive must match the
incoming configuration file. If it does not, set the parameter manually to match
and then cycle drive power. Also, the drive type of the .pf5 file must match the
drive.
This means you cannot apply a multi-drive configuration using the USB utility
application to a drive in single mode (parameter C169 [MultiDrv Sel] set to 0
Disabled), or apply a single mode configuration to a drive in multi-drive mode.
69
Chapter 2
Start Up
Notes:
70
Chapter
This chapter provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 520series drive parameters. Parameters are programmed (viewed/edited) using either
the drives built-in keypad, RSLogix 5000 version 17.0 or greater, Logix Designer
version 21.0 or greater, o r Connected Components Workbench version 5.0 or
greater software. The Connected Components Workbench software can be used
offline (through USB) to upload parameter configurations to the drive or online
(through Ethernet connection).
Limited functionality is also available when using the Connected Components
Workbench software online (through DSI and serial converter module), a legacy
external HIM, or legacy software online (DriveTools SP). When using these
methods, the parameter list can only be displayed linearly, and there is no access
to communications option card programming.
About Parameters
Parameter Groups
Basic Display Group
Basic Program Group
Terminal Block Group
Communications Group
Logic Group
Advanced Display Group
Advanced Program Group
Network Parameter Group
Modified Parameter Group
Fault and Diagnostic Group
AppView Parameter Groups
CustomView Parameter Group
Parameter Cross Reference by Name
About Parameters
See page...
71
73
78
83
89
101
107
110
115
141
142
142
150
151
152
To configure a drive to operate in a specific way, drive parameters may have to be

set. Three types of parameters exist:
ENUM
ENUM parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items. Each item is
represented by a number.
Numeric Parameters
These parameters have a single numerical value (0.1V).
71
Chapter 3
Bit Parameters
Bit parameters have five individual digits associated with features or
conditions. If the digit is 0, the feature is off or the condition is false. If the
digit is 1, the feature is on or the condition is true.
Some parameters are marked as follows.
32
PF 525
= 32 bit parameter.
32-bit Parameters
Parameters marked 32-bit will have two parameter numbers when using RS485
communications and programming software. For example, parameters b010
[Process Display] and b011 [Process Fract] are scaled and displayed as follows.
P043 [Minimum Freq] = 0 Hz
P044 [Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz
A481 [Process Display Lo] = 0
A482 [Process Display Hi] = 10
Using the forumla,
Scaled Process Value (PV) =
([Process Disp Hi] - [Process Disp Lo]) x ([Output Freq] - [Minimum Freqp])
[Maximum Freq] - [Minimum Freq]
when the drive is running at 10 Hz, the Process Value will be 1.66.
On the drive LCD display, only parameter b010 [Process Display] is shown.
In Connected Components Workbench software, parameter b010 [Process

Display] and b011 [Process Fract] are shown separately.
72
For an alphabetical listing of parameters, see Parameter Cross Reference by Name

on page 152.
Parameter Groups
Basic Display
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Output Current
Basic Program
b001
b002
b003
Language
Motor NP Volts
Terminal Blocks
P030
P031
DigIn TermBlk 02
DigIn TermBlk 03
2-Wire Mode
DigIn TermBlk 05
DigIn TermBlk 06
Communications
t062
t063
t064
t065
t066
Comm Write Mode

Cmd Stat Select(1)
RS485 Data Rate
RS485 Node Addr
Comm Loss Action
Comm Loss Time
RS485 Format
Logic(1)
C121
C122
C123
C124
C125
C126
C127
Stp Logic 0
Stp Logic 1
Advanced Display
L180
L181
Analog In 0-10V
Analog In 4-20mA
Elapsed Time-hr
d360
d361
d362
Chapter 3
Output Voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Drive Status
Fault 1 Code
Fault 2 Code
Fault 3 Code
Process Display
Motor NP Hertz
Motor OL Current
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Poles
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Power(1)
DigIn TermBlk 07(1)
DigIn TermBlk 08(1)
Opto Out1 Sel(1)
Opto Out1 Level(1)
Opto Out2 Sel(1)
Opto Out2 Level(1)
Opto Out Logic(1)
Relay Out1 Sel
Relay Out1 Level
EN Addr Sel(1)
EN IP Addr Cfg 1(1)
EN IP Addr Cfg 2(1)
EN IP Addr Cfg 3(1)
EN IP Addr Cfg 4(1)
EN Subnet Cfg 1(1)
EN Subnet Cfg 2(1)
EN Subnet Cfg 3(1)
EN Subnet Cfg 4(1)
EN Gateway Cfg 1(1)
EN Gateway Cfg 2(1)
Stp Logic 2
Stp Logic 3
Stp Logic 4
Stp Logic 5
Stp Logic 6
Stp Logic 7
Elapsed Time-min
Counter Status
Timer Status
Drive Type
Testpoint Data
Motor OL Level
Slip Hz Meter
b004
b005
b006
b007
b008
b009
b010
P032
P033
P034
P035
P036
P037
t067
t068
t069
t070
t072
t073
t075
t076
t077
C128
C129
C130
C131
C132
C133
C134
C135
C136
C137
C138
L182
L183
L184
L185
L186
L187
d363
d364
d365
d367
d368
d369
d375
Control Source
Contrl In Status
Dig In Status
Output RPM
Output Speed
Output Power
Power Saved
Voltage Class
Torque Perf Mode
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Relay 1 On Time
Relay 1 Off Time
Relay Out2 Sel(1)
Relay Out2 Level(1)
Relay 2 On Time(1)
Relay 2 Off Time(1)
EM Brk Off Delay
EM Brk On Delay
Analog Out Sel(2)
EN Gateway Cfg 3(1)
EN Gateway Cfg 4(1)
EN Rate Cfg(1)
EN Comm Flt Actn(1)
EN Idle Flt Actn(1)
EN Flt Cfg Logic(1)
EN Flt Cfg Ref(1)
EN Flt Cfg DL 1(1)
EN Flt Cfg DL 2(1)
EN Flt Cfg DL 3(1)
EN Flt Cfg DL 4(1)
Stp Logic Time 0
Stp Logic Time 1
Stp Logic Time 2
Stp Logic Time 3
Stp Logic Time 4
Stp Logic Time 5
Speed Feedback
Encoder Speed(2)
DC Bus Ripple
Output Powr Fctr
Torque Current
PID1 Fdbk Displ
PID1 Setpnt Disp
b012
b013
b014
b015
b016
b017
b018
P038
P039
P040
P041
P042
P043
t079
t080
t081
t082
t084
t085
t086
t087
t088
C139
C140
C141
C143
C144
C145
C146
C147
C148
C149
C150
L190
L191
L192
L193
L194
L195
d376
d378
d380
d381
d382
d383
d384
Elapsed Run Time

Average Power
Elapsed kWh
Elapsed MWh
Energy Saved
Accum kWh Sav
Accum Cost Sav
Maximum Freq
Stop Mode
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
Start Source 2
Speed Reference2
Analog Out High(2)
Anlg Out Setpt(2)
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
10V Bipolar Enbl(1)
Anlg In V Loss
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Anlg In mA Loss
EN Data In 1(1)
EN Data In 2(1)
EN Data In 3(1)
EN Data In 4(1)
EN Data Out 1(1)
EN Data Out 2(1)
EN Data Out 3(1)
EN Data Out 4(1)
Opt Data In 1
Opt Data In 2
Opt Data In 3
Stp Logic Time 6
Stp Logic Time 7
Step Units 0
Step Units 1
Step Units 2
Step Units 3
PID2 Fdbk Displ(1)
PID2 Setpnt Disp(1)
Position Status(1)
Units Traveled H(1)
Units Traveled L(1)
Fiber Status
Stp Logic Status(1)
b019
b020
b021
b022
b023
b024
b025
P044
P045
P046
P047
P048
P049
t089
t090
t091
t092
t093
t094
t095
t096
t097
C153
C154
C155
C156
C157
C158
C159
C160
C161
C162
C163
L196
L197
L200
L202
L204
L206
d385
d386
d387
d388
d389
d390
d391
Accum CO2 Sav

Drive Temp
Control Temp
Control SW Ver
b026
b027
b028
b029
Start Source 3
Speed Reference3
Average kWh Cost
Reset To Defalts
P050
P051
P052
P053
Anlg Loss Delay

Analog In Filter
Sleep-Wake Sel
Sleep Level
Sleep Time
Wake Level
Wake Time
Safety Open En(1)
SafetyFlt RstCfg(1)(3)
Opt Data In 4
Opt Data Out 1
Opt Data Out 2
Opt Data Out 3
Opt Data Out 4
MultiDrv Sel
Drv 1 Addr
Drv 2 Addr
Drv 3 Addr
Drv 4 Addr
DSI I/O Cfg
Step Units 4
Step Units 5
Step Units 6
Step Units 7
t098
t099
t100
t101
t102
t103
t104
t105
t106
C164
C165
C166
C167
C168
C169
C171
C172
C173
C174
C175
L208
L210
L212
L214
RdyBit Mode Act(2)(4)

Drive Status 2(2)(3)
Dig Out Status(2)(3)
d392
d393
d394
73
Chapter 3
Advanced Program
Preset Freq 0
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Preset Freq 8(1)
Preset Freq 9(1)
Preset Freq 10(1)
Preset Freq 11(1)
Preset Freq 12(1)
Preset Freq 13(1)
Preset Freq 14(1)
Preset Freq 15(1)
Keypad Freq
MOP Freq
MOP Reset Sel
MOP Preload
MOP Time
Jog Frequency
Jog Accel/Decel
Purge Frequency
DC Brake Time
DC Brake Level
DC Brk Time@Strt
DB Resistor Sel
DB Threshold
S Curve %
PWM Frequency
Droop Hertz@ FLA(1)
Network
A410
A411
A412
A413
A414
A415
A416
A417
A418
A419
A420
A421
A422
A423
A424
A425
A426
A427
A428
A429
A430
A431
A432
A433
A434
A435
A436
A437
A438
A439
A440
A441
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Accel Time 3
Decel Time 3
Accel Time 4
Decel Time 4
Skip Frequency 1
Skip Freq Band 1
Skip Frequency 2
Skip Freq Band 2
Skip Frequency 3(1)
Skip Freq Band 3(1)
Skip Frequency 4(1)
Skip Freq Band 4(1)
PID 1 Trim Hi
PID 1 Trim Lo
PID 1 Trim Sel
PID 1 Ref Sel
PID 1 Fdback Sel
PID 1 Prop Gain
PID 1 Integ Time
PID 1 Diff Rate
PID 1 Setpoint
PID 1 Deadband
PID 1 Preload
PID 1 Invert Err
PID 2 Trim Hi(1)
PID 2 Trim Lo(1)
PID 2 Trim Sel(1)
PID 2 Ref Sel(1)
PID 2 Fdback Sel(1)
PID 2 Prop Gain(1)
PID 2 Integ Time(1)
PID 2 Diff Rate(1)
PID 2 Setpoint(1)
PID 2 Deadband(1)
A442
A443
A444
A445
A446
A447
A448
A449
A450
A451
A452
A453
A454
A455
A456
A457
A458
A459
A460
A461
A462
A463
A464
A465
A466
A467
A468
A469
A470
A471
A472
A473
A474
A475
A476
A477
PID 2 Preload(1)
PID 2 Invert Err(1)
Process Disp Lo
Process Disp Hi
Testpoint Sel
Current Limit 1
Current Limit 2(1)
Shear Pin1 Level
Shear Pin 1 Time
Shear Pin2 Level(1)
Shear Pin 2 Time(1)
Load Loss Level(1)
Load Loss Time(1)
Stall Fault Time
Motor OL Select
Motor OL Ret
Drive OL Mode
IR Voltage Drop
Flux Current Ref
Motor Rr(1)
Motor Lm(1)
Motor Lx(1)
PM IR Voltage(1)(3)
PM IXd Voltage(1)(3)
PM IXq Voltage(1)(3)
PM BEMF Voltage(1)(3)
Speed Reg Sel(1)
Freq 1(1)
Freq 1 BW(1)
Freq 2(1)
Freq 2 BW(1)
Freq 3(1)
Freq 3 BW(1)
PM Initial Sel(1)(3)
PM DC Inject Cur(1)(3)
PM Align Time(1)(3)
A478
A479
A481
A482
A483
A484
A485
A486
A487
A488
A489
A490
A491
A492
A493
A494
A495
A496
A497
A498
A499
A500
A501
A502
A503
A504
A509
A510
A511
A512
A513
A514
A515
A516
A517
A518
PM HIFI NS Cur(1)(3)
PM Bus Reg Kd(1)(3)
Freq 1 Kp(1)
Freq 1 Ki(1)
Freq 2 Kp(1)
Freq 2 Ki(1)
Freq 3 Kp(1)
Freq 3 Ki(1)
PM FWKn 1 Kp(1)(3)
PM FWKn 2 Kp(1)(3)
PM Control Cfg(1)(3)
Boost Select
Start Boost
Break Voltage
Break Frequency
Maximum Voltage
Motor Fdbk Type(2)
Encoder PPR(1)
Pulse In Scale
Ki Speed Loop(2)
Kp Speed Loop(2)
Var PWM Disable
Auto Rstrt Tries
Auto Rstrt Delay
Start At PowerUp
Reverse Disable
Flying Start En
FlyStrt CurLimit
Compensation
Power Loss Mode
Half Bus Enable
Bus Reg Enable
Fault Clear
Program Lock
Program Lock Mod
Drv Ambient Sel
A519
A520
A521
A522
A523
A524
A525
A526
A527
A528
A529
A530
A531
A532
A533
A534
A535
A536
A537
A538
A539
A540
A541
A542
A543
A544
A545
A546
A547
A548
A549
A550
A551
A552
A553
A554
Reset Meters
Text Scroll
Out Phas Loss En
Positioning Mode(1)
Counts Per Unit(1)
Enh Control Word(1)
Home Save(1)
Find Home Freq(1)
Find Home Dir(1)
Encoder Pos Tol(1)
Pos Reg Filter(1)
Pos Reg Gain(1)
Max Traverse
Traverse Inc
Traverse Dec
P Jump
Sync Time
Speed Ratio
Mtr Options Cfg(2)(5)
RdyBit Mode Cfg(2)(4)
Flux Braking En(2)(3)
Phase Loss Level(2)(3)
Current Loop BW(1)(3)
PM Stable 1 Freq(1)(3)
PM Stable 1 Kp(1)(3)
PM Stable Brk Pt(1)(3)
PM Stepload Kp(1)(3)
PM 1 Efficiency(1)(3)
PM Algor Sel(1)(3)
A555
A556
A557
A558
A559
A560
A561
A562
A563
A564
A565
A566
A567
A568
A569
A570
A571
A572
A573
A574
A575
A576
A580
A581
A582
A583
A584
A585
A586
A587
A588
A589
This group contains parameters for the network option card that is installed.
See the network option cards user manual for more information on the available parameters.
Modified
74
This group contains parameters that have their values changed from the factory default.
When a parameter has its default value changed, it is automatically added to this group. When a parameter has its value changed back to the
factory default, it is automatically removed from this group.
Fault and Diagnostic
Fault 4 Code
Fault 5 Code
Fault 6 Code
Fault 7 Code
Fault 8 Code
Fault 9 Code
Fault10 Code
Fault 1 Time-hr
Fault 2 Time-hr
Fault 3 Time-hr
Fault 4 Time-hr
Fault 5 Time-hr
Fault 6 Time-hr(1)
Fault 7 Time-hr(1)
Fault 8 Time-hr(1)
Fault 9 Time-hr(1)
Fault10 Time-hr(1)
Fault 1 Time-min
Fault 2 Time-min
Fault 3 Time-min
Fault 4 Time-min
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
F604
F605
F606
F607
F608
F609
F610
F611
F612
F613
F614
F615
F616
F617
F618
F619
F620
F621
F622
F623
F624
Fault 5 Time-min
Fault 6 Time-min(1)
Fault 7 Time-min(1)
Fault 8 Time-min(1)
Fault 9 Time-min(1)
Fault10 Time-min(1)
Fault 1 Freq
Fault 2 Freq
Fault 3 Freq
Fault 4 Freq
Fault 5 Freq
Fault 6 Freq(1)
Fault 7 Freq(1)
Fault 8 Freq(1)
Fault 9 Freq(1)
Fault10 Freq(1)
Fault 1 Current
Fault 2 Current
Fault 3 Current
Fault 4 Current
Fault 5 Current
Fault 6 Current(1)
Fault 7 Current(1)
Fault 8 Current(1)
Fault 9 Current(1)
F625
F626
F627
F628
F629
F630
F631
F632
F633
F634
F635
F636
F637
F638
F639
F640
F641
F642
F643
F644
F645
F646
F647
F648
F649
Fault10 Current(1)
Fault 1 BusVolts
Fault 2 BusVolts
Fault 3 BusVolts
Fault 4 BusVolts
Fault 5 BusVolts
Fault 6 BusVolts(1)
Fault 7 BusVolts(1)
Fault 8 BusVolts(1)
Fault 9 BusVolts(1)
Fault10 BusVolts(1)
Status @ Fault 1
Status @ Fault 2
Status @ Fault 3
Status @ Fault 4
Status @ Fault 5
Status @ Fault 6(1)
Status @ Fault 7(1)
Status @ Fault 8(1)
Status @ Fault 9(1)
Status @ Fault10(1)
Comm Sts - DSI
Comm Sts - Opt
Com Sts-Emb Enet(1)
EN Addr Src(1)
F650
F651
F652
F653
F654
F655
F656
F657
F658
F659
F660
F661
F662
F663
F664
F665
F666
F667
F668
F669
F670
F681
F682
F683
F684
EN Rate Act(1)
DSI I/O Act
HW Addr 1(1)
HW Addr 2(1)
HW Addr 3(1)
HW Addr 4(1)
HW Addr 5(1)
HW Addr 6(1)
EN IP Addr Act 1(1)
EN IP Addr Act 2(1)
EN IP Addr Act 3(1)
EN IP Addr Act 4(1)
EN Subnet Act 1(1)
EN Subnet Act 2(1)
EN Subnet Act 3(1)
EN Subnet Act 4(1)
EN Gateway Act 1(1)
EN Gateway Act 2(1)
EN Gateway Act 3(1)
EN Gateway Act 4(1)
Drv 0 Logic Cmd
Drv 0 Reference
Drv 0 Logic Sts
Drv 0 Feedback
Drv 1 Logic Cmd
F685
F686
F687
F688
F689
F690
F691
F692
F693
F694
F695
F696
F697
F698
F699
F700
F701
F702
F703
F704
F705
F706
F707
F708
F709
Drv 1 Reference
Drv 1 Logic Sts
Drv 1 Feedback
Drv 2 Logic Cmd
Drv 2 Reference
Drv 2 Logic Sts
Drv 2 Feedback
Drv 3 Logic Cmd
Drv 3 Reference
Drv 3 Logic Sts
Drv 3 Feedback
Drv 4 Logic Cmd
Drv 4 Reference
Drv 4 Logic Sts
Drv 4 Feedback
EN Rx Overruns(1)
EN Rx Packets(1)
EN Rx Errors(1)
EN Tx Packets(1)
EN Tx Errors(1)
EN Missed IO Pkt(1)
DSI Errors
Chapter 3
F710
F711
F712
F713
F714
F715
F716
F717
F718
F719
F720
F721
F722
F723
F724
F725
F726
F727
F728
F729
F730
F731
Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.

Parameter is also available in PowerFlex 523 FRN 3.xxx and later.
Parameter is available in PowerFlex 525 FRN 5.xxx and later.
75
Chapter 3

PowerFlex 520-series drives include various AppView parameter groups that
groups certain parameters together for quick and easy access based on different
types of applications. See AppView Parameter Groups on page 150 for more
information.
Conveyor
Language
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Mixer
P030
b001
b002
Language
Output Freq
Compressor
P030
b001
Language
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Motor NP Volts
Centrifugal Pump
P030
b001
b002
P031
Language
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Hertz
Blower/Fan
P030
b001
b002
P031
P032
Language
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Hertz
P030
b001
b002
P031
P032
76
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Hertz
Motor OL Current
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Poles
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Commanded Freq
Output Current
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Hertz
Motor OL Current
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Hertz
Motor OL Current
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Poles
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Motor OL Current
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Poles
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Mode
Motor OL Current
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Poles
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Mode
P031
P032
P033
P034
P035
P040
P041
b002
b003
P031
P032
P033
P034
P032
P033
P034
P035
P040
P041
P042
P043
P033
P034
P035
P040
P041
P042
P043
P044
P045
P033
P034
P035
P040
P041
P042
P043
P044
P045
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Mode
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
DigIn TermBlk 02
Motor NP Poles
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Mode
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
Relay Out1 Sel
Analog Out Sel
Analog Out High
Anlg Out Setpt
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
Relay Out1 Sel
Analog Out Sel
Analog Out High
Anlg Out Setpt
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
Relay Out1 Sel
Analog Out Sel
Analog Out High
Anlg Out Setpt
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
P042
P043
P044
P045
P046
P047
t062
P035
P040
P041
P042
P043
P044
P044
P045
P046
P047
t076
t088
t089
t090
P046
P047
t076
t088
t089
t090
t091
t092
t095
P046
P047
t076
t088
t089
t090
t091
t092
t095
DigIn TermBlk 03
Opto Out1 Sel
Relay Out1 Sel
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Stop Mode
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
Relay Out1 Sel
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Anlg In mA Loss
Preset Freq 0
Auto Rstrt Tries
Auto Rstrt Delay
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Anlg In mA Loss
Preset Freq 0
PID 1 Trim Hi
PID 1 Trim Lo
PID 1 Ref Sel
PID 1 Fdback Sel
PID 1 Prop Gain
PID 1 Integ Time
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Anlg In mA Loss
Preset Freq 0
PID 1 Trim Hi
PID 1 Trim Lo
PID 1 Ref Sel
PID 1 Fdback Sel
PID 1 Prop Gain
PID 1 Integ Time
t063
t069
t076
t091
t092
t095
t096
P045
P046
P047
t076
t091
t092
t091
t092
t095
t096
t097
A410
A541
A542
t096
t097
A410
A456
A457
A459
A460
A461
A462
t096
t097
A410
A456
A457
A459
A460
A461
A462
Anlg In mA Loss
Slip Hz Meter
Preset Freq 0
Jog Frequency
Jog Accel/Decel
S Curve %
Reverse Disable
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Anlg In mA Loss
Preset Freq 0
Stall Fault Time
t097
d375
A410
A431
A432
A439
A544
t095
t096
t097
A410
A492
Start At PowerUp
Reverse Disable
Power Loss Mode
Half Bus Enable
A543
A544
A548
A549
PID 1 Diff Rate

PID 1 Setpoint
PID 1 Deadband
PID 1 Preload
Auto Rstrt Tries
Auto Rstrt Delay
Start At PowerUp
Reverse Disable
A463
A464
A465
A466
A541
A542
A543
A544
PID 1 Diff Rate

PID 1 Setpoint
PID 1 Deadband
PID 1 Preload
Auto Rstrt Tries
Auto Rstrt Delay
Start At PowerUp
Reverse Disable
Flying Start En
A463
A464
A465
A466
A541
A542
A543
A544
A545
Extruder
Language
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Output Current
Motor NP Volts
Positioning(1)
P030
b001
b002
b003
P031
Language
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Hertz
Motor OL Current
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Poles
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Textile/Fiber
P030
b001
b002
P031
P032
P033
P034
P035
P040
P041
P042
P043
P044
Language
Output Freq
Commanded Freq
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Hertz
Motor OL Current
P030
b001
b002
P031
P032
P033
Motor NP Hertz
Motor OL Current
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Poles
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Mode
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
DigIn TermBlk 02
DigIn TermBlk 03
DigIn TermBlk 05
DigIn TermBlk 06
Opto Out1 Sel
Opto Out2 Sel
Relay Out1 Sel
EM Brk Off Delay
EM Brk On Delay
Stp Logic 0
Stp Logic 1
Stp Logic 2
Stp Logic 3
Stp Logic 4
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Poles
Autotune
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Mode
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
P032
P033
P034
P035
P040
P041
P042
P043
P044
P045
P046
P047
t062
t063
t065
t066
t069
t072
t076
t086
t087
L180
L181
L182
L183
L184
P034
P035
P040
P041
P042
P043
P044
P045
P046
P047
Stop Mode
Start Source 1
Speed Reference1
Relay Out1 Sel
Analog Out Sel
Analog Out High
Anlg Out Setpt
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
Stp Logic 5
Stp Logic 6
Stp Logic 7
Stp Logic Time 0
Stp Logic Time 1
Stp Logic Time 2
Stp Logic Time 3
Stp Logic Time 4
Stp Logic Time 5
Stp Logic Time 6
Stp Logic Time 7
Step Units 0
Step Units 1
Step Units 2
Step Units 3
Step Units 4
Step Units 5
DigIn TermBlk 02
DigIn TermBlk 03
Opto Out1 Sel
Opto Out2 Sel
Relay Out1 Sel
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Anlg In mA Loss
P045
P046
P047
t076
t088
t089
t090
t091
t092
L185
L186
L187
L190
L191
L192
L193
L194
L195
L196
L197
L200
L202
L204
L206
L208
L210
t062
t063
t069
t072
t076
t091
t092
t095
t096
t097
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Anlg In mA Loss
Slip Hz Meter
Speed Feedback
Encoder Speed
Preset Freq 0
Stall Fault Time
Motor Fdbk Type
Step Units 6
Step Units 7
Slip Hz Meter
Speed Feedback
Encoder Speed
Units Traveled H
Units Traveled L
Preset Freq 0
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Preset Freq 8
Jog Frequency
Slip Hz Meter
Fiber Status
Preset Freq 0
Jog Frequency
Jog Accel/Decel
S Curve %
Reverse Disable
Power Loss Mode
Half Bus Enable
Bus Reg Enable
t095
t096
t097
d375
d376
d378
A410
A492
A535
L212
L214
d375
d376
d378
d388
d389
A410
A411
A412
A413
A414
A415
A416
A417
A418
A431
d375
d390
A410
A431
A432
A439
A544
A548
A549
A550
Chapter 3
Encoder PPR
Pulse In Scale
Ki Speed Loop
Kp Speed Loop
Power Loss Mode
Half Bus Enable
A536
A537
A538
A539
A548
A549
Jog Accel/Decel
DB Threshold
S Curve %
Motor Fdbk Type
Encoder PPR
Pulse In Scale
Ki Speed Loop
Kp Speed Loop
Bus Reg Enable
Positioning Mode
Counts Per Unit
Enh Control Word
Find Home Freq
Find Home Dir
Encoder Pos Tol
Pos Reg Filter
Pos Reg Gain
Max Traverse
Traverse Inc
Traverse Dec
P Jump
Sync Time
Speed Ratio
A432
A438
A439
A535
A536
A537
A538
A539
A550
A558
A559
A560
A562
A563
A564
A565
A566
A567
A568
A569
A570
A571
A572
(1) This AppView parameter group is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
CustomView Parameter Group

PowerFlex 520-series drives include a CustomView parameter group for you to
store frequently used parameters for your application. See CustomView
Parameter Group on page 151 for more information.
Custom Group
This group can store up to 100 parameters.
77
Chapter 3
Basic Display Group

b001 [Output Freq]
Related Parameter(s): b002, b010, P043, P044, P048, P050, P052
Output frequency present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Does not include slip frequency.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/[Maximum Freq]
Display:
0.01 Hz
b002 [Commanded Freq]
Related Parameter(s): b001, b013, P043, P044, P048, P050, P052
Value of the active frequency command even if the drive is not running.
IMPORTANT
Values
The frequency command can come from a number of sources. See Start and Speed Reference Control on page 49 for more information.
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/[Maximum Freq]
Display:
0.01 Hz
b003 [Output Current]

Output current present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
Display:
0.01 A
b004 [Output Voltage]
Related Parameter(s): P031, A530, A534
Output voltage present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/Drive Rated Volts
Display:
0.1V
b005 [DC Bus Voltage]

Filtered DC bus voltage level of the drive.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/1200VDC
Display:
1VDC
b006 [Drive Status]
Related Parameter(s): A544
Present operating condition of the drive.
Running
Forward
Accelerating
Decelerating
SafetyActive(1)
(1)
Setting is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Values
78
1 = True/Active, 0 = False/Inactive
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
00000/11111
Display:
00000
Chapter 3
Basic Display Group (continued)

b007 [Fault 1 Code]
b008 [Fault 2 Code]
b009 [Fault 3 Code]
Related Parameter(s): F604-F610
A code that represents a drive fault. Codes appear in these parameters in the order they occur (b007 [Fault 1 Code] = the most recent fault). Repetitive faults are only recorded once.
See Fault and Diagnostic Group for more information.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
F0/F127
Display:
F0
b010 [Process Display]

32
Related Parameter(s): b001, A481, A482
32 bit parameter.
Output frequency scaled by A481[Process Disp Lo] and A482 [Process Disp Hi].
Scaled Process Value (PV) = (([Process Disp Hi] - [Process Disp Lo]) x ([Output Freq] - [Minimum Freq])) / ([Maximum Freq] - [Minimum Freq])
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/9999.00
Display:
0.01
b012 [Control Source]
Related Parameter(s): P046, P047, P048, P049, P050, P051,

t062, t063, t065-t068, L180-L187, A410-A425
Active source of the Start Command and Frequency Command. Normally defined by the settings of P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] and P047, P049, P051 [Speed Referencex].
See Start and Speed Reference Control on page 49 for more information.
Start Command Source

Digit 1
1 = Keypad
2 = DigIn TrmBlk (Parameters t062,t063,t065-t068)
3 = Serial/DSI
4 = Network Opt(1)
5 = EtherNet/IP(2)
Frequency Command Source
Digit 2 & 3
00 = Other
01 = Drive Pot
02 = Keypad
03 = Serial/DSI
04 = Network Opt(1)
05 = 0-10V Input
06 = 4-20mA Input
07 = Preset Freq (Parameters A410-A425)
08 = Anlg In Mult(2)
09 = MOP
10 = Pulse Input
11 = PID1 Output
12 = PID2 Output(2)
13 = Step Logic (Parameters L180-L187)(1)
14 = Encoder(2)
15 = EtherNet/IP(2)
16 = Positioning(2)
Frequency Command Source
Digit 4
0 = Other (Digit 2 & 3 are used. Digit 4 is not shown.)
1 = Jog
2 = Purge
Not Used
(1)
(2)
Example
Display reads...
2004
113
155
052
011
Description
Start source comes from Network Opt and Frequency source is Purge.
Start source comes from Serial/DSI and Frequency source comes from PID1 Output.
Start source and Frequency source comes from EtherNet/IP.
Start source comes from DigIn TrmBlk and Frequency source from 0-10V Input.
Start source comes from Keypad and Frequency source comes from Drive Pot.
Select this setting if using the optional PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P, 25-COMM-D, or

25-COMM-P adapters as the Start source and/or Frequency source.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0000/2165
Display:
0000
79
Chapter 3

b013 [Contrl In Status]
Related Parameter(s): b002, P044, P045
State of the digital terminal blocks 1...3 and DB transistor.
IMPORTANT
Actual control commands may come from a source other than the control terminal block.
DigIn TBlk 1
DigIn TBlk 2
DigIn TBlk 3
DB Trans On(1)
Not Used
(1)
1 = Closed State, 0 = Open State

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
The DB Transistor on indication must have a 0.5 s hysteresis. It will turn on and stay
on for at least 0.5 s every time the DB transistor is turned on.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0000/1111
Display:
0000
b014 [Dig In Status]
Related Parameter(s): t065-t068
State of the programmable digital inputs.
DigIn TBlk 5
DigIn TBlk 6
DigIn TBlk 7(1)
DigIn TBlk 8(1)
Not Used
(1)
1 = Closed State, 0 = Open State

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0000/1111
Display:
0000
b015 [Output RPM]
Related Parameter(s): P035
Current output frequency in rpm. Scale is based on P035 [Motor NP Poles].

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/24000 rpm
Display:
1 rpm
b016 [Output Speed]
Current output frequency in %. Scale is 0% at 0.00 Hz to 100% at P044 [Maximum Freq].

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
b017 [Output Power]
Related Parameter(s): b018
Output power present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).

Values
80
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/(Drive Rated Power x 2)
Display:
0.01 kW
Chapter 3

b018 [Power Saved]
Instantaneous power savings of using this drive compared to an across the line starter.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/655.35 kW
Display:
0.01 kW
b019 [Elapsed Run time]
Accumulated time drive is outputting power. Time is displayed in 10 hour increments.

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535 x 10 hr
Display:
1 = 10 hr
b020 [Average Power]
Average power used by the motor since the last reset of the meters.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/(Drive Rated Power x 2)
Display:
0.01 kW
b021 [Elapsed kWh]
Accumulated output energy of the drive. When the maximum value of this parameter is reached, it resets to zero and b022 [Elapsed MWh] is incremented.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0 kWh
Display:
0.1 kWh
b022 [Elapsed MWh]
Accumulated output energy of the drive.

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/6553.5 MWh
Display:
0.1 MWh
b023 [Energy Saved]
Total energy savings of using this drive compared to an across the line starter since the last reset of the meters.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/6553.5 kWh
Display:
0.1 kWh
b024 [Accum kWh Sav]
Total approximate accumulated energy savings of the drive compared to using an across the line starter.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/6553.5 kWh
Display:
0.1 = 10 kWh
81
Chapter 3

b025 [Accum Cost Sav]
Related Parameter(s): b024, P052, A555
Total approximate accumulated cost savings of the drive compared to using an across the line starter.
[Accum Cost Sav] = [Average kWh cost] x [Accum kWh Sav]
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/6553.5
Display:
0.1
b026 [Accum CO2 Sav]
Total approximate accumulated CO2 savings of the drive compared to using an across the line starter.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/6553.5 kg
Display:
0.1 kg
b027 [Drive Temp]

Present operating temperature of the drive heatsink (inside module).
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/120 C
Display:
1 C
b028 [Control Temp]

Present operating temperature of the drive control.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/120 C
Display:
1 C
b029 [Control SW Ver]

Current drive firmware version.
Values
82
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.000/65.535
Display:
0.001
Chapter 3
Basic Program Group

P030 [Language]
Language Support
Selects the language displayed. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Keypad/
LCD Display
RSLogix 5000/
Logix Designer
Connected
Components
Workbench
Options
1 English (Default)
2 Franais
3 Espaol
4 Italiano
5 Deutsch
6 Japanese
7 Portugus
11 Korean
12 Polish(1)
14 Turkish(1)
15 Czech(1)
8 Chinese
Chinese Simplified
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
13 Reserved
(1) Due to a limitation of the LCD Display, some of the characters for Polish, Turkish, and Czech will be modified.
P031 [Motor NP Volts]
Related Parameter(s): b004, A530, A531, A532, A533
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Sets the motor nameplate rated volts.

Values
Default:
Drive Rated Volts
Min/Max:
10V (for 230V Drives), 20V (for 460V Drives), 25V (for 600V Drives)/Drive Rated Volts
Display:
1V
P032 [Motor NP Hertz]
Related Parameter(s): A493, A530, A531, A532, A533
Sets the motor nameplate rated frequency.

Values
Default:
60 Hz
Min/Max:
15/500 Hz
Display:
1 Hz
P033 [Motor OL Current]
Related Parameter(s): t069, t072, t076, t081, A484, A485, A493
Sets the motor nameplate overload current. Used to determine motor overload conditions and can be set from 0.1 A to 200% of drive rated current.
IMPORTANT
Values
The drive will fault on an F007 Motor Overload if the value of this parameter is exceeded based on class 10 motor overload protection according to NEC article
430 and motor over-temperature protection according to NEC article 430.126 (A) (2). UL 508C File 29572
Default:
Drive Rated Amps
Min/Max:
Display:
0.1 A
83
Chapter 3
Basic Program Group (continued)

P034 [Motor NP FLA]
Sets the motor nameplate FLA. Used to assist the Autotune routine and motor control.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
Display:
0.1 A
P035 [Motor NP Poles]
Sets the number of poles in the motor.

Values
Default:
Min/Max:
2/40
Display:
P036 [Motor NP RPM]

Sets the rated nameplate rpm of the motor. Used to calculate the rated slip of the motor. To reduce the slip frequency, set this parameter closer to the motor synchronous speed.
Values
Default:
1750 rpm
Min/Max:
0/24000 rpm
Display:
1 rpm
P037 [Motor NP Power]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the motor nameplate power. Used in PM regulator.

Values
Default:
Drive Rated Power
Min/Max:
0.00/Drive Rated Power
Display:
0.01 kW
P038 [Voltage Class]

Sets the voltage class of 600V drives. Only applicable to 600V drives.
Options
2 480V
3 600V (Default)
P039 [Torque Perf Mode]
Related Parameter(s): P040, A530, A531, A532, A533, A535
Selects the motor control mode.

The PowerFlex 523 and PowerFlex 525 drives are capable of performing with the following motor control modes.
Options
0 V/Hz
1 SVC (Default)
2 Economize
3 Vector(1)
4 PM Control(1) (2)
When P039 [Torque Perf Mode] is set to 4 and A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] is set to 0, 1, 2 or 3, the drive is in open loop PM motor
control mode.
When P039 [Torque Perf Mode] is set to 4 and A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] is set to 4 or 5, the drive is in closed loop PM motor control
mode.

(2) Setting is available in PowerFlex 525 FRN 5.xxx and later.
84
Chapter 3

P040 [Autotune]
Related Parameter(s): P034, P039, A496, A497
Enables a static (not spinning) or dynamic (motor spinning) autotune to automatically set the motor parameters. Set the parameter value to a one or two, then issue a valid Start
command to begin the routine. After the routine is complete the parameter resets to a zero. A failure (such as if a motor is not connected) results in an Autotune Fault.
It is recommended to perform a full rotate tune when using VVC mode.
All motor parameters in the Basic Program group must be set before running the routine. If a start command is not given (or a stop command is given) within
30 s, the parameter automatically returns to a zero and an Autotune Fault occurs.
IMPORTANT
ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure. To guard against possible injury and/or equipment damage, it is
recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding.
Options
0 Ready/Idle (Default)
1 Static Tune
A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of A496
[IR Voltage Drop]. A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to 0 Ready/Idle
following the test, at which time another start transition is required operate the drive in normal mode. Used when motor cannot
be uncoupled from the load.
2 Rotate Tune
A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of A497
[Flux Current Ref]. A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to 0 Ready/Idle
following the test, at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode. Important: Used when
motor is uncoupled from the load. Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure.
P041 [Accel Time 1]
Related Parameter(s): P044, A439
Sets the time for the drive to accelerate from 0 Hz to P044 [Maximum Freq].
Accel Rate = [Maximum Freq] / [Accel Time x]
[Maximum Freq]
0
0
Values
[Accel Time x]
on
Acc
rati
ele
ele
rati
on
Dec
Speed
Time
[Decel Time x]
Default:
10.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/600.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
P042 [Decel Time 1]
Sets the time for the drive to decelerate from P044 [Maximum Freq] to 0 Hz.
Decel Rate = [Maximum Freq] / Decel Time x]
[Maximum Freq]
Acc
ele
rati
on
on
[Accel Time x]
rati
ele
Values
Dec
Speed
Time
[Decel Time x]
Default:
10.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/600.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
85
Chapter 3

P043 [Minimum Freq]
Related Parameter(s): b001, b002, b013, P044, A530, A531
Sets the lowest frequency the drive outputs.

Values
Default:
0.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
P044 [Maximum Freq]
Related Parameter(s): b001, b002, b013, b016, P043, A530, A531
Sets the highest frequency the drive outputs.
IMPORTANT
Values
This value must be greater than the value set in P043 [Minimum Freq].
Default:
60.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
P045 [Stop Mode]
Related Parameter(s): t086, t087, A434, A435, A550
Determines the stopping mode used by the drive when a stop is initiated.
Options
0 Ramp, CF (Default)
Ramp to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
1 Coast, CF
Coast to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
2 DC Brake, CF
DC Injection Braking Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
3 DC BrkAuto,CF
DC Injection Braking Stop with Auto Shutoff.

Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in A434 [DC Brake Time].
OR
Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped.
Stop command clears active fault.
4 Ramp
Ramp to Stop.
5 Coast
Coast to Stop.
6 DC Brake
DC Injection Braking Stop.
7 DC BrakeAuto
DC Injection Braking Stop with Auto Shutoff.

Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in A434 [DC Brake Time].
OR
Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped.
8 Ramp+EM B,CF
Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. Stop command clears active fault.
9 Ramp+EM Brk
Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control.
10 PointStp,CF
PointStop. Stop command clears

active fault.
11 PointStop
PointStop.
Provides a method to stop at a constant distance instead of a fixed rate.

When a Stop command is given, the distance required for the machine to travel to
standstill based on the programmed maximum speed and deceleration time is calculated.
If the drive is running slower than the maximum speed, the function will apply a calculated
deceleration time that allows the machine to travel to standstill in the same distance based
on the current speed.
It is recommended to use braking resistors or set A550 [Bus Reg Enable] to 0 Disabled for
better performance.
Stop
[Maximum Freq]
Speed
Calculated Stop Time
[Decel Time x]
86
Time
Chapter 3

P046 [Start Source 1]
Related Parameter(s): b012, t064, C125
Configures the start source of the drive. Changes to these inputs take effect as soon as they are entered. P046 [Start Source 1] is the factory default start source unless overridden.
IMPORTANT
Options
For all settings except when t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to 1 Level Sense, the drive must receive a leading edge from the start input for the drive to start after a
stop input, loss of power, or fault condition.
1 Keypad
[Start Source 1] default
2 DigIn TrmBlk
[Start Source 2] default
3 Serial/DSI
[Start Source 3] default for PowerFlex 523
4 Network Opt(1)
5 EtherNet/IP(2)
[Start Source 3] default for PowerFlex 525
(1) Select this setting if using the optional PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P, 25-COMM-D, or 25-COMM-P adapters as the start source.
P047 [Speed Reference1]

Related Parameter(s): C125
Selects the source of speed command for the drive. Changes to these inputs take effect as soon as they are entered. P047 [Speed Reference1] is the factory default speed reference
unless overridden.
Options
1 Drive Pot
[Speed Reference1] default
2 Keypad Freq
3 Serial/DSI
4
[Speed Reference3] default for PowerFlex 523
Network Opt(1)
5 0-10V Input
[Speed Reference2] default
6 4-20mA Input
7 Preset Freq
8 Anlg In Mult(2)
9 MOP
10 Pulse Input
11 PID1 Output
12 PID2 Output(2)
13 Step Logic(2)
14 Encoder(2)
15 EtherNet/IP(2)
16
Positioning(2)
[Speed Reference3] default for PowerFlex 525

Referencing from A558 [Positioning Mode]
(1) Select this setting if using the optional PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P, 25-COMM-D, or 25-COMM-P adapters as the speed reference.
P052 [Average kWh Cost]
Sets the average cost per kWh.

Values
Default:
0.00
Min/Max:
0.00/655.35
Display:
0.01
87
Chapter 3

P053 [Reset To Defalts]
Resets all parameters to their factory default values. After a Reset command, the value of this parameter returns to zero.
Parameters that are NOT Reset when P053 = 1

Parameter
P030 [Language]
C121 [Comm Write Mode]
C122 [Cmd Stat Select]
C123 [RS485 Data Rate]
C124 [RS485 Node Addr]
C124 [Comm Loss Action]
C126 [Comm Loss Time]
C127 [RS485 Format]
C128 [EN Addr Sel]
C129 [EN IP Addr Cfg 1]
C133 [EN Subnet Cfg 1]
C137 [EN Gateway Cfg 1]
Options
Parameters that are Reset when P053 = 3
Parameter
C141 [EN Rate Cfg]
C143 [EN Comm Flt Actn]
C144 [EN Idle Flt Actn]
C145 [EN Flt Cfg Logic]
C146 [EN Flt Cfg Ref]
C147 [EN Flt Cfg DL 1]
C153 [EN Data In 1]
C154 [EN Data In 2]
C155 [EN Data In 3]
C156 [EN Data In 4]
C157 [EN Data Out 1]
Parameter
C161 [Opt Data In 1]
C165 [Opt Data Out 1]
C169 [MultiDrv Sel]
C171 [Drv 1 Addr]
C172 [Drv 2 Addr]
C173 [Drv 3 Addr]
C174 [Drv 4 Addr]
C175 [DSI I/O Cfg]
GC [Parameters in Custom Group]
Parameter Name
P033 [Motor OL] Current
P034 [Motor NP FLA]
P038 [Voltage Class]
A435 [DC Brake Level]
A484 [Current Limit 1]
A486 [Shear Pin1 Level]
A490 [Load Loss Level]
A496 [IR Voltage Drop]
A497 [Flux Current Ref]
A530 [Boost Select]
A531 [Start Boost]
A532 [Break Voltage]
A533 [Break Frequency]
A534 [Maximum] Voltage
1 Param Reset
Does not reset custom groups, parameter P030 [Language], and communication parameters.
2 Factory Rset
Restore drive to factory condition.
3 Power Reset
Resets only power parameters. Can be used when swapping power modules.
Module Reset(1) (2)
Power cycle of the drive, NO parameters are reset.

88
Chapter 3
Terminal Block Group


PF 525
Related Parameter(s): b012, b013, b014, P045, P046, P048, P049, P050, P051, t064,
t086, A410-A425, A427, A431, A432, A433, A434, A435,
A442, A443, A488, A535, A560, A562, A563, A567, A571
PowerFlex 525 only.

Programmable digital input. Changes to these inputs takes effect as soon as they are entered. If a digital input is set for a selection that is only usable on one input, no other input can
be set for the same selection.
Options
0 Not Used
Terminal has no function but can be read over network communications with b013 [Contrl In Status] and b014 [Dig In Status].
1 Speed Ref 2
Selects P049 [Speed Reference2] as drive's speed command.
2 Speed Ref 3
Selects P051 [Speed Reference3] as drive's speed command.
3 Start Src 2
Selects P048 [Start Source 2] as control source to start the drive.
4 Start Src 3
Selects P050 [Start Source 3] as control source to start the drive.
5 Spd + Strt 2
[DigIn TermBlk 07] default.

Selects combination of P049 [Speed Reference2] and P048 [Start Source 2] as speed command with control source to start
the drive.
6 Spd + Strt 3
Selects combination of P051 [Speed Reference3] and P050 [Start Source 3] as speed command with control source to start
the drive.
7 Preset Freq
[DigIn TermBlk 05] and [DigIn TermBlk 06] default.

Selects a preset frequency in Velocity mode (P047, P049, P051 [Speed Referencex] = 1...15). See A410...A425 [Preset Freq x].
Selects a preset frequency and position in Positioning mode (P047, P049, P051 [Speed Referencex] = 16).
See L200...L214 [Step Units x] (only for PowerFlex 525 drives).
(PF523: only for DigIn TermBlk 03, 05,

and 06)
(PF525: only for DigIn TermBlk 05...08)
IMPORTANT
Digital Inputs have priority for frequency control when programmed as Preset Speed and are active.
See Start Source and Speed Reference Selection on page 49 for more information.
8 Jog
When input is present, drive accelerates according to the value set in A432 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to the value set in
A431 [Jog Frequency].
When input is removed, drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in A432 [Jog Accel/Decel].
A valid Start command will override this input.
9 Jog Forward
[DigIn TermBlk 08] default.

Drive accelerates to A431 [Jog Frequency] according to A432 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to a stop when input becomes
inactive. A valid Start command will override this input.
10 Jog Reverse
Drive accelerates to A431 [Jog Frequency] according to A432 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to a stop when input becomes
inactive. A valid Start command will override this input.
11 Acc/Dec Sel2(1)
If active, determines which Accel/Decel time will be used for all ramp rates except jog.
Can be used with option 29 Acc/Dec Sel3 for additional Accel/Decel times. See A442 [Accel Time 2] for more information.
12 Aux Fault
When enabled, an F002 Auxiliary Input fault will occur when the input is removed.
13 Clear Fault
When active, clears an active fault.
14 RampStop,CF
Causes drive to immediately ramp to a stop regardless of how P045 [Stop Mode] is set.
15 CoastStop,CF
Causes drive to immediately coast to a stop regardless of how P045 [Stop Mode] is set.
16 DCInjStop,CF
Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how P045 [Stop Mode] is set.
17 MOP Up
Increases the value of A427 [MOP Freq] at the rate set in A430 [MOP Time].
18 MOP Down
Decreases the value of A427 [MOP Freq] at the rate set in A430 [MOP Time].
19 Timer Start(1)
Clears and starts the timer function. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs.
20 Counter In(1)
Starts the counter function. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs.
21 Reset Timer
Resets the internal active timer, d365 [Timer Status]. For more information, see Timer Function on page 211.
22 Reset Countr
Resets the count in the accumulated internal active counter, d364 [Counter Status]. For more information, see Counter Function
on page 212.
23 Rset Tim&Cnt
Resets both the internal active timer and accumulated internal active counter.
Logic In 1(1)(2)
Logic function input number 1. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs (t076, t081 [Relay Outx Sel] and
t069, t072 [Opto Outx Sel], options 11...14). May be used in conjunction with StepLogic parameters L180...L187 [Stp Logic x].
25 Logic In 2(1)(2)
Logic function input number 2. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs (t076, t081 [Relay Outx Sel] and
t069, t072 [Opto Outx Sel], options 11...14). May be used in conjunction with StepLogic parameters L180...L187 [Stp Logic x].
24
89
Chapter 3
Options
26 Current Lmt2(2)
When active, A485 [Current Limit 2] determines the drive current limit level.
27 Anlg Invert
Inverts the scaling of the analog input levels set in

t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] and t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] or
t095 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] and t096 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi].
28 EM Brk Rlse
If EM brake function is enabled, this input releases the brake. See t086 [EM Brk Off Delay] for more information.
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary
mechanical braking device must be used.
29 Acc/Dec Sel3(1)
If active, determines which Accel/Decel time is used for all ramp rates except jog.
Used with option 11 Acc/Dec Sel2 for the Accel/Decel times listed in this table.
Option
29 11
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
Description
Acc/Dec 1
Acc/Dec 2
Acc/Dec 3
Acc/Dec 4
30 Precharge En
Forces drive into precharge state. Typically controlled by auxiliary contact on the disconnect at the DC input to the drive. If this
input is assigned, it must be energized for the pre-charge relay to close and for the drive to run. If it is de-energized, the precharge relay opens and the drive coasts to a stop.
31 Inertia Dcel
Forces drive into Inertia Ride-Through state. The drive attempts to regulate the DC bus at the current level.
32 Sync Enable
Must be used in order to hold the existing frequency when Sync Time is set to enable speed synchronization. When this input is
released the drive accelerates to the commanded frequency in A571 [Sync Time].
33 Traverse Dis
When an input is programmed the traverse function is disabled while this input is active. See A567 [Max Traverse].
34 Home Limit(2)
In Positioning mode, indicates the drive is at the home position. See Appendix E for more information on Positioning.
35 Find Home(2)
In Positioning mode, causes the drive to return to the Home position when a Start command is issued.
Uses A562 [Find Home Freq] and A563 [Find Home Dir] until the Home Limit input is activated. If it passes this point, it then
runs in the reverse direction at 1/10th the frequency of [Find Home Freq] until the Home Limit is activated again. As long as
this input is active, any start command causes the drive to enter the homing routine. Only functions if in Positioning mode. Once
the Find Home routine has finished, the drive stops. See Appendix E for more information on Positioning.
36 Hold Step(2)
In Positioning mode, overrides other inputs and causes the drive to remain at its current step (running at zero speed once it
reaches its position) until released.
While in Hold, the drive ignores any input command which would normally result in a move to a new step. Timers continue to
run. Therefore, when the Hold is removed, the drive must see any required digital inputs transition (even if they already
transitioned during the hold), but it does not reset any timer. See Appendix E for more information on Positioning.
37 Pos Redefine(2)
In Positioning mode, resets the home position to the current position of the machine. See Appendix E for more information on
Positioning.
38 Force DC
If the drive is not running, causes the drive to apply a DC Holding current (A435 [DC Brake Level], ignoring A434 [DC Brake Time])
while the input is applied.
39 Damper Input
When active, drive is allowed to run normally.

When inactive, drive is forced into sleep mode and is prevented from accelerating to command speed.
40 Purge(1)
Starts the drive at A433 [Purge Frequency] regardless of the selected control source. Supersedes the keypad Control function as
well as any other control command to take control of the drive. Purge can occur, and is operational, at any time whether the
drive is running or stopped regardless of the selected logic source selection. If a valid stop (other than from comms or SW
enable) is present, the drive will not start on the purge input transition.
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary
mechanical braking device must be used.
41 Freeze-Fire
When inactive, will cause an immediate F094 Function Loss fault. Use to safely bypass the drive with an external switching
device.
42 SW Enable
Works like an interlock that has to be active for the drive to run.
43 SherPin1 Dis
Disables shear pin 1 but leaves shear pin 2 active. If A488 [Shear Pin 2 Level] is greater than 0.0 A, shear pin 2 is enabled.
44 Reserved
45 Reserved
46 Reserved
47 Reserved
90
Options
Chapter 3
48 2-Wire FWD
(only for DigIn TermBlk 02)
[DigIn TermBlk 02] default. Select 2-Wire FWD for this input.
Select this option and set P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] to 2 DigIn TrmBlk to
configure [Start Source x] to a 2-wire run forward mode. Also see t064 [2-Wire Mode] for
level trigger settings.
49 3-Wire Start
Select 3-Wire Start for this input.

configure [Start Source x] to a 3-wire start mode.
Drive Start Condition

Matrix for t062 and t063
50 2-Wire REV
[DigIn TermBlk 03] default. Select 2-Wire REV for this input.
configure [Start Source x] to a 2-wire run reverse mode. Also see t064 [2-Wire Mode] for level
trigger settings.
For PowerFlex 523 drives, this setting will be disabled If [DigIn TermBlk 03] is set to
7 Preset Freq.
t063
Setting
2-Wire
REV
3-Wire
Dir
51 3-Wire Dir
Select 3-Wire Dir for this input.

Select this option and set P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] to 2 DigIn TrmBlk to change
the direction of [Start Source x].
For PowerFlex 523 drives, this setting will be disabled If [DigIn TermBlk 03] is set to
7 Preset Freq.
52 Pulse Train
Select pulse train for this input.

Use P047, P049 and P051 [Speed Referencex] to select pulse input.
Jumper for DigIn TermBlk 05 or 07 Sel must be moved to Pulse In.
(PF523: only for DigIn TermBlk 05)

(PF525: only for DigIn TermBlk 07)
t062 Setting
3-Wire 2-Wire
Start
FWD
Drive will OK
not start
OK
Drive will
not start
(1) This function may be tied to one input only.

t064 [2-Wire Mode]
Related Parameter(s): P045, P046, P048, P050, t062, t063
Programs the mode of trigger only for t062 [DigIn TermBlk 02] and t063 [DigIn TermBlk 03] when 2-wire option is being selected as P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x].
Options
0 Edge Trigger (Default)
Standard 2-Wire operation.
1 Level Sense
I/O Terminal 01 Stop = Coast to stop. Drive will restart after a Stop command when:
Stop is removed
and
Start is held active
I/O Terminal 03 Run REV
ATTENTION: Hazard of injury exists due to unintended operation. When t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to
option 1, and the Run input is maintained, the Run inputs do not need to be toggled after a Stop input for
the drive to run again. A Stop function is provided only when the Stop input is active (open).
ATTENTION: When operating in 2-Wire Level Sense (Run Level), the PowerFlex 523 and PowerFlex 525
drive should only be controlled from the Digital Input Terminal Blocks. This should NOT be used with any
other DSI or Network device.
2 Hi-Spd Edge
IMPORTANT
There is greater potential voltage on the output terminals when using this option.
Outputs are kept in a ready-to-run state. The drive will respond to a Start command within 10 ms.
I/O Terminal 01 Stop = Coast to stop.
I/O Terminal 03 Run REV
3 Momentary
Drive will start after a momentary input from either the Run FWD input (I/O Terminal 02) or the Run REV input (I/O Terminal
03).
I/O Terminal 01 Stop = Stop according to the value set in P045 [Stop Mode].
91
Chapter 3

PF 525
Related Parameter(s): P046, P048, P050, t070, t073, t077, t082,

t086, t087, t093, t094, t097, A541, A564
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the operation of the programmable digital outputs.

Options
0 Ready/Fault
1
2
3
4
5
At Frequency
MotorRunning
Reverse
Motor Overld
Ramp Reg
6 Above Freq
7 Above Cur
Setting Output Changes State When...

Opto outputs are active when power is applied. Indicates that the drive is ready for operation. Opto outputs are
inactive when power is removed or a fault occurs.
Drive reaches commanded frequency.
Motor is receiving power from the drive.
Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction.
Motor overload condition exists.
Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decel times to avoid an overcurrent or overvoltage fault from
occurring.
Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level].
Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level].
IMPORTANT
8 Above DCVolt
9 Retries Exst
10 Above Anlg V
11 Above PF Ang
12 Anlg In Loss
13 ParamControl
14 NonRec Fault
15 EM Brk Cntrl
16 Thermal OL
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Amb OverTemp
Local Active
Comm Loss
Logic In 1
Logic In 2
Logic 1 & 2
Logic 1 or 2
StpLogic Out
Timer Out
Counter Out
At Position
28
29
30
31
At Home
Safe-Off
SafeTqPermit(1)
AutoRst Ctdn(1)
Values
2
1
Min/Max:
0/31
Display:
(1) Setting is available in FRN 5.xxx and later.
92
100 ms time delay on or off


None
Do not use if t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 Bi-Polar In.
Power Factor angle exceeds the value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level].
Analog input loss has occurred. Program t094 [Anlg In V Loss] or t097 [Anlg In mA Loss] for desired action when
input loss occurs.
Output is directly controlled by the state of the t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level]. A value of 0 causes the output to
turn off. A value of 1 or greater in this parameter causes the output to turn on.
Value set in A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded or
A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is not enabled or
A non-resettable fault has occurred.
EM Brake is energized. Program t087 [EM Brk On Delay] and t086 [EM Brk Off Delay] for desired action.
Relay energizes when thermal Motor overload counter is above the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. It
also energizes if the drive is within 5 C of the drive overheat trip point.
Relay energizes when control module over temperature occurs.
Active when drive P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] is in local keypad control.
Active when communication is lost from any comm source with reference or control.
An input is programmed as Logic Input 1 and is active.
Both Logic inputs are programmed and active.
One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active.
Drive enters StepLogic step with Command Word set to enable Logic output.
Timer has reached the value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level] or not timing.
Counter has reached the value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level] or not counting.
Drive is in Positioning mode and has reached the commanded position. Tolerance is adjusted with A564 [Encoder
Pos Tol].
Drive is in Positioning mode and has reached the home position. Tolerance is adjusted with A564 [Encoder Pos Tol].
Both safe-off inputs are active.
Both safe-off inputs are inactive (closed).
Drive is counting down to an automatic restart.
Default:
Opto Out1 Sel:
Opto Out2 Sel:
0.5 Hz above; 1.0 Hz below

None
None
Value for t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level] must be entered in percent of drive rated output
current.
Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level].
Value set in A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded.
Analog input voltage (0-10V input) exceeds the value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level].
IMPORTANT
Hysteresis
None

On, 2 mA / 1V
Off, 3 mA / 1.5V
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Chapter 3
Terminal Block Group (continued)

t070 [Opto Out1 Level]
t073 [Opto Out2 Level]
32
PF 525
Related Parameter(s): t069, t072
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the on/off point for the digital outputs when t069 or t072 [Opto Outx Sel] is set to the values shown below.
Min/Max Value Range Based On [Opto Outx Sel] Setting
6: 0...500 Hz
10: 0...100%
16: 0.1...9999 s
20: 0/1
7: 0...180%
11 0/1
17: 1...9999 counts 26: 0...150%
8: 0...815V
13 0...800
18: 0...180
Values
Default:
0.0
Min/Max:
0.0/9999.0
Display:
0.1
t075 [Opto Out Logic]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the logic (Normally Open/NO or Normally Closed/NC) of the digital outputs only.
Setting
0
1
2
3
Values
Digital Out 1 Logic

NO
NC
NO
NC
Digital Out 2 Logic

NO
NO
NC
NC
Default:
Min/Max:
0/3
Display:
93
Chapter 3
Related Parameter(s): P046, P048, P050, t070, t073, t077, t082, t086, t087, t093, t094, t097, A541, A564
t076 [Relay Out1 Sel]

t081 [Relay Out2 Sel]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the operation of the programmable output relay.

Options
0 Ready/Fault
1
2
3
4
5
At Frequency
MotorRunning
Reverse
Motor Overld
Ramp Reg
6 Above Freq
7 Above Cur
Output Relay Changes State When...

Relay changes state when power is applied. Indicates that the drive is ready for operation. Relay returns drive to
shelf state when power is removed or a fault occurs.
Drive reaches commanded frequency.
Motor is receiving power from the drive.
Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction.
Motor overload condition exists.
Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/ decel times to avoid an overcurrent or overvoltage fault from
occurring.
Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level].
Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level].
IMPORTANT
8 Above DCVolt
9 Retries Exst
10 Above Anlg V
11 Above PF Ang
12 Anlg In Loss
13 ParamControl
14 NonRec Fault
15 EM Brk Cntrl
16 Thermal OL
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Amb OverTemp
Local Active
Comm Loss
Logic In 1(1)
Logic In 2(1)
Logic 1 & 2(1)
Logic 1 or 2(1)
StpLogic Out(1)
Timer Out
Counter Out
At Position(1)
28
29
30
31
At Home(1)
Safe-Off(1)
SafeTqPermit(1)(2)
AutoRst Ctdn(1)(2)
Values
94
0
2
Min/Max:
0/31
Display:


None
Do not use if t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 Bi-Polar In.
Power Factor angle exceeds the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level].
Analog input loss has occurred. Program t094 [Anlg In V Loss] or t097 [Anlg In mA Loss] for desired action when
input loss occurs.
Output will be directly controlled by the state of the t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. A value of 0 causes the output
to turn off. A value of 1 or greater in this parameter causes the output to turn on.
Value set in A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded or
A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is not enabled or
A non-resettable fault has occurred.
EM Brake is energized. Program t087 [EM Brk On Delay] and t086 [EM Brk Off Delay] for desired action.
Relay energizes when thermal Motor overload counter is above the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. It
also energizes if the drive is within 5C of the drive overheat trip point.
Relay energizes when control module over temperature occurs.
Active when drive P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] is in local keypad control.
Active when communication is lost from any comm source with reference or control.
Both Logic inputs are programmed and active.
One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active.
Drive enters StepLogic step with Command Word set to enable Logic output.
Timer has reached the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level] or not timing.
Counter has reached the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level] or not counting.
Drive is in Positioning mode and has reached the commanded position. Tolerance is adjusted with A564 [Encoder
Pos Tol].
Drive is in Positioning mode and has reached the home position. Tolerance is adjusted with A564 [Encoder Pos Tol].
Both safe-off inputs are active.
Both safe-off inputs are inactive (closed).
Drive is counting down to an automatic restart.
Default:
Relay Out1 Sel:
Relay Out2 Sel:
0.5 Hz above; 1.0 Hz below

None
None
Value for t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level] must be entered in percent of drive rated output
current.
Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level].
Value set in A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded.
Analog input voltage (0-10V input) exceeds the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level].
IMPORTANT
Hysteresis
None

On, 2 mA / 1V
Off, 3 mA / 1.5V
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Chapter 3

(2) Setting is available in FRN 5.xxx and later.
t077 [Relay Out1 Level]
t082 [Relay Out2 Level]

PF 525
32
PowerFlex 525 only.

32 bit parameter.
Determines the on/off point for the output relay when t076 or t081 [Relay Outx Sel] is set to the values shown below.
Min/Max Value Range Based On [Relay Outx Sel] Setting
6: 0...500 Hz
10: 0...100%
16: 0.1...9999 s
20: 0/1
7: 0...180%
11: 0/1
17: 1...9999 counts 26: 0...150%
8: 0...815V
13: 0...800
18: 0...180
Values
Default:
0.0
Min/Max:
0.0/9999.0
Display:
0.1
t079 [Relay 1 On Time]

t084 [Relay 2 On Time]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the delay time before Relay energizes after required condition is met.
Values
Default:
0.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/600.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
t080 [Relay 1 Off Time]

t085 [Relay 2 Off Time]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the delay time before Relay de-energizes after required condition ceases.
Values
Default:
0.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/600.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
t086 [EM Brk Off Delay]
Sets the time the drive remains at minimum frequency before ramping up to the commanded frequency (and engaging the brake coil relay) if Electromechanical (EM) Brake Control
Mode is enabled with P045 [Stop Mode].
Frequency
Ram
cce
[EM Brk Off Delay]
[EM Brk On Delay]
pd
Ram
pa
ece
[Minimum Freq]
Start
commanded
Values
Time
EM Brk
Stop
energized (Off)
commanded
Default:
2.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/10.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
EM Brk
de-energized (On)
Drive stops
95
Chapter 3

t087 [EM Brk On Delay]
Sets the time the drive remains at minimum frequency (after releasing the brake coil relay) before stopping if EM Brake Control Mode is enabled with P045 [Stop Mode].
Frequency
Ram
cce
l
[EM Brk Off Delay]
[EM Brk On Delay]
pd
Ram
pa
ece
[Minimum Freq]
Start
commanded
Values
Time
EM Brk
Stop
energized (Off)
commanded
Default:
2.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/10.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
EM Brk
de-energized (On)
Drive stops
t088 [Analog Out Sel]
Related Parameter(s): t090
The 0-10V, 0-20 mA or 4-2 0 mA analog output can be used to provide a signal proportional to several drive conditions. This parameter also selects which analog calibration parameters
to use.(1)
Options
Output Range
Minimum Output Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
0-10V
0-10V
0-10V
0-10V
0-10V
0-10V
0-10V
0-10V
0-20 mA
0-20 mA
0-20 mA
0-20 mA
0-20 mA
0-20 mA
0-20 mA
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
0V = 0 Hz
0V = 0 A
0V = 0V
0V = 0 kW
0V = 0 A
0V = 0000
0V = 0%
0V = 0V
0 mA = 0 Hz
0 mA = 0 A
0 mA = 0V
0 mA = 0 kW
0 mA = 0 A
0 mA = 0000
0 mA = 0%
0 mA = 0V
4 mA = 0 Hz
4 mA = 0 A
4 mA = 0V
4 mA = 0 kW
4 mA = 0 A
4 mA = 0000
4 mA = 0%
4 mA = 0V
OutFreq 0-10
OutCurr 0-10
OutVolt 0-10
OutPowr 0-10
OutTorq 0-10
TstData 0-10
Setpnt 0-10
DCVolt 0-10
OutFreq 0-20
OutCurr 0-20
OutVolt 0-20
OutPowr 0-20
OutTorq 0-20
TstData 0-20
Setpnt 0-20
DCVolt 0-20
OutFreq 4-20
OutCurr 4-20
OutVolt 4-20
OutPowr 4-20
OutTorq 4-20
TstData 4-20
Setpnt 4-20
DCVolt 4-20
Maximum Output Value =

t089 [Analog Out High]
[Maximum Freq]
200% Drive Rated Current
120% Drive Rated Output Volts
200% Drive Rated Power
65535 (Hex FFFF)
100.0% Setpoint setting
100.0% of trip value
[Maximum Freq]
65535 (Hex FFFF)
[Maximum Freq]
65535 (Hex FFFF)
Filter(1)
None
Filter A
None
Filter A
Filter A
None
None
None
None
Filter A
None
Filter A
Filter A
None
None
None
None
Filter A
None
Filter A
Filter A
None
None
None
Related
Parameter
b001
b003
b004
b017
d382
t090
b005
b001
b003
b004
b017
d382
t090
b005
b001
b003
b004
b017
d382
t090
b005
(1) Filter A is a single pole digital filter with a 162 ms time constant. Given a 0...100% step input from a steady state, the output of Filter A takes 500 ms to get to 95% of maximum, 810 ms to get to 99%,
and 910 ms to get to 100%.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0/23
Display:
(1) Parameter is also available in PowerFlex 523 FRN 3.xxx and later. PowerFlex 523 series B drive is required.
96
Chapter 3

t089 [Analog Out High]
Scales the maximum output value (V or mA) when the source setting is at maximum.(1)
Values
Default:
100%
Min/Max:
0/800%
Display:
1%
t090 [Anlg Out Setpt]
Related Parameter(s): t088
Sets the percentage of output desired when t088 [Analog Out Sel] is set to 6, 14 or 22 Analog Setpoint.
Values
Default:
(1)
0.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo]
Related Parameter(s): P043, t092, t093
Sets the percentage (based on 10V) of input voltage applied to the 0-10V analog input used to represent P043 [Minimum Freq].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value larger than t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi].
If t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 Bi-Polar In, this parameter is ignored.
Values
Default:
0.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/200.0%
Display:
0.1%
t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi]
Related Parameter(s): P044, t091, t093
Sets the percentage (based on 10V) of input voltage applied to the 0-10V analog input used to represent P044 [Maximum Freq].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo].
If t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 Bi-Polar In, the same value applies to positive and negative voltage.
Values
Default:
100.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/200.0%
Display:
0.1%
t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Enables/disables bi-polar control. In bi-polar mode direction is commanded by the polarity of the voltage.
If bi-polar control is enabled, P043 [Minimum Freq] and t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] are ignored.
Options
0 Uni-Polar In (Default)
0-10V only
1 Bi-Polar In
10V
97
Chapter 3

t094 [Anlg In V Loss]
Sets the response to a loss of input. When the 0-10V input (or 10 to +10V) is used for any reference, any input less than 1V is reported as a signal loss. Input must exceed 1.5V for the
signal loss condition to end.
If enabled, this function affects any input that is being used as a speed reference, PID reference or PID setpoint in the drive.
Options
0 Disabled (Default)
1 Fault (F29)
2 Stop
3 Zero Ref
4 Min Freq Ref
5 Max Freq Ref
6 Key Freq Ref
7 MOP Freq Ref
8 Continu Last
t095 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo]
Related Parameter(s): P043, t096
Sets the percentage (based on 4-20 mA) of input current applied to the 4-20 mA analog input used to represent P043 [Minimum Freq].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value larger than t096 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi].
Values
Default:
0.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
t096 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi]
Related Parameter(s): P044, t095
Sets the percentage (based on 4-20 mA) of input current applied to the 4-20 mA analog input used to represent P044 [Maximum Freq].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than t095 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo].
Values
Default:
100.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/200.0%
Display:
0.1%
t097 [Anlg In mA Loss]
Sets the response to a loss of input. When the 4-20mA input is used for any reference, any input less than 2 mA is reported as a signal loss. Input must exceed 3 mA for the signal loss
condition to end.
If enabled, this function affects any input that is being used as a speed reference or PID reference or PID setpoint in the drive.
Options
1 Fault (F29)
2 Stop
3 Zero Ref
4 Min Freq Ref
5 Max Freq Ref
6 Key Freq Ref
7 MOP Freq Ref
8 Continu Last
98
Chapter 3

t098 [Anlg Loss Delay]
Sets the length of time after power-up during which the drive detects no analog signal loss.
Response to an analog signal loss is set in t094 or t097 [Analog In x Loss].
Values
Default:
0.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0 /20.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
t099 [Analog In Filter]

Sets the level of additional filtering of the analog input signals. A higher number increases filtering and decreases bandwidth. Each setting doubles the applied filtering (1 = 2x filter, 2
= 4x filter, and so on).
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0/14
Display:
t100 [Sleep-Wake Sel]
Related Parameter(s): t101, t102, t103
Drive sleeps if the appropriate analog input drops below the set t101 [Sleep Level] for the time set in t102 [Sleep Time] and the drive is running. When entering sleep mode the drive
ramps to zero and the run indicator on the keypad display flashes to indicate the drive is in sleep mode.
When the appropriate analog input rises above the set [Wake Level], the drive wakes and ramps to the commanded frequency.
Inversion can be accomplished by setting [Sleep Level] to a higher setting than t103 [Wake Level].
ATTENTION: Enabling the Sleep-Wake function can cause unexpected machine operation during the Wake mode. Equipment damage and/or personal injury
can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. In addition, all applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations or
industry guidelines must be considered.
Options
1 0-10V Input
Sleep enabled from 0-10V Analog Input 1
2 4-20mA Input
Sleep enabled from 4-20 mA Analog Input 2
3 Command Freq
Sleep enabled based on drive commanded frequency
t101 [Sleep Level]

Sets the analog input level the drive must reach to enter sleep mode.
Values
Default:
10.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
t102 [Sleep Time]

Sets the analog input time the drive must stay below to enter sleep mode.
Values
Default:
0.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/600.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
t103 [Wake Level]

Sets the analog input level the drive must reach to wake from sleep mode.
Values
Default:
15.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
99
Chapter 3

t104 [Wake Time]
Sets the analog input time the drive must stay above to wake from sleep mode.
Values
Default:
0.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/600.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
t105 [Safety Open En]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the action when both safety inputs (Safety 1 and Safety 2) are disabled (de-energized no power is applied).
Options
0 FaultEnable (Default)
1 FaultDisable
t106 [SafetyFlt RstCfg]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
(With FRN 5.xxx and later.)

Sets the method of resetting fault F111 Safety Hardware either by means of a power cycle or fault clear operation.
Options
100
0 PwrCycleRset (Default)
Reset fault F111 using power cycle.
1 FltClr Reset
Reset fault F111 using fault clear mechanism without power cycle.
Chapter 3
Communications Group
Saves parameter values in active drive memory (RAM) or in drive non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
ATTENTION: If Automatic Drive Configuration (ADC) is used, this parameter must remain at its default value of 0 Save.
IMPORTANT
Options
Parameter values set prior to setting 1 RAM only are saved in RAM.
0 Save (Default)
1 RAM only

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Selects velocity-specific or position/fibers-specific Command and Status Word bit definitions for use over a communication network. See Writing (06) Logic Command Data on page 203
for more information. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is established through the communication adapter or the drives embedded EtherNet/IP port.
Options
0 Velocity (Default)
1 Position

Sets the communications baud rate (bits/second) for the RS485 port. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options
0 1200
1 2400
2 4800
3 9600 (Default)
4 19,200
5 38,400
C124 [RS485 Node Addr]

Sets the Modbus drive node number (address) for the RS485 port if using a network connection. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Values
Default:
100
Min/Max:
1/247
Display:
C125 [Comm Loss Action]
Sets the drive's response to a loss of connection or excessive communication errors on the RS485 port.
Options
0 Fault (Default)
1 Coast Stop
Stops drive using Coast to stop.
2 Stop
Stops drive using P045 [Stop Mode] setting.
3 Continu Last
Drive continues operating at communication commanded speed saved in RAM.
Sets the time that the drive remains in communication loss with the RS485 port before taking the action specified in C125 [Comm Loss Action]. See Appendix C for more information.
IMPORTANT
Values
This setting is effective only if I/O that controls the drive is transmitted through the RS485 port.
Default:
5.0 s
Min/Max:
0.1/60.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
101
Chapter 3
Communications Group (continued)

C127 [RS485 Format]
Determines the details related to the specific Modbus protocol used by the drive. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options
0 RTU 8-N-1 (Default)

1 RTU 8-E-1
2 RTU 8-O-1
3 RTU 8-N-2
4 RTU 8-E-2
5 RTU 8-O-2
C128 [EN Addr Sel]

PF 525
Related Parameter(s): C129-C132, C133-C136, C137-C140
PowerFlex 525 only.
Enables the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set with a BOOTP server. Identifies the connections that would be attempted on a reset or power cycle. A reset or power
cycle is required after selection is made.
Options
1 Parameters
2 BOOTP (Default)
C129
C130
C131
C132
PF 525
[EN IP Addr Cfg 1]

[EN IP Addr Cfg 2]
[EN IP Addr Cfg 3]
[EN IP Addr Cfg 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the bytes in the IP address. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
192.168.1.62
[EN IP Addr Cfg 1]
[EN IP Addr Cfg 2]
[EN IP Addr Cfg 3]
[EN IP Addr Cfg 4]
IMPORTANT
Values
102
C128 [EN Addr Sel] must be set to 1 Parameters.
Default:
Min/Max:
0/255
Display:
Chapter 3

C133
C134
C135
C136
PF 525
[EN Subnet Cfg 1]

[EN Subnet Cfg 2]
[EN Subnet Cfg 3]
[EN Subnet Cfg 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the bytes of the subnet mask. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
255.255.255.0
[EN Subnet Cfg 1]
[EN Subnet Cfg 2]
[EN Subnet Cfg 3]
[EN Subnet Cfg 4]
IMPORTANT
Values
C137
C138
C139
C140
PF 525
Default:
Min/Max:
0/255
Display:
[EN Gateway Cfg 1]

[EN Gateway Cfg 2]
[EN Gateway Cfg 3]
[EN Gateway Cfg 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the bytes of the gateway address. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
192.168.1.1
[EN Gateway Cfg 1]
[EN Gateway Cfg 2]
[EN Gateway Cfg 3]
[EN Gateway Cfg 4]
IMPORTANT
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0/255
Display:
C141 [EN Rate Cfg]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the network data rate at which EtherNet/IP communicates. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options
0 Auto detect (Default)

1 10Mbps Full
2 10Mbps Half
3 100Mbps Full
4 100Mbps Half
103
Chapter 3

C143 [EN Comm Flt Actn]
PF 525
Related Parameter(s): P045, C145, C146, C147-C150
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the action that the EtherNet/IP interface and drive takes if the EtherNet/IP interface detects that Ethernet communications have been disrupted.
IMPORTANT
This setting is effective only if I/O that controls the drive is transmitted through the EtherNet/IP interface.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter C143 [EN Comm Flt Actn] lets you determine the action of the EtherNet/IP interface and
connected drive if communications are disrupted. By default, this parameter faults the drive. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run.
Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive,
verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected drive).
Options
0 Fault (Default)
1 Stop
Drive stops per P045 [Stop Mode] setting.
2 Zero Data
Note: The Reference and Datalink values transmitted to the drive will be set to 0.
3 Hold Last
Note: The Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink values transmitted to the drive will be held at their last value.
4 Send Flt Cfg
Note: The Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink values will be transmitted to the drive as configured in C145, C146, and
C147...C150.
C144 [EN Idle Flt Actn]

PF 525
Related Parameter(s): P045, C145, C146, C147-C150
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the action that the EtherNet/IP interface and drive takes if the EtherNet/IP interface detects that the scanner is idle because the controller was switched to program mode.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter C144 [EN Idle Flt Actn] lets you determine the action of the EtherNet/IP interface and
connected drive if the scanner is idle. By default, this parameter faults the drive. you can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions
should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that
your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected drive).
Options
0 Fault (Default)
1 Stop
Drive stops per P045 [Stop Mode] setting.
2 Zero Data
Note: The Reference and Datalink values transmitted to the drive will be set to 0.
3 Hold Last
Note: The Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink values transmitted to the drive will be held at their last value.
4 Send Flt Cfg
Note: The Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink values will be transmitted to the drive as configured in C145, C146, and
C147...C150.
C145 [EN Flt Cfg Logic]

32
PF 525
Related Parameter(s): C143, C144
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true:
C143 [EN Comm Flt Actn] is set to 4 Send Flt Cfg and communications are disrupted.
C144 [EN Idle Flt Actn] is set to 4 Send Flt Cfg and the scanner is put into Program or Test mode.
See Writing (06) Logic Command Data on page 203 for more information.
Values
104
Default:
0000
Min/Max:
0000/FFFF
Display:
0000
Chapter 3

C146 [EN Flt Cfg Ref]
32
PF 525
Related Parameter(s): C143, C144
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true:
Values
C147
C148
C149
C150
PF 525
Default:
Min/Max:
0/50000
Display:
[EN Flt Cfg DL 1]

[EN Flt Cfg DL 2]
[EN Flt Cfg DL 3]
[EN Flt Cfg DL 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the Ethernet Datalink Input data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true:
Values
C153
C154
C155
C156
PF 525
Default:
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
[EN Data In 1]
[EN Data In 2]
[EN Data In 3]
[EN Data In 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Datalink parameter number whose value is written from the embedded EtherNet/IP data table. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is established through the
drives embedded EtherNet/IP port.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0/800
Display:
C157
C158
C159
C160
[EN Data Out 1]

[EN Data Out 2]
[EN Data Out 3]
[EN Data Out 4]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Datalink parameter number whose value is read from the embedded EtherNet/IP data table. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is established through the
drives embedded EtherNet/IP port.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0/800
Display:
105
Chapter 3

C161
C162
C163
C164
[Opt Data In 1]
[Opt Data In 2]
[Opt Data In 3]
[Opt Data In 4]
Datalink parameter number whose value is written from the High Speed Drive Serial Interface (HSDSI) data table. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is
established through the communication adapter.
Values
C165
C166
C167
C168
Default:
Min/Max:
0/800
Display:
[Opt Data Out 1]

[Opt Data Out 2]
[Opt Data Out 3]
[Opt Data Out 4]
Datalink parameter number whose value is read from the HSDSI data table. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is established through the communication
adapter.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0/800
Display:
C169 [MultiDrv Sel]

Sets the configuration of the drive that is in multi-drive mode. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options
No multi-drive master from the internal network option module or embedded Ethernet port. The drive can still function as a
multi-drive slave or as a single drive (no multi-drive used).
1 Network Opt
Multi-drive is enabled with the internal network option as a multi-drive master. The host drive is Drive 0 and up to four slave
drives can be daisy-chained from its RS485 port.
2 EtherNet/IP(1)
Multi-drive is enabled with the embedded Ethernet port as the multi-drive master. The host drive is Drive 0 and up to four slave
drives can be daisy-chained from its RS485 port.
C171
C172
C173
C174
[Drv 1 Addr]
[Drv 2 Addr]
[Drv 3 Addr]
[Drv 4 Addr]
Sets the corresponding node addresses of the daisy-chained drives when C169 [MultiDrv Sel] is set to 1 Network Opt or 2 EtherNet/IP. A reset or power cycle is required after
selection is made.
Values
Default:
Drv 1 Addr:
Drv 2 Addr:
Drv 3 Addr:
Drv 4 Addr:
2
3
4
5
Min/Max:
1/247
Display:
C175 [DSI I/O Cfg]

Sets the configuration of the Drives that are active in the multi-drive mode. Identifies the connections that would be attempted on a reset or power cycle. A reset or power cycle is
required after selection is made.
Options
0 Drive 0 (Default)
1 Drive 0-1
2 Drive 0-2
3 Drive 0-3
4 Drive 0-4
106
Chapter 3
Logic Group
L180
L182
L184
L186
[Stp Logic 0]
[Stp Logic 2]
[Stp Logic 4]
[Stp Logic 6]
L181
L183
L185
L187
[Stp Logic 1]
[Stp Logic 3]
[Stp Logic 5]
[Stp Logic 7]
Related Parameter(s):

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Values
Default:
00F1
Min/Max:
0000/FAFF
Display
0001
See Appendix D and Appendix E for more information on applying Step Logic and Position StepLogic.
Parameters L180...L187 are only active if P047, P049, or P051 [Speed Referencex] is set to 13 Step Logic or 16 Positioning. These parameters can be used to create a custom profile of
frequency commands. Each step can be based on time, status of a Logic input or a combination of time and the status of a Logic input.
Digits 1...4 for each [Stp Logic x] parameter must be programmed according to the desired profile. A Logic input is established by setting a digital input, parameters t062, t063,
t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] to 24 Logic In 1 and/or 25 Logic In 2 or by using Bits 6 and 7 of A560 [Enh Control Word].
A time interval between steps can be programmed using parameters L190...L197 [Stp Logic Time x]. See the table below for related parameters.
The speed for any step is programmed using parameters A410...A417 [Preset Freq x].
Step StepLogic Parameter Related Preset Frequency Parameter
(Can be activated independent of StepLogic Parameters)
0
L180 [Stp Logic 0]
A410 [Preset Freq 0]
1
L181 [Stp Logic 1]
2
L182 [Stp Logic 2]
3
L183 [Stp Logic 3]
4
L184 [Stp Logic 4]
5
L185 [Stp Logic 5]
6
L186 [Stp Logic 6]
7
L187 [Stp Logic 7]
Related StepLogic Time Parameter

(Active when L180...L187 Digit 1 or 2 are set to 1, b, C, d or E)
L190 [Stp Logic Time 0]
The position for any step is programmed using parameters L200...L214 [Step Units x].
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
StepLogic Position Parameter

L200 [Step Units 0] & L201 [Step Units F 0]
How StepLogic Works

The StepLogic sequence begins with a valid start command. A normal sequence always begins with L180 [Stp Logic 0].
Digit 1: Logic for next step
This digit defines the logic for the next step. When the condition is met the program advances to the next step. Step 0 follows Step 7. Example: Digit 1 is set to 3. When Logic In 2
becomes active, the program advances to the next step.
Digit 2: Logic to jump to a different step
For all settings other than F, when the condition is met, the program overrides Digit 0 and jumps to the step defined by Digit 3.
Digit 3: Different step to jump
When the condition for Digit 2 is met, this digit setting determines the next step or to end the program.
Digit 4: Step settings
This digit defines additional characteristics of each step.
Any StepLogic parameter can be programmed to control a relay or opto output, but you can not control different outputs based on the condition of different StepLogic commands.
107
Chapter 3
StepLogic Settings
The logic for each function is determined by the four digits for each StepLogic parameter. The following is a listing of the available settings for each digit. See Appendix D for more
information.
Logic for next step

Logic to jump to a different step
Different step to jump
Step settings
Not Used
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Velocity Control Settings (Digit 4)

Required
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
StepLogic
Output State
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Settings (Digit 3)
Commanded
Direction
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
Settings (Digit 2 and 1)
Positioning Settings (Digit 4)

Required
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
108
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
StepLogic
Output State
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Direction
From Home
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
Description
Jump to Step 0
Jump to Step 1
Jump to Step 2
Jump to Step 3
Jump to Step 4
Jump to Step 5
Jump to Step 6
Jump to Step 7
End Program (Normal Stop)
End Program (Coast to Stop)
End Program and Fault (F2)
Type of
Command
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
Description
Skip Step (Jump Immediately)
Step Based on [Stp Logic Time x]
Step if Logic In 1 is Active
Step if Logic In 1 is Not Active
Step if either Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is Active
Step if both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 are Active
Step if neither Logic In 1 nor Logic In 2 is Active
Step if Logic In 1 is Active and Logic In 2 is Not Active
Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is Active
Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is Not Active
Do Not Step/Ignore Digit 2 Settings
Chapter 3
Logic Group (continued)

L190
L192
L194
L196
PF 525
[Stp Logic Time 0]

[Stp Logic Time 2]
[Stp Logic Time 4]
[Stp Logic Time 6]
L191
L193
L195
L197
[Stp Logic Time 1]

[Stp Logic Time 3]
[Stp Logic Time 5]
[Stp Logic Time 7]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding command word is set to Step based on time.
Values
L200
L204
L208
L212
32
PF 525
Default:
30.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/999.9 s
Display:
0.1 s
[Step Units 0]
[Step Units 2]
[Step Units 4]
[Step Units 6]
L202
L206
L210
L214
[Step Units 1]
[Step Units 3]
[Step Units 5]
[Step Units 7]
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the position in user-defined units the drive must reach at each step.
Values
Default:
0.00
Min/Max:
0.00/6400.00
Display:
0.01
109
Chapter 3
Advanced Display Group

d360 [Analog In 0-10V]
Displays the 0-10V analog input as a percent of full scale.

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
d361 [Analog In 4-20mA]
Displays the 4-20 mA analog input as a percent of full scale.

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
d362 [Elapsed Time-hr]
Displays the total elapsed powered-up time (in hours) since timer reset. The timer stops when it reaches the maximum value.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/32767 hr
Display:
1 hr
d363 [Elapsed Time-min]
Related Parameter(s): d362, A555
Displays the total elapsed powered-up time (in minutes) since timer reset. Resets to zero when maximum value is reached and increments d362 [Elapsed Time-hr] by one.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/60.0 min
Display:
0.1 min
d364 [Counter Status]

Displays the current value of the counter if enabled.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
d365 [Timer Status]

32
32 bit parameter.
Displays the current value of the timer if enabled.

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/9999.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
d367 [Drive Type]

Displays the Drive type setting. Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel (not write accessible by non Rockwell Automation technical personnel).
Values
110
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
Chapter 3
Advanced Display Group (continued)

d368 [Testpoint Data]
Displays the present value of the function selected in A483 [Testpoint Sel].
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/FFFF
Display:
d369 [Motor OL Level]

Displays the motor overload counter.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/150.0%
Display:
0.1%
d375 [Slip Hz Meter]
Displays the current amount of slip or droop (absolute value) being applied to the motor frequency. Drives applies slip based on the setting for P032 [Motor NP Hertz].
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/25.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
d376 [Speed Feedback]

32
32 bit parameter.
Displays the value of the actual motor speed whether measured by encoder/pulse train feedback or estimated.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/64000.0 rpm
Display:
0.1 rpm
d378 [Encoder Speed]

32
32 bit parameter.
Provides a monitoring point that reflects the speed measured from the feedback device. This shows the encoder or pulse train speed even if not used directly to control motor speed.(1)
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/64000.0 rpm
Display:
0.1 rpm
(1) Parameter is also available in PowerFlex 523 FRN 3.xxx and later.
d380 [DC Bus Ripple]

Displays the real-time value of the DC bus ripple voltage.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/410VDC for 230V AC drives; 820VDC for 460VAC drives; 1025VDC for 600VAC drives
Display:
1V DC
d381 [Output Powr Fctr]

Displays the angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and motor current.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/180.0 deg
Display:
0.1 deg
111
Chapter 3

d382 [Torque Current]
Displays the current value of the motor torque current measured by the drive.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
Display:
0.01 A
d383 [PID1 Fdbk Displ]

d385 [PID2 Fdbk Displ]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the active PID Feedback value.

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
d384 [PID1 Setpnt Disp]

d386 [PID2 Setpnt Disp]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the active PID Setpoint value.

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
d387 [Position Status]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the present operating condition of the drive. When in Positioning mode, Bit 1 indicates positive or negative position in relation to Home.
Dir Positive
At Position
At Home
Drive Homed
Not Used
Values
1 = Condition True, 0 = Condition False

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0000/1111
Display:
0000
d388 [Units Traveled H]
Related Parameter(s): d387

32
PF 525
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the number of user-defined units traveled from the home position. See d387 [Position Status] for direction of travel.
Values
112
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/64000
Display:
Chapter 3

d389 [Units Traveled L]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the number of user-defined units traveled from the home position. See d387 [Position Status] for direction of travel.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/0.99
Display:
0.01
d390 [Fiber Status]

Present status of the Fibers features.
Sync Hold
Sync Ramp
Traverse On
Traverse Dec
Not Used
Values

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0000/1111
Display:
0000
d391 [Stp Logic Status]

PF 525
Related Parameter(s): P047, L180-L187
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the current step of the Step Logic profile as defined by parameters L180...L187 [Step Logic x] when P047 [Speed Reference1] is set to 13 Step Logic or 16 Positioning.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/8
Display:
d392 [RdyBit Mode Act]
(With PowerFlex 525 FRN 3.xxx and later.)

Displays the value of A574 [RdyBit Mode Cfg].
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/1
Display:
113
Chapter 3

d393 [Drive Status 2]
Saf
e
F11 TqPer
m
Saf 1 Stat it (1)
e u
Saf ty S2 (1s) (1)
ety
S1 (1)
Cur
r Li
EM mit
B
Aut rakin
o
At F Tuni g
n
DC req g
B
Aut rakin
g
Mo oRst C
tor tdn
Flu Ove
x
Jog Braki rld
gin ng
g

Displays the present operating condition of the drive.
x x 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 = Condition True
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 = Condition False
x = Reserved
Nibble 4
Nibble 3
Nibble 2
Nibble 1
Bit #
* Enhanced Control Option Only.
(1) Bit status is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
d394 [Dig Out Status]

Displays relay output and opto output status.
Rly1 Status
Rly2 Status(1)
Opto1 Status(1)
Opto2 Status(1)
Not Used
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Status
Relay 1 status (Normally Open)
Relay 2 status (Normally Closed)
Opto 1 status
Opto 2 status
Bit Value = 0
Not activated (Relay 1 open)
Not activated (Relay 2 closed)
Not activated
Not activated
Values
114
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/15
Display:
Bit Value = 1
Activated (Relay 1 closed)
Activated (Relay 2 open)
Activated
Activated
Chapter 3
Advanced Program Group

A410
A412
A414
A416
[Preset Freq 0]
[Preset Freq 2]
[Preset Freq 4]
[Preset Freq 6]
A411
A413
A415
A417
[Preset Freq 1]
[Preset Freq 3]
[Preset Freq 5]
[Preset Freq 7]
A418
A420
A422
A424
[Preset Freq 8]
[Preset Freq 10]
[Preset Freq 12]
[Preset Freq 14]
A419
A421
A423
A425
[Preset Freq 9]
[Preset Freq 11]
[Preset Freq 13]
[Preset Freq 15]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the frequency of the drive outputs to the programmed value when selected.
For PowerFlex 525
Default Accel/Decel Used
Preset Setting 0(1)
Preset Setting 1
Preset Setting 2
Preset Setting 3
Preset Setting 4
Preset Setting 5
Preset Setting 6
Preset Setting 7
Preset Setting 8
Preset Setting 9
Preset Setting 10
Preset Setting 11
Preset Setting 12
Preset Setting 13
Preset Setting 14
Preset Setting 15
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
Preset Input 1
(DigIn TermBlk 05)
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Preset Input 2
(DigIn TermBlk 06)
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Preset Input 3
(DigIn TermBlk 07)
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Preset Input 4
(DigIn TermBlk 08)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Preset Input 1
(DigIn TermBlk 05)
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Preset Input 2
(DigIn TermBlk 06)
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Preset Input 3
(DigIn TermBlk 03)
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
For PowerFlex 523

Default Accel/Decel Used
Preset Setting 0(1)
Preset Setting 1
Preset Setting 2
Preset Setting 3
Preset Setting 4
Preset Setting 5
Preset Setting 6
Preset Setting 7
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
(1) Preset Setting 0 is only available if P047, P049 or P051 [Speed Referencex] is set to 7 Preset Freq.
Values
Defaults:
Preset Freq 0:
Preset Freq 1:
Preset Freq 2:
Preset Freq 3:
Preset Freq 4:
Preset Freq 5:
Preset Freq 6:
Preset Freq 7...15:
0.00 Hz
5.00 Hz
10.00 HZ
20.00 Hz
30.00 Hz
40.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
60.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
115
Chapter 3
Advanced Program Group (continued)

A426 [Keypad Freq]
Related Parameter(s): P047, P049, P051
Provides the drive frequency command using the built-in keypad navigation. When P047, P049 or P051 [Speed Referencex] selects 2 Keypad Freq, the value set in this parameter
controls the frequency of the drive. The value of this parameter can also be changed when navigating with the keypad by pressing the Up or Down arrow keys.
Values
Default:
60.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
A427 [MOP Freq]

Provides the drive frequency command using the built-in Motor Operated Potentiometer (MOP).
IMPORTANT
Values
Frequency is not written to non-volatile storage until drive is powered-down. If both MOP Up and MOP Down are applied at the same time, the inputs are
ignored and the frequency is unchanged.
Default:
60.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
A428 [MOP Reset Sel]

Determines if the current MOP reference command is saved on power down.
Options
0 Zero MOP Ref
Resets the MOP frequency to zero on power down and stop.
1 Save MOP Ref (Default)

A429 [MOP Preload]
Determines the operation of the MOP function.
Options
0 No preload (Default)
1 Preload
Bumpless Transfer: whenever MOP mode is selected, the current output value of the speed is loaded.
A430 [MOP Time]

Sets the rate of change of the MOP reference.
Values
Default:
10.0 s
Min/Max:
0.1/600.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
A431 [Jog Frequency]
Sets the output frequency when a jog command is issued.

Values
Default:
10.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/[Maximum Freq]
Display:
0.01 Hz
A432 [Jog Accel/Decel]

Sets the acceleration and deceleration time used when in jog mode.
Values
116
Default:
10.00 s
Min/Max:
0.01/600.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
Chapter 3

A433 [Purge Frequency]
Related Parameter(s): t062, t063, t065-t068
Provides a fixed frequency command value when t062, t063, t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] is set to 40 Purge.
Values
Default:
5.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
A434 [DC Brake Time]
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor.
Values
Default:
0.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/99.9 s
Display:
0.1 s
A435 [DC Brake Level]
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor when P045 [Stop Mode] is set to either 4 Ramp or 6 DC Brake.
Ramp-to-Stop Mode
DC Injection Stop Mode

[DC Brake Time]
Vo
Volts/Speed
Volts/Speed
Voltage
lta
Spee
Stop Command
ge
[DC Brake Time]

Magnitude
depends on
[DC Brake Level]
Time
Speed
Stop Command
Time
Magnitude
depends on
[DC Brake Level]
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used. This feature should
not be used with synchronous motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
Values
Default:
Drive Rated Amps x 0.05
Min/Max:
0.00/(Drive Rated Amps x 1.80)
Display:
0.01 A
A436 [DC Brk Time@Strt]
Volts/Speed
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor after a valid start command is received.
ge
lta
Vo
[DC Brk Time@Strt]
Spee
[DC Brake Level]

Start Command
Values
Default:
Time
0.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/99.9 s
Display:
0.1 s
117
Chapter 3

A437 [DB Resistor Sel]
Related Parameter(s): A438, A550
Enables/disables external dynamic braking and selects the level of resistor protection.
IMPORTANT
Options
When A437 [DB Resistor Sel] is set to a value greater than 0, the value set in parameter A550 [Bus Reg Enable] will not take effect.
Disabled (Default)
Norml RA Res
5%
NoProtection
100%
3...99 3...99% DutyCycle

A438 [DB Threshold]
Sets the DC bus voltage threshold for Dynamic Brake operation. If DC bus voltage rises above this level, Dynamic Brake turns on. Lower values makes the dynamic braking function more
responsive but may result in nuisance Dynamic Brake activation (IGBT can modulate continuously).
ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if this parameter is set to a value that causes the dynamic braking resistor to dissipate excessive power. Parameter
settings less than 100% should be carefully evaluated to ensure that the Dynamic Brake resistor's wattage rating is not exceeded. In general, values less than
90% are not needed. This parameter's setting is especially important if parameter A437 [DB Resistor Sel] is set to 2 NoProtection.
Values
Default:
100.0%
Min/Max:
10.0/110.0%
Display:
0.1%
A439 [S Curve %]
Enables a fixed shape S-Curve that is applied to the acceleration and deceleration ramps (including jog).
S-Curve Time = (Accel or Decel Time) x (S-Curve Setting in percentage)
100% S-Curve
50% S-Curve
Target
vel
Target
vel
Target
vel/2
S-Curve Time = Accel Time
S-Curve Time
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S-Curve Time
Values
118
Default:
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S-Curve Time
0%
Min/Max:
0/100%
Display:
1%
Example:
Accel Time = 10 s
S-Curve Setting = 30%
S-Curve Time = 10 x 0.3 = 3 s
Chapter 3

A440 [PWM Frequency]
% Output Curent (A)
Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform. The chart below provides derating guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting.
100
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
50
Note: If Vector mode (open loop) is selected and 16 kHz is selected,

the drive will forcibly reduce the carrier frequency to 8 kHz.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
Ignoring derating guidelines can cause reduced drive performance. The drive may automatically reduce the PWM carrier frequency at low output speeds,
unless prevented from doing so by A540 [Var PWM Disable].
IMPORTANT
Values
Default:
4.0 kHz
Min/Max:
2.0/16.0 kHz
Display:
0.1 kHz
A441 [Droop Hertz@ FLA]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Reduces the frequency based on current. This frequency is subtracted from the commanded output frequency. Generally Slip and Droop would not both be used, but if both are enabled
they simply subtract from each other. Typically used in load sharing schemes.
Values
Default:
0.0 Hz
Min/Max:
0.0/10.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
A442 [Accel Time 2]
Time for the drive to ramp from 0.0 Hz to P044 [Maximum Freq] if Accel Time 2 is selected.
Accel Rate = [Maximum Freq] / [Accel Time]
[Maximum Freq]
0
0
Values
[Accel Time x]
Default:
on
Acc
rati
ele
ele
rati
on
Dec
Speed
Time
[Decel Time x]
10.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/600.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
A443 [Decel Time 2]
Time for the drive to ramp from P044 [Maximum Freq] to 0.0 Hz if Decel Time 2 is selected.
Decel Rate = [Maximum Freq] / [Decel Time]
Values
Default:
10.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/600.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
119
Chapter 3

A444 [Accel Time 3]
A446 [Accel Time 4]
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases when selected by digital inputs.
Values
Default:
10.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/600.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
A445 [Decel Time 3]

A447 [Decel Time 4]
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases when selected by digital inputs.
Values
Default:
10.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/600.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
A448 [Skip Frequency 1]

Related Parameter(s): A449, A451, A453, A455

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Works in conjunction with A449, A451, A453 and A455 [Skip Freq Band x] creating a range of frequencies at which the drive does not operate continuously.
Values
Default:
0.0 Hz (Disabled)
Min/Max:
0.0/500.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
A449 [Skip Freq Band 1]

Related Parameter(s): A448, A450, A452, A454

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the band around A448, A450, A452 and A454 [Skip Frequency x].
Frequency
Command
Frequency
Drive Output
Frequency
2x Skip
Frequency Band
Skip Frequency
Time
Values
120
Default:
0.0 Hz
Min/Max:
0.0/30.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
Chapter 3

A456 [PID 1 Trim Hi]
A468 [PID 2 Trim Hi]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Scales the upper value of the trim frequency when trim is active.
Values
Default:
60.0 Hz
Min/Max:
0.0/500.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
A457 [PID 1 Trim Lo]

A469 [PID 2 Trim Lo]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Scales the lower value of the trim frequency when trim is active.
Values
Default:
0.0 Hz
Min/Max:
0.0/500.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
A458 [PID 1 Trim Sel]

A470 [PID 2 Trim Sel]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Sets the PID output as trim to the source reference.

Options
PID Trim is disabled.
1 TrimOn Pot
2 TrimOn Keypd
3 TrimOn DSI
4 TrimOn NetOp
5 TrimOn 0-10V
6 TrimOn 4-20
7 TrimOn Prset
8 TrimOn AnMlt(1)
9 TrimOn MOP
10 TrimOn Pulse
11 TrimOn Slgic(1)
12 TrimOn Encdr(1)
13 TrimOn ENet(1)
121
Chapter 3

A459 [PID 1 Ref Sel]
A471 [PID 2 Ref Sel]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Selects the source of the PID reference.

Options
0 PID Setpoint (Default)

1 Drive Pot
2 Keypad Freq
3 Serial/DSI
4 Network Opt
5 0-10V Input
6 4-20mA Input
7 Preset Freq
8 AnlgIn Multi(1)
9 MOP Freq
10 Pulse Input
11 Step Logic(1)
12 Encoder(1)
13 EtherNet/IP(1)
A460 [PID 1 Fdback Sel]

A472 [PID 2 Fdback Sel]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Selects the source of the PID feedback.

Options
0 0-10V Input (Default)
Note: PID does not function with bipolar input. Negative voltages are ignored and treated as zero.
1 4-20mA Input
2 Serial/DSI
3 Network Opt
4 Pulse Input
5 Encoder(1)
6 EtherNet/IP(1)
A461 [PID 1 Prop Gain]
A473 [PID 2 Prop Gain]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value for the PID proportional component when the PID mode is enabled.
Values
122
Default:
0.01
Min/Max:
0.00/99.99
Display:
0.01
Chapter 3

A462 [PID 1 Integ Time]
A474 [PID 2 Integ Time]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value for the PID integral component when PID mode is enabled.
Values
Default:
2.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/999.9 s
Display:
0.1 s
A463 [PID 1 Diff Rate]
A475 [PID 2 Diff Rate]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value (in 1/second) for the PID differential component when PID mode is enabled.
Values
Default:
0.00
Min/Max:
0.00/99.99
Display:
0.01
A464 [PID 1 Setpoint]
A476 [PID 2 Setpoint]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when PID mode is enabled.
Values
Default:
0.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
A465 [PID 1 Deadband]

A477 [PID 2 Deadband]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets a range, in percent above and below the PID Reference, that the PID output will ignore.
Values
Default:
0.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/10.0%
Display:
0.1%
A466 [PID 1 Preload]

A478 [PID 2 Preload]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable.
Values
Default:
0.0 Hz
Min/Max:
0.0/500.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
A467 [PID 1 Invert Err]

A479 [PID 2 Invert Err]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Changes the sign of the PID error.

Options
0 Normal (Default)
1 Inverted
123
Chapter 3

A481 [Process Disp Lo]
Related Parameter(s): b010, P043
Sets the value displayed in b010 [Process Display] when the drive is running at P043 [Minimum Freq].
Values
Default:
0.00
Min/Max:
0.00/99.99
Display:
0.01
A482 [Process Disp Hi]
Related Parameter(s): b010, P044
Sets the value displayed in b010 [Process Display] when the drive is running at P044 [Maximum Freq].
Values
Default:
0.00
Min/Max:
0.00/99.99
Display:
0.01
A483 [Testpoint Sel]

Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Values
Default:
400
Min/Max:
0/FFFF
Display:
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs.

Values
Default:
Drive Rated Amps x 1.1 (Normal Duty); Drive Rated Amps x 1.5 (Heavy Duty)
Min/Max:
0.0/Drive Rated Amps x 1.5 (Normal Duty); Drive Rated Amps x 1.8 (Heavy Duty)
Display:
0.1 A

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs.

Values
Default:
Drive Rated Amps x 1.1
Min/Max:
0.0/Drive Rated Amps x 1.5 (Normal Duty); Drive Rated Amps x 1.8 (Heavy Duty)
Display:
0.1 A

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value of current at which the shear pin fault occurs after the time set in A487, A489 [Shear Pin x Time]. Setting the value at 0.0 A disables this function.
Values
Default:
0.0 A (Disabled)
Min/Max:
Display:
0.1 A
A487 [Shear Pin 1 Time]
A489 [Shear Pin 2 Time]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the continuous time the drive must be at or above the value set in A486, A488 [Shear Pinx Level] before a shear pin fault occurs.
Values
124
Default:
0.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/30.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
Chapter 3

A490 [Load Loss Level]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Provides a software trip (Load Loss fault) when the current drops below this level for the time specified in A491 [Load Loss Time].
Values
Default:
0.0 A
Min/Max:
0.0/Drive Rated Amps
Display:
0.1 A
A491 [Load Loss Time]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the required time for the current to be below A490 [Load Loss Level] before a Load Loss fault occurs.
Values
Default:
0s
Min/Max:
0/9999 s
Display:
1s
A492 [Stall Fault Time]

Sets the time that the drive remains in stall mode before a fault is issued.
Options
0 60 Seconds (Default)
1 120 Seconds
2 240 Seconds
3 360 Seconds
4 480 Seconds
5 Flt Disabled
A493 [Motor OL Select]
Related Parameter(s): P032, P033
Drive provides Class 10 overload protection. Settings 0...2 select the derating factor for the I2t overload function.
Min Derate
80
60
40
20
0
Options
25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200

% of [Motor NP Hertz]
Max Derate
% of [Motor OL Curent]
100
No Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200

100
80
60
40
20
0
25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200

0 No Derate (Default)
1 Min. Derate
2 Max. Derate
A494 [Motor OL Ret]

Selects whether the motor overload counter is saved on power-down or reset on power-up.
Options
0 Reset (Default)
1 Save
125
Chapter 3

A495 [Drive OL Mode]
Determines how the drive handles overload conditions that would otherwise cause the drive to fault.
Options
0 Disabled
1 Reduce CLim
2 Reduce PWM
3 Both-PWM 1st (Default)
A496 [IR Voltage Drop]
Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator (autotune) for induction motor.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0.0/600.0VAC
Display:
0.1VAC
A497 [Flux Current Ref]
This is the current necessary for full motor flux. The value should be set to the full speed no-load current of the motor.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0.00/(Drive Rated Amps x 1.4)
Display:
0.01 A
A498 [Motor Rr]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Rotor resistance of induction motor. The value of this parameter will populate when a full rotate tune is performed.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0.00/655.35 ohm
Display:
0.01 ohm
A499 [Motor Lm]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Mutual Inductance of induction motor. The value of this parameter will populate when a full rotate tune is performed.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0.0/6553.5 mH
Display:
0.1 mH
A500 [Motor Lx]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Leakage Inductance of induction motor. The value of this parameter will populate when a full rotate tune is performed.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0.0/6553.5 mH
Display:
0.1 mH
A501 [PM IR Voltage]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Voltage across the stator resistance of the PM motor at the rated motor current displayed in line-to-line rms value.
Values
126
Default:
11.50V
Min/Max:
0.00/655.35V
Display:
0.01V
Chapter 3

A502 [PM IXd Voltage]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Voltage across the d-axis stator inductance of the PM motor at the rated motor current and the rated motor frequency displayed in line-to-line rms value.
Values
Default:
17.91V
Min/Max:
0.00/655.35V
Display:
0.01V
A503 [PM IXq Voltage]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Voltage across the q-axis stator inductance of the PM motor at the rated motor current and the rated motor frequency displayed in line-to-line rms value.
Values
Default:
53.21V
Min/Max:
0.00/655.35V
Display:
0.01V
A504 [PM BEMF Voltage]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Back electromotive force (EMF) voltage.
Values
Default:
1640.0 Drive Rated Volts
Min/Max:
0.0/6000.0 Drive Rated Volts
Display:
0.1V
A509 [Speed Reg Sel]

PF 525
Related Parameter(s): A521, A522, A523, A524, A525, A526
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines if PI gain of the Vector control mode speed regulator is set automatically or manually. Parameters A521...A526 are set automatically by this parameter.
Options
0 Automatic (Default)
1 Manual
A510 [Freq 1]
A512 [Freq 2]
A514 [Freq 3]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the Vector control mode frequency.

Values
Default:
Freq 1:
Freq 2:
Freq 3:
8.33%
15.00%
20.00%
Min/Max:
0.00/200.00%
Display:
0.01%
127
Chapter 3

A511 [Freq 1 BW]
A513 [Freq 2 BW]
A515 [Freq 3 BW]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Speed control loop bandwidth for Vector control mode.

Values
Default:
10 Hz
Min/Max:
0/40 Hz
Display:
1 Hz
A516 [PM Initial Sel]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

PM initial angle detect.
Options
0 Align (Default)
1 HFI
High Frequency Injection to detect initial angle.
2 Six Pulse
A517 [PM DC Inject Cur]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Maximum DC current in amps applied to the motor in order to reset the rotor position of a PM motor.
Values
Default:
30%
Min/Max:
0/300%
Display:
1%
A518 [PM Align Time]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Magnetic pole reorientation time.
Values
Default:
0.7 s
Min/Max:
0.0/60.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
A519 [PM HFI NS Cur]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

High Frequency Injection (HFI) North South Current to detect N/S Magnet.
Values
Default:
100%
Min/Max:
0/300%
Display:
1%
A520 [PM Bus Reg Kd]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Derivative gain for bus regulator.
Values
128
Default:
Min/Max:
0/500
Display:
Chapter 3

A521 [Freq 1 Kp]
A523 [Freq 2 Kp]
A525 [Freq 3 Kp]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets P-gain of Vector control mode when in frequency region 1, 2 or 3 for faster speed response during dynamic-state where motor is still accelerating. If A509 [Speed Reg Sel] is set
to 1 Manual, these parameters can be changed.
Values
Default:
100.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/500.0%
Display:
0.1%
A522 [Freq 1 Ki]

A524 [Freq 2 Ki]
A526 [Freq 3 Ki]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets I-gain of Vector control mode when in frequency region 1, 2 or 3 for faster speed response during steady-state where motor is at its rated speed. If A509 [Speed Reg Sel] is set to
1 Manual, these parameters can be changed.
Values
Default:
0.100 s
Min/Max:
0.000/10.000 s
Display:
0.001 s
A527 [PM FWKn 1 Kp]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

The gain to ensure good performance in field weakening region.
Values
Default:
250%
Min/Max:
0/2000%
Display:
1%
A528 [PM FWKn 2 Kp]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

The gain to ensure robustness under step load in weakening region.
Values
Default:
100%
Min/Max:
100/8000%
Display:
1%
129
Chapter 3

A529 [PM Control Cfg]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Control configuration for Feed Forward Decouple (FFD), Maximum Torque Per Amp (MTPA), and Load Disturbance Observer (LDOB).
FFD (Feed Forward Decouple)
Digit 1
MTPA (Maximum Torque Per Amp)
Digit 2
LDOB (Load Disturbance Observer)
Digit 3
Not Used
Not Used
Values
Default:
00111
Min/Max:
00000/00111
Display:
00000
A530 [Boost Select]
Related Parameter(s): b004, P031, P032, P039
Sets the boost voltage (% of P031 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the V/Hz curve. Only used for V/Hz control modes.
[Maximum Voltage] can be set anywhere.
If it is > [Motor NP Volts] then it defines a point on the V/Hz curve 100
1/2 [Motor NP Volts]
50
1/2
[Motor NP Hertz]
% [Motor NP Volts]
[Maximum Voltage] can be set anywhere.

If it is < [Motor NP Volts] then it functions as a limit only
(does not change the V/Hz curve)
Settings
5...14
0
4
3
2
1
50
100
[Maximum Freq] can be set anywhere.

If it is < [Motor NP Hertz] then it functions as a limit only
(does not change the V/Hz curve)
Options
% [Motor NP Hertz]
[Maximum Freq] can be set anywhere.
If it is > [Motor NP Hertz] then it defines a
point on the V/Hz curve
0 Custom V/Hz
1 30.0, VT
2 35.0, VT
3 40.0, VT
Fan/Pump Curves (Variable Torque)
4 45.0, VT
5 0.0, no IR
6 0.0
(Default for 400V and 600V
drives, 5 HP and above)
7 2.5, CT
(Default for 200V drives, 5 HP and
above)
8 5.0, CT
(Default for drives below 5 HP)
Boost Voltage (% of Base) (Constant Torque)
9 7.5, CT
10 10.0, CT
11 12.5, CT
12 15.0, CT
13 17.5, CT
14 20.0, CT
130
Chapter 3

A531 [Start Boost]
Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P039, A530
Sets the boost voltage (% of P031 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the V/Hz curve when A530 [Boost Select] = 0 Custom V/Hz and P039 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 V/Hz.
[Maximum Voltage]
[Break Voltage]
[Start Boost]
Voltage
[Motor NP Volts]
[Break Frequency]
[Minimum Freq]
Values
Frequency
[Motor NP Hertz]
[Maximum Freq]
Default:
2.5%
Min/Max:
0.0/25.0%
Display:
0.1%
A532 [Break Voltage]
Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P039, A530, A533
Sets the voltage (in percent of [Base Frequency]) at the A533 [Break Frequency] if A530 [Boost Select] is set to 0 Custom V/Hz.
Values
Default:
25.0%
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
A533 [Break Frequency]
Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P039, A530, A532
Sets the frequency where A532 [Break Voltage] is applied if A530 [Boost Select] is set to 0 Custom V/Hz.
Values
Default:
15.0 Hz
Min/Max:
0.0/500.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
A534 [Maximum Voltage]
Sets the highest voltage the drive outputs.

Values
Default:
Drive Rated Volts
Min:
10V AC (on 230V AC Drives); 20V AC (on 460V AC Drives); 25V AC (on 600V AC Drives)
Max:
255V AC (on 230V AC Drives); 510V AC (on 460V AC Drives); 637.5V AC (on 600V AC Drives)
Display:
1V AC
131
Chapter 3

A535 [Motor Fdbk Type]
Related Parameter(s):P039, A537
Selects the encoder type.(1)

ATTENTION: The loss of analog input, encoder or other feedback may cause unintended speed or motion. Take appropriate precautions to guard against
possible unintended speed or motion.
Allowable Control Modes (See P039 [Torque Perf Mode])
Options
Hardware Inputs
0 None (Default)
V/Hz, SVC, Economize, Vector, PM Control
1 Pulse Train
V/Hz, SVC, Economize, PM Control
[DigIn TermBlk 05] for PowerFlex 523

[DigIn TermBlk 07] for PowerFlex 525
2 Single Chan(2)
3 Single Check(2)
Quadrature(2)
5 Quad Check(2)
Optional incremental encoder card

(catalog number 25-ENC-1)
A536 [Encoder PPR]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Specifies the encoder Pulses Per Revolution (PPR) when an encoder is used.
To achieve speed range/accuracy for SVC and VVC closed loop control, a minimum of 1024 PPR encoder is recommended. The maximum encoder pulse is 250 kHz.
For more information, see Determine Encoder Pulse Per Revolution (PPR) Specification Based on Speed Resolution on page 217.
Values
Default:
1024 PPR
Min/Max:
1/20000 PPR
Display:
1 PPR
A537 [Pulse In Scale]
Related Parameter(s): t065, t067, A535
Sets the scale factor/gain for the Pulse Input when t065 [DigIn TermBlk 05] or t067 [DigIn TermBlk 07] is set to 52 Pulse Train, or A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] is set to 1 Pulse Train.
Input frequency (Hz) / Pulse in Scale = Output frequency (Hz)
Values
Default:
64
Min/Max:
0/20000
Display:
A538 [Ki Speed Loop]

Sets the I-gain used in the PI calculation of the speed loop when feedback is used. Applicable to V/Hz and SVC modes in closed loop control only.(1)
Values
Default:
2.0
Min/Max:
0.0/400.0
Display:
0.1
A539 [Kp Speed Loop]

Sets the P-gain used in the PI calculation of the speed loop when feedback is used. Applicable to V/Hz and SVC modes in closed loop control only.(1)
Values
Default:
5.0
Min/Max:
0.0/200.0
Display:
0.1
132
Chapter 3

A540 [Var PWM Disable]
Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform defined by A440 [PWM Frequency].
Options
0 Enabled (Default)
1 Disabled
A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries]
Sets the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart. See Chapter 4 for more information on faults and fault codes.
Clear a Type 1 fault and restart the drive.
1. Set A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than 0.
2. Set A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to a value other than 0.
Clear an OverVoltage, UnderVoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp fault without restarting the drive.
2. Set A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to 0.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without
considering applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines.
Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0/9
Display:
A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay]
Sets the time between restart attempts if A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is not zero.
Values
Default:
1.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/120.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
A543 [Start At PowerUp]

Enables/disables drive start on power up without a Run command being cycled. Requires a digital input configured for Run and a valid run signal.
Options
1 Enabled
A544 [Reverse Disable]
Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of motor rotation to be changed.
Options
0 Rev Enabled (Default)

1 Rev Disabled
A545 [Flying Start En]

Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM.
Options
1 Enabled
Catch and ramp to commanded speed at every drive start.
133
Chapter 3

A546 [FlyStrt CurLimit]
Used to determine when the drive has matched the motor frequency if flying start is enabled.
Values
Default:
150%
Min/Max:
30/200%
Display:
1%
A547 [Compensation]
Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability.
Options
0 Disabled
No compensation.
1 Electrical (Default)
Some drive/motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non-sinusodial motor currents.
This setting attempts to correct this condition
2 Mechanical
Some motor/load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator.
This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition.
3 Both
A548 [Power Loss Mode]
Sets the reaction to a loss of input power.
Options
0 Coast (Default)
Drive faults and motor coasts to a stop.
1 Decel
Drive decelerates and attempts to keep the DC bus voltage above the undervoltage level.
A549 [Half Bus Enable]

Enables/disables the power ride through function which allows the drive to maintain power to the motor at 50% drive input voltage during short-term power sag conditions.
ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage, a minimum line impedance must be provided to limit inrush current when the power line recovers. The input
impedance should be equal or greater than the equivalent of a 5% transformer with a VA rating 6 times the drive's input VA rating if Half Bus is enabled.
Options
1 Enabled
A550 [Bus Reg Enable]
Enables/disables the bus regulator.

Options
0 Disabled
1 Enabled (Default)
A551 [Fault Clear]

Resets a fault and clears the fault queue.

Options
1 Reset Fault
Resets the active fault but does not clear any fault buffer.
2 Clear Buffer
Resets the active fault and clears all fault buffers to 0.
A552 [Program Lock]
Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel with a 4-digit password.

Values
134
Default:
0000
Min/Max:
0000/9999
Display:
1111
Chapter 3

A553 [Program Lock Mod]
Determines the lock mode used in parameter A552 [Program Lock]. When set to 2 or 3, A552 [Program Lock] is added to the custom group to allow unlocking of parameters.
Options
0 Full Lock (Default)
All parameters are locked except [Program Lock].
1 Keypad Lock
All parameters are locked except [Program Lock] from keypad access but can still be accessed over communications.
2 Custom Only
All parameters are locked and hidden except custom group and [Program Lock].
3 KeyPd Custom
All parameters are locked and hidden except custom group and [Program Lock] from keypad access but can still be accessed over
communications.
A554 [Drv Ambient Sel]

Sets the maximum expected ambient of the drive when used above 50 C. When ambient temperature is above 50 C, the drive will apply necessary current derating.
Options
0 Normal (Default)
1 55C
2 60C
3 65C +Fan Kit
Fan kit required.
4 70C +Fan Kit

A555 [Reset Meters]
Related Parameter(s): b019, b021, b022, b023, b024,

b025, b026, d362, d363
Resets the values stored in the parameters that track fault times and energy usage.
Options
1 Reset Meters
Resets kWh, MWh, Accum kWh, Cost, and CO2 Sav parameter values.
2 Reset Time
Resets min, hr, and x10 hr.
A556 [Text Scroll]

Sets the scrolling speed of the text in the LCD display.
Options
0 Off
No scroll.
1 Low Speed
2 Mid Speed (Default)
3 High Speed
A557 [Out Phas Loss En]
Enable/disable output phase loss detection.
Options
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
A558 [Positioning Mode]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Defines the positioning transition mode used for the position steps.
Options
0 Time Steps (Default)
Steps based on time.
1 Preset Input
Preset inputs directly commands a given step.
2 Step Logic
Use Step Logic Commands. Always start from Step 0.
3 Preset StpL
Use Preset Inputs to determine starting step then Step Logic commands.
4 StpLogic-Lst
Use Step Logic commands from last Step Logic step at last drive stop.
135
Chapter 3

A559 [Counts Per Unit]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the number of encoder counts equal to one user-defined unit.

Values
Default:
4096
Min/Max:
1/32000
Display:
A560 [Enh Control Word]

PF 525
Related Parameter(s): t062, t063, t065 - t068, A571
PowerFlex 525 only.
Allows control of positioning and other functions through parameter control for use over comms. The functions replicate the digital input options and function in the same way.
Home Limit
Find Home
Hold Step
Pos Redefine
Sync Enable
Traverse Dis
Logic In 1
Logic In 2
Not Used
Values
Digits
1 = Input Present, 0 = Input Not Present

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 6
Digit 7
Digit 8
Default:
0000 0000
Min/Max:
0000 0000/1111 1111
Display:
0000 0000
0 Home Limit
In Positioning mode, this indicates the drive is at the home position
1 Find Home
When set, the next start command causes the drive to find home. Set this bit to 0 after completing the homing routine.
2 Hold Step
In Positioning mode, this input over-rides other inputs and causes the drive to remain at its current step (running at zero speed
once it reaches its position) until released.
3 Pos Redefine
In Positioning mode, this input resets the home position to the current position of the machine. Set this bit to 0 after completing
the homing routine.
4 Sync Enable
Must be used in order to hold the existing frequency when Sync Time is set to enable speed synchronization. When this bit is reset
to zero the drive accelerates to the new commanded frequency based on A571 [Sync Time] setting.
5 Traverse Dis
When set the traverse function is disabled.
6 Logic In 1
This provides an identical function as the Logic In1 Digital Input option. This bit is logically ORed with a digital input t062, t063,
t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] set to 24 Logic In1. It can be used to move through the Step-Logic functions (speed or position)
using comms control without requiring actual digital input transitions.
7 Logic In 2
This provides and identical function as the Logic In2 Digital Input option. This bit is logically ORed with a digital input t062, t063,
t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] set to 25 Logic In2. It can be used to move through the Step-Logic functions (speed or position)
using comms control without requiring actual digital input transitions.
A561 [Home Save]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines whether the current position is saved on power down.

Options
0 Home Reset (Default)
Position resets to zero on power up.
1 Home Saved
136
Chapter 3

A562 [Find Home Freq]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the maximum frequency the drive uses when Find Home is issued.
Values
Default:
10.0 Hz
Min/Max:
0.1/500.0 Hz
Display:
0.1 Hz
A563 [Find Home Dir]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the direction the drive commands when Find Home is issued.
Options
0 Forward (Default)
1 Reverse
A564 [Encoder Pos Tol]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the At Position and the At Home tolerance around the encoder count. The value is added to and subtracted from the target encoder unit value to create the tolerance range.
Values
Default:
100
Min/Max:
1/50000
Display:
A565 [Pos Reg Filter]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the error signal filter in the position regulator.

Values
Default:
Min/Max:
0/15
Display:
A566 [Pos Reg Gain]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the gain adjustment for the position regulator.

Values
Default:
3.0
Min/Max:
0.0/200.0
Display:
0.1
137
Chapter 3

A567 [Max Traverse]
Sets the amplitude of triangle wave speed modulation.
[P Jump]
[Max Traverse]
Hertz
[Output Freq]
Traverse Bit
[Fiber Status]
Traverse Enable Bit
Seconds
Values
Default:
0.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/300.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
A568 [Traverse Inc]
Sets the time required for the Traverse function to accelerate from the minimum to the maximum traverse frequency. See the diagram at A567 [Max Traverse].
Values
Default:
0.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/300.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
A569 [Traverse Dec]
Sets the time required for the Traverse function to decelerate from the maximum to the minimum traverse frequency. See the diagram at A567 [Max Traverse].
Values
Default:
0.00 s
Min/Max:
0.00/300.00 s
Display:
0.01 s
A570 [P Jump]
Sets the frequency amplitude that is added to or subtracted from the commanded frequency. See the diagram at A567 [Max Traverse].
Values
Default:
0.00 Hz
Min/Max:
0.00/300.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
A571 [Sync Time]
Related Parameter(s): t062, t063, t065 - t068, A560
Enables the function that holds the drive at the current frequency even if the commanded frequency changes. Used with t062, t063, t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] 32 Sync Enable.
Hertz
[Sync Time]
New Drive #2 Reference

New Drive #1 Reference
Speed Sync Bit

Change Ref's
[Fiber Status]
Drive #1 and #2 Sync Enable Input
Time
Values
138
Default:
0.0 s
Min/Max:
0.0/3200.0 s
Display:
0.1 s
Chapter 3

A572 [Speed Ratio]
Scales the drive speed command.

Values
Default:
1.00
Min/Max:
0.01/99.99
Display:
0.01
A573 [Mtr Options Cfg]

Sets the configuration of the motor option.
Jerk Select
ZeroSpd Slip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Values
1 = Enabled, 0 = Disabled
Digit 1
Digit 2
Default:
11
Min/Max:
00/11
Display:
00
Options
Jerk Select
ZeroSpd Slip
Description
Limits the rate of change to the velocity reference for improved current limiting. Set to
0 Disabled for positioning type applications with fast Accel or Decel times.
Sets slip compensation to 0.0 Hz when the following conditions are met:
Commanded speed = 0.00 Hz
Status of drive = At speed
ZeroSpd Slip = 1 Enabled
A574 [RdyBit Mode Cfg]

Determines which Stop conditions causes the drives Ready bit (Network Logic Status bit 1) to go low (0). A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Ready Bit Status(2)
Stop Conditions
Standard
Drive fault
0
Stop digital input terminal 01/11 open
1
Holding down the drives keypad or the Remote DSI HIM Stop button
1
Stop commanded through Comms (Stop bit = 1)
1
Software (SW) Enable digital input terminal open
1
Safe-Torque-Off (STO) condition with value of t105 [Safety Open En] set to 1 FaultDisabled(1) 0
Enhanced
0
0
0
0
0
0
(1) Condition is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.

(2) 1 = Active, 0 = Inactive
Options
0 Standard (Default)
1 Enhanced
A575 [Flux Braking En]

Enables/disables flux braking.
Options
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
139
Chapter 3

A576 [Phase Loss Level]
Output Phase Loss Level. Sets the threshold level which is used to determine an output phase loss condition.
Each motor phase must exceed this value. Decreasing this parameter's value lowers sensitivity.
Values
Default:
25.0% for Induction motor; 4.0% for PM motor
Min/Max:
0.0/100.0%
Display:
0.1%
A580 [Current Loop BW]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Current loop bandwidth (0 = Automatically calculate the control gain of current loop).
Values
Default:
0 Hz
Min/Max:
0/65535 Hz
Display:
1 Hz
A581 [PM Stable 1 Freq]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

The start frequency for stabilization loop (P032 [Motor NP Hertz] x A581 [PM Stable 1 Freq]).
Values
Default:
0%
Min/Max:
0/100%
Display:
1%
A582 [PM Stable 2 Freq]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Stabilization function will return to normal output after this frequency (P032 [Motor NP Hertz] x A582 [PM Stable 2 Freq]).
Values
Default:
45%
Min/Max:
0/100%
Display:
1%
A583 [PM Stable 1 Kp]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Percentage of the gain for stabilization loop. The gain is set in A584 [PM Stable 2 Kp].
Values
Default:
40%
Min/Max:
0/100%
Display:
1%
A584 [PM Stable 2 Kp]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

The gain for stabilization loop.
Values
140
Default:
250%
Min/Max:
0/2000%
Display:
1%
Chapter 3

A585 [PM Stable Brk Pt]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Percentage of rated power P037 [Motor NP Power] for the gain of (A584 [PM Stable 2 Kp] x A583 [PM Stable 1 Kp]).
Values
Default:
40%
Min/Max:
0/100%
Display:
1%
A586 [PM Stepload Kp]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

The gain to ensure robustness under step load in low speed region.
Values
Default:
0%
Min/Max:
0/1000%
Display:
1%
A587 [PM 1 Efficiency]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Reduce full load current.
Values
Default:
120%
Min/Max:
0/2000%
Display:
1%
A588 [PM 2 Efficiency]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Reduce no load current.
Values
Default:
500%
Min/Max:
0/2000%
Display:
1%
A589 [PM Algor Sel]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.

Selects the algorithm to use with your motor. Check with the manufacturer of your motor to determine whether it is an iPM or sPM motor.
Options
0 Algorithm 1 (Default)
Suggested for most motors.
1 Algorithm 2
Enable an embedded algorithm to reduce oscillation in output waveform (use with sPM motor only, do not enable for iPM motor).
Network Parameter Group
This group contains parameters for the network option card that is installed.
Refer to the network option cards user manual for more information on the
available parameters.
141
Chapter 3
This group contains parameters that have their values changed from the factory
default.
Modified Parameter Group
When a parameter has its default value changed, it is automatically added to this
group. When a parameter has its value changed back to the factory default, it is
automatically removed from this group.
Fault and Diagnostic Group

F604
F605
F606
F607
F608
F609
F610
[Fault 4 Code]
[Fault 5 Code]
[Fault 6 Code]
[Fault 7 Code]
[Fault 8 Code]
[Fault 9 Code]
[Fault10 Code]
Related Parameter(s): b007-b009
A code that represents a drive fault. The codes appear in these parameters in the order they occur (b007 [Fault 1 Code] = the most recent fault). Repetitive faults are only recorded once.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
F0/F127
Display:
F0
F611 [Fault 1 Time-hr]



F620 [Fault10 Time-hr]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the value of d362 [Elapsed Time-hr] when the fault occurs.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/32767 hr
Display:
1 hr
F621 [Fault 1 Time-min]


F626 [Fault 6 Time-min] F627 [Fault 7 Time-min]

F628 [Fault 8 Time-min] F629 [Fault 9 Time-min]
F630 [Fault10 Time-min]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the value of d363 [Elapsed Time-min] when the fault occurs.
Values
142
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.0/320.0 min
Display:
0.1 min
Chapter 3
Fault and Diagnostic Group (continued)

F631 [Fault 1 Freq]
F633 [Fault 3 Freq]
F635 [Fault 5 Freq]
F632 [Fault 2 Freq]

F634 [Fault 4 Freq]
F636 [Fault 6 Freq]

F638 [Fault 8 Freq]
F640 [Fault10 Freq]
F637 [Fault 7 Freq]

F639 [Fault 9 Freq]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays and stores the value of b001 [Output Freq] with the most recent 10 faults occurred.
[Fault 1 Freq] stores the most recent fault, [Fault 2 Freq] stores the second most recent fault and [Fault 3 Freq] stores the third most recent fault.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
F641 [Fault 1 Current]



F650 [Fault10 Current]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays and stores the value of b003 [Output Current] with the most recent 10 faults occurred.
[Fault 1 Current] stores the most recent fault, [Fault 2 Current] stores the second most recent fault and [Fault 3 Current] stores the third most recent fault.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
Display:
0.01 A
F651 [Fault 1 BusVolts]



F660 [Fault10 BusVolts]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays and stores the value of b005 [DC Bus Voltage] with the most recent 10 faults occurred.
[Fault 1 BusVolts] stores the most recent fault, [Fault2 BusVolts] stores the second most recent fault and [Fault 3 BusVolts] stores the third most recent fault.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/1200VDC
Display:
1VDC
143
Chapter 3

F661 [Status @ Fault 1]


F670 [Status @ Fault10]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the value of b006 [Drive Status] with the most recent 10 faults occurred.
[Status@ Fault 1] stores the most recent fault, [Status@ Fault 2] stores the second most recent fault and [Status@ Fault 3] stores the third most recent fault.
Running
Forward
Accelerating
Decelerating
SafetyActive(1)
(1)

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/0x1F
Display:
F681 [Comm Sts - DSI]

Displays the status of the RS485 serial (DSI) port to the drive.
Rx
Tx
Status
Error
Not Used

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 3 (Connection Status)

0 Not Active
1 Modbus slave network (external Modbus master)
2 Modbus multi-drive w/ internal com option master
3 Modbus multi-drive w/ embedded com master(1)
4 DSI peripheral connected
5...8 Reserved
9 RS-485 network faulted
(1)
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0000/1911
Display:
0000
F682 [Comm Sts - Opt]

Displays the status of the internal communication to the drive.
Rx
Tx
Status
Error
Not Used
Values
144

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0000/1911
Display:
0000
Digit 3 = Internal Com option

0 Not Active (no connection)
1 Internal option connected/active
2...8 Reserved
9 Internal com option faulted
Chapter 3

F683 [Com Sts-Emb Enet]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the status of the embedded EtherNet/IP interface to the drive.
Rx
Tx
Status
Error
Not Used
Values
Default:

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 3 = Embedded EtherNet/IP

0 Not Active (no connection)
1 Embedded EtherNet/IP active
2-8 Reserved
9 Embedded EtherNet/IP faulted
Read Only
Min/Max:
0000/1911
Display:
0000
F684 [EN Addr Src]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the actual source of the Ethernet configuration (IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address).
Options
1 Parameters
Read Only
2 BOOTP
F685 [EN Rate Act]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the network data rate currently used by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Options
0 No Link
Read Only
1 10Mbps Full
2 10Mbps Half
3 100Mbps Full
4 100Mbps Half
5 Dup IP Addr
6 Disabled
F686 [DSI I/O Act]
Displays the Drives that are active in Multi-Drive mode.
Drive 0 Actv
Drive 1 Actv
Drive 2 Actv
Drive 3 Actv
Drive 4 Actv
Value
1 = Drive Active, 0 = Drive Inactive

Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
00000/11111
Display:
00000
145
Chapter 3

F687
F688
F689
F690
F691
F692
PF 525
[HW Addr 1]
[HW Addr 2]
[HW Addr 3]
[HW Addr 4]
[HW Addr 5]
[HW Addr 6]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Shows the MAC address for the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.

Values
F693
F694
F695
F696
PF 525
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/255
Display:
[EN IP Addr Act 1]

[EN IP Addr Act 2]
[EN IP Addr Act 3]
[EN IP Addr Act 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Shows the actual IP address used by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface at the time. This indicates 0 if no address is set.
255.255.255.255
[EN IP Addr Act 1]
[EN IP Addr Act 2]
[EN IP Addr Act 3]
[EN IP Addr Act 4]
Values
F697
F698
F699
F700
PF 525
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/255
Display:
[EN Subnet Act 1]

[EN Subnet Act 2]
[EN Subnet Act 3]
[EN Subnet Act 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Shows the actual subnet mask used by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface at the time. This will indicate 0 if no address is set.
255.255.255.255
[EN Subnet Act 1]
[EN Subnet Act 2]
[EN Subnet Act 3]
[EN Subnet Act 4]
Values
146
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/255
Display:
Chapter 3

F701
F702
F703
F704
PF 525
[EN Gateway Act 1]

[EN Gateway Act 2]
[EN Gateway Act 3]
[EN Gateway Act 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Shows the actual gateway address used by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface at the time. This will indicate 0 if no address is set.
255.255.255.255
[EN Gateway Act 1]
[EN Gateway Act 2]
[EN Gateway Act 3]
[EN Gateway Act 4]
Values
F705
F709
F713
F717
F721
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/255
Display:
[Drv 0 Logic Cmd]

[Drv 1 Logic Cmd]
[Drv 2 Logic Cmd]
[Drv 3 Logic Cmd]
[Drv 4 Logic Cmd]
In multi-drive mode, this is the logic command being transmitted to drive 0/1/2/3/4/.
In single-drive mode, this is the logic command being used by the drive (whether HS-DSI, EtherNet/IP, or DSI) at the time. If comms control is NOT being used, and the drive is in singledrive mode, then this parameter will show 0.
Values
F706
F710
F714
F718
F722
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/FFFF
Display:
[Drv 0 Reference]
[Drv 1 Reference]
[Drv 2 Reference]
[Drv 3 Reference]
[Drv 4 Reference]
In multi-drive mode, this is the reference being transmitted to drive 0/1/2/3/4.

In single-drive mode, this is the reference being used by the drive (whether HS-DSI, EtherNet/IP, or DSI) at the time. If comms control is NOT being used, and the drive is in single-drive
mode, then this parameter will show 0.
Values
F707
F711
F715
F719
F723
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
[Drv 0 Logic Sts]

[Drv 1 Logic Sts]
[Drv 2 Logic Sts]
[Drv 3 Logic Sts]
[Drv 4 Logic Sts]
In multi-drive mode, this is the logic status being received from drive 0/1/2/3/4.
In single-drive mode, this is the logic status of the drive at the time.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/FFFF
Display:
147
Chapter 3

F708
F712
F716
F720
F724
[Drv 0 Feedback]
[Drv 1 Feedback]
[Drv 2 Feedback]
[Drv 3 Feedback]
[Drv 4 Feedback]
In multi-drive mode, this is the feedback being received from drive 0/1/2/3/4.
In single-drive mode, this is the feedback of the drive at the time.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0.00/500.00 Hz
Display:
0.01 Hz
F725 [EN Rx Overruns]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of receive overrun errors reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
F726 [EN Rx Packets]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of receive packets reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
F727 [EN Rx Errors]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of receive errors reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
F728 [EN Tx Packets]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of transmitted packets reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
F729 [EN Tx Errors]

PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of transmit errors reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Values
148
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
Chapter 3

F730 [EN Missed IO Pkt]
PF 525
PowerFlex 525 only.
The number of I/O packets missed.

Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
F731 [DSI Errors]

The number of total DSI errors.
Values
Default:
Read Only
Min/Max:
0/65535
Display:
149
Chapter 3
AppView parameter groups provide a simple starting point for using the
PowerFlex 520-series drives by grouping certain commonly used parameters
based on different types of applications. Use these parameter groups to quickly
and easily setup the PowerFlex 520-series drive for your application.
AppView parameter groups are available for the following applications:
Conveyor
Mixer
Compressor
Centrifugal Pump
Blower/Fan
Extruder
Positioning (PowerFlex 525 only)
Textile/Fiber
You cannot add or remove parameters to or from the AppView parameter groups.
If you require quick access to additional parameters to what is already included in
the different AppView parameter groups, use the CustomView parameter group
instead.
The parameters in the AppView parameter groups can be quickly added to the
CustomView parameter group by doing the following:
Step
1. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to
an AppView group (G1...G8).
Key(s)
2. Press Enter or Sel to enter a group. The right

most digit of the last viewed parameter in that
group will flash.
150
Example Displays
or
or Sel

the command G1->GC.
or
4. Press Enter or Sel to add all the parameters in

this AppView group to the CustomView group.
The LCD display will show a confirmation.
or Sel
FWD
FWD
FWD
CustomView Parameter
Group
Chapter 3
CustomView allows you to quickly access only the parameters needed for your
application by storing them in a custom parameter group. Add your frequently
used parameters to this group, then hide all other parameters with A552
[Program Lock] to simplify your drive configuration process.
Up to 100 parameters can be stored in the CustomView parameter group. You
can copy one entire AppView parameter group to the CustomView parameter
group as shown on page 150 or add individual parameters as show below.
Step
the CustomView group (GC).
Key(s)
Example Displays
or
FWD
2. Press Enter to view the parameters that can be

added to the CustomView group.
FWD

through the list of parameters.
or
FWD
PROGRAM
4. Press Enter to add the parameter to the

CustomView group. The LCD display will show a
confirmation.
To delete parameters from the CustomView parameter group:

Step
the CustomView group (GC).
Key(s)
Example Displays
or
2. Press Enter to view the parameters that are in

the CustomView group.

the command GC---.
FWD
FWD
or
4. Press Enter or Sel to view the parameters that

are stored in the CustomView group.
FWD
FWD
or Sel

through the list of parameters.
or
FWD
PROGRAM
6. Press Enter to delete the parameter from the

CustomView group. The LCD display will show a
confirmation.
TIP
The Connected Components Workbench software can be used to speed up this

process with drag and drop functionality.
151
Chapter 3
Parameter Cross Reference by Name

Parameter Name
10V Bipolar Enbl(1)
2-Wire Mode
Accel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Accel Time 3
Accel Time 4
Accum CO2 Sav
Accum Cost Sav
Accum kWh Sav
Analog In 0-10V
Analog In 4-20mA
Analog In Filter
Analog Out High(2)
Analog Out Sel(2)
Anlg In 0-10V Hi
Anlg In 0-10V Lo
Anlg In mA Loss
Anlg In V Loss
Anlg In4-20mA Hi
Anlg In4-20mA Lo
Anlg Loss Delay
Anlg Out Setpt(2)
Auto Rstrt Delay
Auto Rstrt Tries
Autotune
Average kWh Cost
Average Power
Boost Select
Break Frequency
Break Voltage
Bus Reg Enable
Cmd Stat Select(1)
Com Sts-Emb Enet(1)
Comm Loss Action
Comm Loss Time
Comm Sts - DSI
Comm Sts - Opt
Comm Write Mode
Commanded Freq
Compensation
Contrl In Status
Control Source
Control SW Ver
Control Temp
Counter Status
Counts Per Unit(1)
Current Limit 1
Current Limit 2(1)
152
No.
093
064
041
442
444
446
026
025
024
360
361
099
089
088
092
091
097
094
096
095
098
090
542
541
040
052
020
530
533
532
550
122
683
125
126
681
682
121
002
547
013
012
029
028
364
559
484
485
Parameter Name
Current Loop BW(1)(3)
DB Resistor Sel
DB Threshold
DC Brake Level
DC Brake Time
DC Brk Time@Strt
DC Bus Ripple
DC Bus Voltage
Decel Time 1
Decel Time 2
Decel Time 3
Decel Time 4
Dig In Status
Dig Out Status(2)(3)
DigIn TermBlk 02
DigIn TermBlk 03
DigIn TermBlk 05
DigIn TermBlk 06
DigIn TermBlk 07(1)
DigIn TermBlk 08(1)
Drive OL Mode
Drive Status
Drive Status 2(2)(3)
Drive Temp
Drive Type
Droop Hertz@ FLA(1)
Drv 0 Feedback
Drv 0 Logic Cmd
Drv 0 Logic Sts
Drv 0 Reference
Drv 1 Addr
Drv 1 Feedback
Drv 1 Logic Cmd
Drv 1 Logic Sts
Drv 1 Reference
Drv 2 Addr
Drv 2 Feedback
Drv 2 Logic Cmd
Drv 2 Logic Sts
Drv 2 Reference
Drv 3 Addr
Drv 3 Feedback
Drv 3 Logic Cmd
Drv 3 Logic Sts
Drv 3 Reference
Drv 4 Addr
Drv 4 Feedback
Drv 4 Logic Cmd
No.
580
437
438
435
434
436
380
005
042
443
445
447
014
394
062
063
065
066
067
068
495
006
393
027
367
441
708
705
707
706
171
712
709
711
710
172
716
713
715
714
173
720
717
719
718
174
724
721
Parameter Name
Drv 4 Logic Sts
Drv 4 Reference
Drv Ambient Sel
DSI Errors
DSI I/O Act
DSI I/O Cfg
Elapsed kWh
Elapsed MWh
Elapsed Run Time
Elapsed Time-hr
Elapsed Time-min
EM Brk Off Delay
EM Brk On Delay
EN Addr Sel(1)
EN Addr Src(1)
EN Comm Flt Actn(1)
EN Data In 1(1)
EN Data In 2(1)
EN Data In 3(1)
EN Data In 4(1)
EN Data Out 1(1)
EN Data Out 2(1)
EN Data Out 3(1)
EN Data Out 4(1)
EN Flt Cfg DL 1(1)
EN Flt Cfg DL 2(1)
EN Flt Cfg DL 3(1)
EN Flt Cfg DL 4(1)
EN Flt Cfg Logic(1)
EN Flt Cfg Ref(1)
EN Gateway Act 1(1)
EN Gateway Act 2(1)
EN Gateway Act 3(1)
EN Gateway Act 4(1)
EN Gateway Cfg 1(1)
EN Gateway Cfg 2(1)
EN Gateway Cfg 3(1)
EN Gateway Cfg 4(1)
EN Idle Flt Actn(1)
EN IP Addr Act 1(1)
EN IP Addr Act 2(1)
EN IP Addr Act 3(1)
EN IP Addr Act 4(1)
EN IP Addr Cfg 1(1)
EN IP Addr Cfg 2(1)
EN IP Addr Cfg 3(1)
EN IP Addr Cfg 4(1)
EN Missed IO Pkt(1)
No.
723
722
554
731
686
175
021
022
019
362
363
086
087
128
684
143
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
147
148
149
150
145
146
701
702
703
704
137
138
139
140
144
693
694
695
696
129
130
131
132
730
Parameter Name
EN Rate Act(1)
EN Rate Cfg(1)
EN Rx Errors(1)
EN Rx Overruns(1)
EN Rx Packets(1)
EN Subnet Act 1(1)
EN Subnet Act 2(1)
EN Subnet Act 3(1)
EN Subnet Act 4(1)
EN Subnet Cfg 1(1)
EN Subnet Cfg 2(1)
EN Subnet Cfg 3(1)
EN Subnet Cfg 4(1)
EN Tx Errors(1)
EN Tx Packets(1)
Encoder Pos Tol(1)
Encoder PPR(1)
Encoder Speed(2)
Energy Saved
Enh Control Word(1)
Fault 1 BusVolts
Fault 1 Code
Fault 1 Current
Fault 1 Freq
Fault 1 Time-hr
Fault 1 Time-min
Fault 2 BusVolts
Fault 2 Code
Fault 2 Current
Fault 2 Freq
Fault 2 Time-hr
Fault 2 Time-min
Fault 3 BusVolts
Fault 3 Code
Fault 3 Current
Fault 3 Freq
Fault 3 Time-hr
Fault 3 Time-min
Fault 4 BusVolts
Fault 4 Code
Fault 4 Current
Fault 4 Freq
Fault 4 Time-hr
Fault 4 Time-min
Fault 5 BusVolts
Fault 5 Code
Fault 5 Current
Fault 5 Freq
Fault 5 Time-hr
Fault 5 Time-min
No.
685
141
727
725
726
697
698
699
700
133
134
135
136
729
728
564
536
378
023
560
651
007
641
631
611
621
652
008
642
632
612
622
653
009
643
633
613
623
654
604
644
634
614
624
655
605
645
635
615
625
Parameter Name
Fault 6 BusVolts(1)
Fault 6 Code(1)
Fault 6 Current(1)
Fault 6 Freq(1)
Fault 6 Time-hr(1)
Fault 6 Time-min(1)
Fault 7 BusVolts(1)
Fault 7 Code(1)
Fault 7 Current(1)
Fault 7 Freq(1)
Fault 7 Time-hr(1)
Fault 7 Time-min(1)
Fault 8 BusVolts(1)
Fault 8 Code(1)
Fault 8 Current(1)
Fault 8 Freq(1)
Fault 8 Time-hr(1)
Fault 8 Time-min(1)
Fault 9 BusVolts(1)
Fault 9 Code(1)
Fault 9 Current(1)
Fault 9 Freq(1)
Fault 9 Time-hr(1)
Fault 9 Time-min(1)
Fault Clear
Fault10 BusVolts(1)
Fault10 Code(1)
Fault10 Current(1)
Fault10 Freq(1)
Fault10 Time-hr(1)
Fault10 Time-min(1)
Fiber Status
Find Home Dir(1)
Find Home Freq(1)
Flux Braking En(2)(3)
Flux Current Ref
Flying Start En
FlyStrt CurLimit
Freq 1(1)
Freq 1 BW(1)
Freq 1 Ki(1)
Freq 1 Kp(1)
Freq 2(1)
Freq 2 BW(1)
Freq 2 Ki(1)
Freq 2 Kp(1)
Freq 3(1)
Freq 3 BW(1)
Freq 3 Ki(1)
Freq 3 Kp(1)
No.
656
606
646
636
616
626
657
607
647
637
617
627
658
608
648
638
618
628
659
609
649
639
619
629
551
660
610
650
640
620
630
390
563
562
575
497
545
546
510
511
522
521
512
513
524
523
514
515
526
525
Parameter Name
Half Bus Enable
Home Save(1)
HW Addr 1(1)
HW Addr 2(1)
HW Addr 3(1)
HW Addr 4(1)
HW Addr 5(1)
HW Addr 6(1)
IR Voltage Drop
Jog Accel/Decel
Jog Frequency
Keypad Freq
Ki Speed Loop(2)
Kp Speed Loop(2)
Language
Load Loss Level(1)
Load Loss Time(1)
Max Traverse
Maximum Freq
Maximum Voltage
Minimum Freq
MOP Freq
MOP Preload
MOP Reset Sel
MOP Time
Motor Fdbk Type(2)
Motor Lm(1)
Motor Lx(1)
Motor NP FLA
Motor NP Hertz
Motor NP Poles
Motor NP Power(1)
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Volts
Motor OL Current
Motor OL Level
Motor OL Ret
Motor OL Select
Motor Rr(1)
Mtr Options Cfg(2)(5)
MultiDrv Sel
Opt Data In 1
Opt Data In 2
Opt Data In 3
Opt Data In 4
Opt Data Out 1
Opt Data Out 2
Opt Data Out 3
Opt Data Out 4
Opto Out Logic(1)
Chapter 3
No.
549
561
687
688
689
690
691
692
496
432
431
426
538
539
30
490
491
567
044
534
043
427
429
428
430
535
499
500
034
032
035
037
036
031
033
369
494
493
498
573
169
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
075
153
Chapter 3
Parameter Name
Opto Out1 Level(1)
Opto Out1 Sel(1)
Opto Out2 Level(1)
Opto Out2 Sel(1)
Out Phas Loss En
Output Current
Output Freq
Output Power
Output Powr Fctr
Output RPM
Output Speed
Output Voltage
P Jump
Phase Loss Level(2)(3)
PID 1 Deadband
PID 1 Diff Rate
PID 1 Fdback Sel
PID 1 Integ Time
PID 1 Invert Err
PID 1 Preload
PID 1 Prop Gain
PID 1 Ref Sel
PID 1 Setpoint
PID 1 Trim Hi
PID 1 Trim Lo
PID 1 Trim Sel
PID1 Fdbk Displ
PID1 Setpnt Disp
PID 2 Deadband(1)
PID 2 Diff Rate(1)
PID 2 Fdback Sel(1)
PID 2 Integ Time(1)
PID 2 Invert Err(1)
PID 2 Preload(1)
PID 2 Prop Gain(1)
PID 2 Ref Sel(1)
PID 2 Setpoint(1)
PID 2 Trim Hi(1)
PID 2 Trim Lo(1)
PID 2 Trim Sel(1)
PID2 Fdbk Displ(1)
PID2 Setpnt Disp(1)
PM Algor Sel(1)(3)
PM Align Time(1)(3)
PM BEMF Voltage(1)(3)
PM Bus Reg Kd(1)(3)
PM Control Cfg(1)(3)
PM DC Inject Cur(1)(3)
154
No.
070
069
073
072
557
003
001
017
381
015
016
004
570
576
465
463
460
462
467
466
461
459
464
456
457
458
383
384
477
475
472
474
479
478
473
471
476
468
469
470
385
386
587
588
589
518
504
520
529
517
Parameter Name
PM FWKn 1 Kp(1)(3)
PM FWKn 2 Kp(1)(3)
PM HIFI NS Cur(1)(3)
PM Initial Sel(1)(3)
PM IR Voltage(1)(3)
PM IXd Voltage(1)(3)
PM IXq Voltage(1)(3)
PM Stable Brk Pt(1)(3)
PM Stepload Kp(1)(3)
Pos Reg Filter(1)
Pos Reg Gain(1)
Position Status(1)
Positioning Mode(1)
Power Loss Mode
Power Saved
Preset Freq 0
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Preset Freq 8(1)
Preset Freq 9(1)
Preset Freq 10(1)
Preset Freq 11(1)
Preset Freq 12(1)
Preset Freq 13(1)
Preset Freq 14(1)
Preset Freq 15(1)
Process Disp Hi
Process Disp Lo
Process Display
Program Lock
Program Lock Mod
Pulse In Scale
Purge Frequency
PWM Frequency
RdyBit Mode Act(2)(4)
RdyBit Mode Cfg(2)(4)
Relay 1 Off Time
Relay 1 On Time
Relay Out1 Level
Relay Out1 Sel
Relay 2 Off Time(1)
No.
527
528
519
516
501
502
503
581
583
582
584
585
586
565
566
387
558
548
018
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
482
481
010
552
553
537
433
440
392
574
080
079
077
076
085
Parameter Name
Relay 2 On Time(1)
Relay Out2 Level(1)
Relay Out2 Sel(1)
Reset Meters
Reset to Defalts
Reverse Disable
RS485 Data Rate
RS485 Format
RS485 Node Addr
S Curve %
Safety Open En(1)
SafetyFlt RstCfg(1)(3)
Shear Pin 1 Time
Shear Pin1 Level
Shear Pin 2 Time(1)
Shear Pin2 Level(1)
Skip Freq Band 1
Skip Freq Band 2
Skip Freq Band 3(1)
Skip Freq Band 4(1)
Skip Frequency 1
Skip Frequency 2
Skip Frequency 3(1)
Skip Frequency 4(1)
Sleep Level
Sleep Time
Sleep-Wake Sel
Slip Hz Meter
Speed Feedback
Speed Ratio
Speed Reference1
Speed Reference2
Speed Reference3
Speed Reg Sel(1)
Stall Fault Time
Start At PowerUp
Start Boost
Start Source 1
Start Source 2
Start Source 3
Status @ Fault 1
Status @ Fault 2
Status @ Fault 3
Status @ Fault 4
Status @ Fault 5
Status @ Fault 6(1)
Status @ Fault 7(1)
Status @ Fault 8(1)
Status @ Fault 9(1)
Status @ Fault10(1)
No.
084
082
081
555
053
544
123
127
124
439
105
106
487
486
489
488
449
451
453
455
448
450
452
454
101
102
100
375
376
572
047
049
051
509
492
543
531
046
048
050
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
Parameter Name
Step Units 0(1)
Step Units 1(1)
Step Units 2(1)
Step Units 3(1)
Step Units 4(1)
Step Units 5(1)
Step Units 6(1)
Step Units 7(1)
Stop Mode
Stp Logic 0(1)
Stp Logic 1(1)
Stp Logic 2(1)
Stp Logic 3(1)
Stp Logic 4(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
200
202
204
206
208
210
212
214
045
180
181
182
183
184
Parameter Name
Stp Logic 5(1)
Stp Logic 6(1)
Stp Logic 7(1)
Stp Logic Status(1)
Stp Logic Time 0(1)
Stp Logic Time 1(1)
Stp Logic Time 2(1)
Stp Logic Time 3(1)
Stp Logic Time 4(1)
Stp Logic Time 5(1)
Stp Logic Time 6(1)
Stp Logic Time 7(1)
Sync Time
Testpoint Data
No.
185
186
187
391
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
571
368
Parameter Name
Testpoint Sel
Text Scroll
Timer Status
Torque Current
Torque Perf Mode
Traverse Dec
Traverse Inc
Units Traveled H(1)
Units Traveled L(1)
Var PWM Disable
Voltage Class
Wake Level
Wake Time
Chapter 3
No.
483
556
365
382
039
569
568
388
389
540
038
103
104
Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.

Parameter is also available in PowerFlex 523 FRN 3.xxx and later.
155
Chapter 3
Notes:
156
Chapter
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the

PowerFlex 520-series drive. Included is a listing and description of drive faults
with possible solutions, when applicable.
Drive Status
Faults
Fault Descriptions
Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions
See page...
157
157
159
162
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Drive does not contain
user-serviceable components. Do not disassemble drive chassis.
Drive Status
The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored. Any changes will be
indicated through the integral LCD display.
See Display and Control Keys on page 62 for information on drive status
indicators and controls.
Faults
A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types.
Fault Types
Type Fault Description
1
Auto-Reset/Run
When this type of fault occurs, and A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to a value greater than
0, a user-configurable timer, A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay], begins. When the timer reaches
zero, the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the
fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted.
2
Non-Resettable
This type of fault may require drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programming
errors. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.
157
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting
Fault Indication
Condition
Display
Drive is indicating a fault.
The integral LCD display provides visual notification of a fault condition by displaying the FWD
following.
Flashing fault number
Flashing fault indicator (LED)
Press the Esc key to regain control of the display.
Esc
FAULT
Sel
Manually Clearing Faults

Step
Key(s)
1. Press Esc to acknowledge the fault. The fault information will be removed so that you
can use the integral keypad.
Access b007 [Fault 1 Code] to view the most recent fault information.
Esc
2. Address the condition that caused the fault.
The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. See Fault Types,
Descriptions and Actions on page 159.
3. After corrective action has been taken, clear the fault by one of these methods.
Press Stop if P045 [Stop Mode] is set to a value between 0 and 3.
Cycle drive power.
Set A551 [Fault Clear] to 1 Reset Fault or 2 Clear Buffer.
Cycle digital input if t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] is set to
13 Clear Fault.
Automatically Clearing Faults

Option/Step
Clear a Type 1 fault and restart the drive.
2. Set A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to a value other than 0.
Clear an OverVoltage, UnderVoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp fault
without restarting the drive.
2. Set A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to 0.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if these

parameters are used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function
without considering applicable local, national and international codes,
standards, regulations or industry guidelines.
158
Troubleshooting
Chapter 4
Auto Restart (Reset/Run)

The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically
perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application
intervention. This allows remote or unattended operation. Only certain faults
are allowed to be reset. Certain faults (Type 2) that indicate possible drive
component malfunction are not resettable. Fault types are listed in the table
Fault Types on page 157. See Fault Descriptions on page 159 for more
information.
Use caution when enabling this feature, since the drive will attempt to issue its
own start command based on user selected programming.
Fault Descriptions
Fault Types, Descriptions and Actions

No.
F000
F002
Fault
No Fault
Auxiliary Input
Type(2) Description
No fault present.
1
External trip (Auxiliary) input.
F003
Power Loss
F004
UnderVoltage
F005
OverVoltage
F006
Motor Stalled
F007
Motor Overload
F008
Heatsink OvrTmp
F009
CC OvrTmp
F012
HW OverCurrent
F013
Ground Fault
1(3)
Action
Check remote wiring.

Verify communications
programming for intentional fault.
Single phase operation detected with Monitor the incoming AC line for low
excessive load.
voltage or line power interruption.
Check input fuses.
Reduce load.
DC bus voltage fell below the minimum Monitor the incoming AC line for low
value.
voltage or line power interruption.
DC bus voltage exceeded maximum
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage
value.
or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage
can also be caused by motor
regeneration. Extend the decel time or
install dynamic brake option.
Drive is unable to accelerate or
Increase P041, A442, A444, A446
[Accel Time x] or reduce load so drive
decelerate motor.
output current does not exceed the
current set by parameter A484, A485
[Current Limit x] for too long.
Check for overhauling load.
Internal electronic overload trip.
An excessive motor load exists.
Reduce load so drive output current
does not exceed the current set by
parameter P033 [Motor OL Current].
Verify A530 [Boost Select] setting.
Heatsink/Power Module temperature Check for blocked or dirty heat sink
exceeds a predefined value.
fins. Verify that ambient
temperature has not exceeded the
rated ambient temperature.
Check fan.
Control module temperature exceeds a Check product ambient
predefined value.
temperature.
Check for airflow obstruction.
Check for dirt or debris.
Check fan.
The drive output current has exceeded Check programming. Check for excess
the hardware current limit.
load, improper A530 [Boost Select]
setting, DC brake volts set too high or
other causes of excess current.
A current path to earth ground has been Check the motor and external wiring to
detected at one or more of the drive
the drive output terminals for a
output terminals.
grounded condition.
159
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting

No.
Fault
F015(1) Load Loss
160
Type(2) Description
2
The output torque current is below the
value programmed in A490 [Load Loss
Level] for a time period greater than the
time programmed in A491 [Load Loss
Time].
1
Output Phase Loss (if enabled).
Configure with A557 [Out Phas Loss En].
1
An analog input is configured to fault on
signal loss. A signal loss has occurred.
Configure with t094 [Anlg In V Loss] or
t097 [Anlg In mA Loss].
2
Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset
a fault and resume running for the
programmed number of A541 [Auto
Rstrt Tries].
2
A phase to ground fault has been
detected between the drive and motor
in this phase.
F021
Output Ph Loss
F029
Analog In Loss
F033
Auto Rstrt Tries
F038
F039
F040
Phase U to Gnd
Phase V to Gnd
Phase W to Gnd
F041
F042
F043
Phase UV Short
Phase UW Short
Phase VW Short
F048
Params Defaulted 1
Excessive current has been detected

between these two output terminals.
The drive was commanded to write

default values to EEPROM.
Action
Verify connections between motor
and load.
Verify level and time requirements
Verify motor wiring.

Verify motor.
Check for broken/loose connections
at inputs.
Check parameters.
Correct the cause of the fault and
manually clear.
Check the wiring between the drive

and motor.
Check motor for grounded phase.
Replace drive if fault cannot be
cleared.
Check the motor and drive output
terminal wiring for a shorted
condition.
cleared.
Clear the fault or cycle power to the
drive.
Program the drive parameters as
needed.
Check safety input signals. If not
using safety, verify and tighten
jumper for I/O terminals S1, S2 and
S+.
Verify connections between motor
and load.
Verify level and time requirements.
F059(1) Safety Open
Both of the safety inputs (Safety 1,

Safety 2) are not enabled.
Configure with t105 [Safety Open En].
F063
SW OverCurrent
F064
Drive Overload
F070
Power Unit
F071
DSI Net Loss
F072
Opt Net Loss
F073(1) EN Net Loss
F080
Programmed A486, A488 [Shear Pinx

Level] has been exceeded for a time
period greater than the time
programmed in A487, A489 [Shear Pin x
Time].
Drive overload rating has been
Reduce load or extend Accel Time.
exceeded.
Failure has been detected in the drive Check maximum ambient
power section.
temperature has not been exceeded.
Cycle power.
cleared.
Control over the Modbus or DSI
Cycle power.
communication link has been
Check communications cabling.
interrupted.
Check Modbus or DSI setting.
Check Modbus or DSI status.
Control over the network option cards Cycle power.
remote network has been interrupted. Check communications cabling.
Check network adapter setting.
Check external network status.
Control through the embedded
Cycle power.
EtherNet/IP adapter has been
interrupted.
Check EtherNet/IP setting.
Check external network status.
The autotune function was either
Restart procedure.
cancelled by the user or failed.
Autotune Failure
Troubleshooting
Chapter 4

No.
F081
Fault
DSI Comm Loss
Type(2) Description
2
Communications between the drive and
the Modbus or DSI master device have
been interrupted.
F082
Opt Comm Loss
F083(1) EN Comm Loss
F091(1) Encoder Loss
F094
Function Loss
F100
Parameter Chksum 2
F101
External Storage
F105
C Connect Err
F106
Incompat C-P
F107
Replaced C-P
F109
Mismatch C-P
F110
Keypad Membrane 2
F111(1) Safety Hardware
Action
Cycle power.
Check Modbus or DSI setting.
Check Modbus or DSI status.
Modify using C125 [Comm Loss
Action].
Connecting I/O terminals C1 and C2
to ground may improve noise
immunity.
Replace wiring, Modbus master
device, or control module.
Communications between the drive and Cycle power.
the network option card have been
Reinstall option card in drive.
interrupted.
Action].
Replace wiring, port expander,
option card, or control module.
Internal communications between the Cycle power.
drive and the embedded EtherNet/IP Check EtherNet/IP setting.
adapter have been interrupted.
Check drives Ethernet settings and
diagnostic parameters.
Action].
Replace wiring, Ethernet switch, or
control module.
Requires differential encoder.
Check Wiring.
One of the 2 encoder channel signals is If P047, P049, P051 [Speed
Referencex] = 16 Positioning and
missing.
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] = 5 Quad
Check, swap the Encoder channel
inputs or swap any two motor leads.
Replace encoder.
Freeze-Fire (Function Loss) input is Close input to the terminal and cycle
inactive, input to the programmed
power.
terminal is open.
Drive parameter non-volatile storage is Set P053 [Reset To Defalts] to 2 Factory
Rset.
corrupted.
External non-volatile storage has failed. Set P053 [Reset To Defalts] to 2 Factory
Rset.
Control module was disconnected while Clear fault and verify all parameter
drive was powered.
settings. Do not remove or install the
control module while power is applied.
The PowerFlex 525 control module does Change to a different power module.
not support power modules with 0.25 Change to a PowerFlex 523 control
HP power rating.
module.
The control module could not recognize Change to a different power module.
the power module. Hardware failure. Replace control module if changing
power module does not work.
The control module was mounted to a Set P053 [Reset To Defalts] to 3 Power
Reset.
different drive type power module.
Keypad membrane failure /
Cycle power.
disconnected.
Replace control module if fault
cannot be cleared.
Safety input enable hardware
Check safety input signals. If not
malfunction. One of the safety inputs is
using safety, verify and tighten
not enabled.
jumper for I/O terminals S1, S2 and
S+.
cannot be cleared.
161
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting

No.
F114
Fault
uC Failure
Type(2) Description
2
Microprocessor failure.
F122
I/O Board Fail
F125
Flash Update Req 2
F126
NonRecoverablErr 2
F127
DSIFlashUpdatReq 2
Action
Cycle power.
Verify grounding requirements. See
General Grounding Requirements on
page 20 for more information.
cannot be cleared.
Failure has been detected in the drive Cycle power.
control and I/O section.
Replace drive or control module if
fault cannot be cleared.
The firmware in the drive is corrupt,
Perform a firmware flash update
mismatched, or incompatible with the operation to attempt to load a valid set
hardware.
of firmware.
A non-recoverable firmware or
Clear fault or cycle power to the
hardware error was detected. The drive
drive.
was automatically stopped and reset. Replace drive or control module if
fault cannot be cleared.
A critical problem with the firmware
Perform a firmware flash update
was detected and the drive is running operation using DSI communications to
using backup firmware that only
attempt to load a valid set of firmware.
supports DSI communications.
(1) This fault is not applicable to PowerFlex 523 drives.

(2) See Fault Types for more information.
(3) This fault may be cleared by the auto-restart routine and will be attempted only once. It ignores the value set in parameter A541
[Auto Rstrt Tries].
Common Symptoms and

Corrective Actions
The drive is designed to start from the keypad when shipped. For a basic test of
drive operation:
1. Remove all user I/O wire.
2. Verify safety terminals (S1, S2 and S+) jumper is in place and tightened.
3. Verify wire jumper is in place between I/O terminals 01 and 11.
4. Verify that the three jumpers are in their proper default positions on the
control board. See PowerFlex 525 Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram on
page 42 for more information.
5. Reset default parameter values by setting P053 [Reset Defalts] to 2
Factory Rset.
6. If safe to do so for your application, press Start on drive keypad. Drive will
run according to the speed potentiometer.
162
Troubleshooting
Chapter 4
Motor does not Start.

Cause(s)
No output voltage to the motor.
Indication
None
Improper boost setting at initial start-up.

Drive is Faulted
None
Flashing red status light
Incorrect programming.
P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] is set incorrectly.
Incorrect input wiring.
See page 45 for wiring examples.
2 wire control requires Run Forward, Run Reverse or Jog
input.
3 wire control requires Start and Stop inputs
Stop input is always required.
Incorrect Sink/Source jumper setting.
None
Corrective Action
Check the power circuit.
Check the supply voltage.
Check all fuses and disconnects.
Check the motor.
Verify that the motor is connected properly.
Check the control input signals.
Verify that a Start signal is present. If 2-Wire control is used, verify that either the Run
Forward or Run Reverse signal is active, but not both.
Verify that I/O Terminal 01 is active.
Verify that P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] matches your configuration.
Verify that A544 [Reverse Disable] is not prohibiting movement.
Verify that safety inputs (Safety 1 and Safety 2) are active.
Set A530 [Boost Select] to 2 35.0, VT.
Clear fault.
Cycle drive power.
13 Clear Fault.
Check setting for b012 [Control Source].
None
Wire inputs correctly and/or install jumper.

If the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is used, verify that inputs are active.
If 2-wire or 3-wire mode is used, verify that t062 [DigIn TermBlk 02] and t063 [DigIn
TermBlk 03] are set properly.
None
Set switch to match wiring scheme.
Drive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal
block.
Cause(s)
Drive is Faulted
Indication
Flashing red status light
Incorrect programming.
P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] is set incorrectly.
t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk 02/03] is set incorrectly.
Incorrect input wiring.
See page 45 for wiring examples.
2 wire control requires Run Forward, Run Reverse or Jog
input.
3 wire control requires Start and Stop inputs
Stop input is always required.
Incorrect Sink/Source jumper setting.
None
Corrective Action
Clear fault.
Cycle drive power.
13 Clear Fault.
Check parameter settings.
None
Wire inputs correctly and/or install jumper.

If the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is used, verify that inputs are active.
None
Set switch to match wiring scheme.
163
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting
Drive does not respond to changes in speed command.

Cause(s)
No value is coming from the source of the command.
Indication
Corrective Action
The drive Run indicator is Check b012 [Control Source] for correct source.
If the source is an analog input, check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of
lit and output is 0 Hz.
signal.
Check b002 [Commanded Freq] to verify correct command.
Incorrect reference source is being selected by remote device or None
Check b012 [Control Source] for correct source.
Check b014 [Dig In Status] to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source. Verify
digital inputs.
settings for t062, t063, t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx].
Check P047, P049, P051 [Speed Referencex] for the source of the speed reference.
Reprogram as necessary.
Review the Speed Reference Control chart on page 49.
Verify communications if used.
Motor and/or drive will not accelerate to commanded speed.

Cause(s)
Acceleration time is excessive.
Excess load or short acceleration times force the drive into
current limit, slowing or stopping acceleration.
Indication
None
None
Speed command source or value is not as expected.
None
Programming is preventing the drive output from exceeding

limiting values.
Torque performance does not match motor characteristics.
None
None
Corrective Action
Reprogram P041, A442, A444, A446 [Accel Time x].
Compare b003 [Output Current] with A484, A485 [Current Limit x].
Remove excess load or reprogram P041, A442, A444, A446 [Accel Time x].
Check for improper A530 [Boost Select] setting.
Verify b002 [Commanded Freq].
Check b012 [Control Source] for the proper Speed Command.
Check P044 [Maximum Freq] to ensure that speed is not limited by programming.
Verify programming of A572 [Speed Ratio].
Set motor nameplate full load amps in parameter P034 [Motor NP FLA].
Perform P040 [Autotune] Static Tune or Rotate Tune procedure.
Set P039 [Torque Perf Mode] to 0 V/Hz.
Motor operation is unstable.

Cause(s)
Motor data was incorrectly entered.
Indication
None
Corrective Action
1. Correctly enter motor nameplate data into P031, P032 and P033.
2. Enable A547 [Compensation].
3. Use A530 [Boost Select] to reduce boost level.
Drive will not reverse motor direction.

Cause(s)
Reverse is disabled.
Digital input is not selected for reversing control.
Indication
None
None
Digital input is incorrectly wired.

Motor wiring is improperly phased for reverse.
None
None
164
Corrective Action
Check A544 [Reverse Disable].
Check [DigIn TermBlk xx] (See page 89). Choose correct input and program for reversing
mode.
Check input wiring (See page 45).
Switch two motor leads.
Troubleshooting
Chapter 4
Drive does not power up.

Cause(s)
No input power to drive.
Indication
None
Control module is not connected properly to power module.
None
Corrective Action
Check the power circuit.
Check the supply voltage.
Check all fuses and disconnects.
1. Remove power.
2. Verify that the control module is properly and fully installed on the power module.
3. Reapply power.
Motor is rotating at zero Hz or slip frequency is not correct.

Cause(s)
Incorrect speed calculation.
Indication
Improper speed.
Corrective Action
Verify P032 [Motor NP Hertz].
Reduce boost with A530 [Boost Select].
Set P036 [Motor NP RPM] to motor synchronous speed.
165
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting
Notes:
166
Appendix

Certifications
Environmental Specifications
Technical Specifications
Power Specifications
Certifications
See page...
167
168
169
172
Certifications
c-UL-us
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 14-05.
RCM
Australian Communications and Media Authority

In conformity with the following:
Radiocommunications Act: 1992
Radiocommunications Standard: 2008
Radiocommunications Labelling Notice: 2008
Standards applied:
EN 61800-3
In conformity with the following European Directives:
2014/35/EU Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
2014/30/EU EMC Directive (EMC)
2014/34/EU ATEX Directive (ATEX)
2006/42/EC Machinery Directive (MD)
Standards applied:
EN 61800-3
EN 61800-5-1
(Applicable to PowerFlex 525 drives only)
TV Rheinland
Standards applied:
EN ISO 13849-1
EN 61800-5-2
EN 61508 PARTS 1-7
EN 62061
EN 60204-1
Certified to ISO 13849-1 SIL2/PLd with embedded Safe-Torque-Off function
Meets Functional Safety (FS) when used with embedded Safe-Torque-Off function
Certified to ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU
Group II Category (2) GD Applications with ATEX Approved Motors
CE
TUV
Functional
Safety
Type
Approved
www.tuv.com
ID 0600000000
ATEX
II (2) G D
TUV 12 ATEX 7199 X

KCC
Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment
Compliant with the following standards:
Article 58-2 of Radio Waves Act, Clause 3
EAC
Standards applied:
Low Voltage TP TC 004/2011
EMC TP TC 020/2011
167
Appendix A
Certifications
AC 156
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Tested by Trentec to be compliant with AC156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification
Testing of Nonstructural Components and 2003 International Building Code for worst-case
seismic level for USA excluding site class F
SEMI F47
Electric Power Research Institute
Certified compliant with the following standards:
SEMI F47
IEC 61000-4-11
IEC 61000-4-34
Lloyds Register
Lloyds Register Type Approval Certificate 12/10068(E1)
RoHS
Compliant with the European Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive
The drive is also designed to meet the appropriate portions of the following specifications:
NFPA 70 - US National Electrical Code
NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable
Speed Drive Systems.
Environmental Specifications
Specifications
Altitude:
Without derating:
With derating:
Max. Surrounding Air
Temperature
Without derating:
With derating:
Storage Temperature:
Frame A...D:
Frame E:
Atmosphere:
IMPORTANT
Relative Humidity:
Shock:
Vibration:
Frame
Size
A
B
C
D
E
168
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
See Current Derating Curves on page 17 for derating guidelines.
1000 m (3300 ft) max.
Up to 4000 m (13,200 ft) max., with the exception of 600V drives at 2000 m (6600 ft)
max.
See Current Derating Curves on page 17 for derating guidelines.
-20...50 C (-4...122 F)
-20...60 C (-4...140 F) or -20...70 C (-4...158 F) with optional Control Module Fan
kit.
-40...85 C (-40...185 F)
-40...70 C (-40...158 F)
Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or
corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must
be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
0...95% noncondensing
Complies with IEC 60068-2-27
Complies with IEC 60068-2-6:1995
Operating and Nonoperating

Force
(Shock/Vibration)
Mounting Type
15 g / 2 g
DIN rail or screw
15 g / 2 g
DIN rail or screw
15 g / 2 g
DIN rail or screw
15 g / 2 g
Screw only
15 g / 1.5 g
Screw only
Nonoperating (Transportation)
Force
(Shock/Vibration)
Mounting Type
30 g/ 2.5 g
Screw only
30 g/ 2.5 g
Screw only
30 g/ 2.5 g
Screw only
30 g/ 2.5 g
Screw only
30 g/ 2.5 g
Screw only
Specifications
Conformal Coating:
Surrounding Environment
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 1 & 2:
Sound Pressure Level
(A-weighted)
Frame A & B:
Frame C:
Frame D:
Frame E:
Technical Specifications
Appendix A
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Complies with:
IEC 60721-3-3 to level 3C2 (chemical and gases only)
See Pollution Degree Ratings According to EN 61800-5-1 on page 52
for descriptions.
All enclosures acceptable.
Measurements are taken 1 m from the drive.
Maximum 53 dBA
Maximum 57 dBA
Maximum 64 dBA
Maximum 68 dBA
Protection
Specifications
Bus Overvoltage Trip
100...120V AC Input:
Bus Undervoltage Trip
525...600V AC Input
P038 = 3 600V:
P038 = 2 480V:
Power Ride-Thru:
Logic Control Ride-Thru:
Electronic Motor Overload
Protection:
Overcurrent:
Ground Fault Trip:
Short Circuit Trip:
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
405V DC bus (equivalent to 150V AC incoming line)

100 ms
0.5 s minimum, 2 s typical
Provides class 10 motor overload protection according to NEC article 430 and motor
over-temperature protection according to NEC article 430.126 (A) (2).
UL 508C File 29572.
200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault
Phase-to-ground on drive output
Phase-to-phase on drive output
Electrical
Specifications
Voltage Tolerance:
Frequency Tolerance:
Input Phases:
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
-15% / +10%
47...63 Hz
Three-phase input provides full rating. Single-phase input provides 35% rating on
three-phase drives.
Displacement Power Factor:
0.98 across entire speed range
Maximum Short Circuit Rating: 100,000 Amps Symmetrical
Actual Short Circuit Rating:
Determined by AIC Rating of installed fuse/circuit breaker
Transistor Type:
Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT)
Internal DC Bus Choke
Only for Frame E drive ratings
11 kW (15 HP)
15...18.5 kW (20...25 HP) Heavy Duty
15...18.5 kW (20...25 HP) Heavy Duty
169
Appendix A
Control
Specifications
Method
Carrier Frequency
Frequency Accuracy
Digital Input:
Analog Input:
Analog Output:
Performance
V/Hz (Volts per Hertz):
SVC (Sensorless Vector):
SVC Economizer:
VVC (Velocity Vector Control):

PM Motor (1):
Performance with Encoder
SVC (Sensorless Vector):
SVC Economizer:
VVC (Velocity Vector Control):
PM Motor (iPM motor, 10 HP
rating and below) (1):
Output Voltage Range:
Output Frequency Range:
Efficiency:
Stop Modes:
Accel/Decel:
Intermittent Overload
Normal Duty:
Heavy Duty:
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Sinusoidal PWM, Volts/Hertz, Sensorless Vector Control, Economizer SVC motor
control, Closed Loop Velocity Vector Control, Surface Mount and Interior Permanent
Magnet Motor (without encoder), Interior Permanent Magnet Motor (with encoder)
(Closed Loop Velocity Vector Control and PM motor control are not applicable to
PowerFlex 523 drives)
2...16 kHz, Drive rating based on 4 kHz
Within 0.05% of set output frequency
Within 0.5% of maximum output frequency, 10-Bit resolution
2% of full scale, 10-Bit resolution
1% of base speed across a 60:1 speed range
0.5% of base speed across a 100:1 speed range
0.5% of base speed, up to a 20:1 speed range
0.1% of base speed across a 100:1 speed range(2)
0.1% of base speed, up to a 60:1 speed range
0V to rated motor voltage
0...500 Hz (programmable)
97.5% (typical)
Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake,
and Ramp-to-Stop
Four independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time may be
programmed from 0...600 s in 0.01 s increments.
110% Overload capability for up to 60 s, 150% for up to 3 s
Applies for power rating above 15 kW (20 HP) only. Based on 480V drive rating.
150% Overload capability for up to 60 s, 180% for up to 3 s (200% programmable)
(1) For details on specific motor performance, see Knowledge Base article PowerFlex 525 PM Motor Performance Testing Summary.
(2) For more information, see Determine Encoder Pulse Per Revolution (PPR) Specification Based on Speed Resolution on page 217.
170
Appendix A
Control Inputs
Specifications
Digital
Bandwidth:
Quantity:
Analog:
Current:
Type
Source Mode (SRC):
Sink Mode (SNK):
Pulse Train
Quantity:
Input Signal:
Input Frequency:
Current
Consumption:
Quantity:
Specification
Resolution:
0-10V DC Analog:
4-20mA Analog:
External Pot:
PowerFlex 523
10 Rad/s for open and closed loop
(1) Dedicated for stop
(4) Programmable
6 mA
PowerFlex 525
(1) Dedicated for stop
(6) Programmable
18...24V = ON, 0...6V = OFF

0...6V = ON, 18...24V = OFF
(1) Shared with one of the programmable digital input terminals.
Transistor contact (open collector)
0...100 kHz
7 mA @ 24V DC maximum
(1) Isolated, 0-10V and 4-20mA
(2) Isolated, -10-10V and 4-20mA
10-bit
100k ohm input impedance
250 ohm input impedance
1...10k ohm, 2 W minimum
Control Outputs
Specifications
Relay:
Quantity:
Opto:
Analog
PowerFlex 523
(1) Programmable Form C
Specification
Resistive Rating:
Inductive Rating:
Quantity:
Specification:
Quantity:
Specification
Resolution:
0-10V DC Analog:
4-20 mA Analog:
PowerFlex 525
(2) 1 Programmable Form A and
1 Programmable Form B
3.0 A @ 30V DC, 3.0 A @ 125V, 3.0 A @ 240V AC

0.5 A @ 30V DC, 0.5 A @ 125V, 0.5 A @ 240V AC
(2) Programmable
30V DC, 50 mA Non-inductive
(1) Non-Isolated 0-10V or 4-20 mA(1)
10-bit
1 k ohm minimum
525 ohm maximum
(1) Feature is not applicable to PowerFlex 523 series A drives.
Encoder
Specifications
Type:
Supply:
Quadrature:
Duty Cycle:
Requirements:
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Incremental, dual channel
12V, 250 mA
90 , 27 @ 25 C
50%, +10%
Encoders must be line driver type, quadrature (dual channel) or pulse
(single channel), 3.5...26V DC output, single-ended or differential and
capable of supplying a minimum of 10 mA per channel.
Allowable input is DC up to a maximum frequency of 250 kHz. The
encoder I/O automatically scales to allow 5V, 12V and 24V DC nominal
voltages.
171
Appendix A
Power Specifications
Watts Loss
PowerFlex 520-Series Estimated Watts Loss (Rated Load, Speed & PWM)
Voltage
100...120V,
50/60 Hz 1-Phase
200...240V,
50/60 Hz 1-Phase
200...240V,
50/60 Hz 1-Phase
w/ EMC Filter
200...240V,
50/60 Hz 3-Phase
380...480V,
50/60 Hz 3-Phase
380...480V,
50/60 Hz 3-Phase
w/ EMC Filter
172
Output Current (A)

1.6
2.5
4.8
6.0
1.6
2.5
4.8
8.0
11.0
1.6
2.5
4.8
8.0
11.0
1.6
2.5
5.0
8.0
11.0
17.5
24.0
32.2
48.3
62.1
1.4
2.3
4.0
6.0
10.5
13.0
17.0
24.0
30.0
1.4
2.3
4.0
6.0
10.5
13.0
17.0
24.0
30.0
37.0
43.0
Total Watts Loss

20.0
27.0
53.0
67.0
20.0
29.0
50.0
81.0
111.0
20.0
29.0
53.0
84.0
116.0
20.0
29.0
50.0
79.0
107.0
148.0
259.0
323.0
584.0
708.0
27.0
37.0
62.0
86.0
129.0
170.0
221.0
303.0
387.0
27.0
37.0
63.0
88.0
133.0
175.0
230.0
313.0
402.0
602.0
697.0
Appendix A
PowerFlex 520-Series Estimated Watts Loss (Rated Load, Speed & PWM)
Voltage
525...600V,
50/60 Hz 3-Phase
Output Current (A)

0.9
1.7
3.0
4.2
6.6
9.9
12.0
19.0
22.0
27.0
32.0
Total Watts Loss

22.0
32.0
50.0
65.0
95.0
138.0
164.0
290.0
336.0
466.0
562.0
Input Current Scaling (Optional)

You can use a higher drive rating by scaling the input current based on the output
current required for your application. You can use a lower input current rating
based upon the motor FLA rating. For example, if the motor has an FLA rating of
1.6, the input rating will be 3.2 amps. See the PowerFlex 520-Series Input
Current Rating Scaled by the Motor FLA on page 173 table for more
information.
PowerFlex 520-Series Input Current Rating Scaled by the Motor FLA
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Output Current: Motor FLA
Input Drive Current Rating
Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
100...120V AC (-15%, +10%) 1-Phase Input, 0...230V 3-Phase Output
25A-V1P6N104
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.8
6.4
5.2
4.0
3.2
25A-V2P5N104
25B-V2P5N104
2.5
2.0
1.6
1.3
9.6
7.7
6.2
4.8
25A-V4P8N104
25B-V4P8N104
4.8
3.8
3.1
2.4
19.2
15.4
12.5
9.6
25A-V6P0N104
25B-V6P0N104
6.0
4.8
3.9
3.0
24.0
19.2
15.6
12.0
25A-A1P6N104
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.8
5.3
4.3
3.4
2.7
25A-A2P5N104
25B-A2P5N104
2.5
2.0
1.6
1.3
6.5
5.2
4.2
3.3
25A-A4P8N104
25B-A4P8N104
4.8
3.8
3.1
2.4
10.7
8.6
7.0
5.4
25A-A8P0N104
25B-A8P0N104
8.0
6.4
5.2
4.0
18.0
14.4
11.7
9.0
25A-A011N104
25B-A011N104
11.0
8.8
7.2
5.5
22.9
18.3
14.9
11.5
200...240V AC (-15%, +10%) 1-Phase Input with EMC Filter, 0...230V 3-Phase Output
25A-A1P6N114
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.8
5.3
4.3
3.4
2.7
25A-A2P5N114
25B-A2P5N114
2.5
2.0
1.6
1.3
6.5
5.2
4.2
3.3
25A-A4P8N114
25B-A4P8N114
4.8
3.8
3.1
2.4
10.7
8.6
7.0
5.4
25A-A8P0N114
25B-A8P0N114
8.0
6.4
5.2
4.0
18.0
14.4
11.7
9.0
25A-A011N114
25B-A011N114
11.0
8.8
7.2
5.5
22.9
18.3
14.9
11.5
25A-B1P6N104
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.8
1.9
1.5
1.2
1.0
25A-B2P5N104
25B-B2P5N104
2.5
2.0
1.6
1.3
2.7
2.2
1.8
1.4
25A-B5P0N104
25B-B5P0N104
5.0
4.0
3.2
2.5
5.8
4.6
3.8
2.9
25A-B8P0N104
25B-B8P0N104
8.0
6.4
5.2
4.0
9.5
7.6
6.2
4.8
25A-B011N104
25B-B011N104
11.0
8.8
7.2
5.5
13.8
11.0
9.0
6.9
25A-B017N104
25B-B017N104
17.5
14.0
11.4
8.8
21.1
16.9
13.7
10.6
173
Appendix A
PowerFlex 520-Series Input Current Rating Scaled by the Motor FLA

PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Output Current: Motor FLA
Input Drive Current Rating
Catalog Number Catalog Number 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
25A-B024N104
25B-B024N104
24.0
19.2
15.6
12.0
26.6
21.3
17.3
13.3
25A-B032N104
25B-B032N104
32.2
25.8
20.9
16.1
34.8
27.8
22.6
17.4
25A-B048N104
25B-B048N104
48.3
38.6
31.4
24.2
44.0
35.2
28.6
22.0
25A-B062N104
25B-B062N104
62.1
49.7
40.4
31.1
56.0
44.8
36.4
28.0
25A-D1P4N104
25B-D1P4N104
1.4
1.1
0.9
0.7
1.9
1.5
1.2
1.0
25A-D2P3N104
25B-D2P3N104
2.3
1.8
1.5
1.2
3.2
2.6
2.1
1.6
25A-D4P0N104
25B-D4P0N104
4.0
3.2
2.6
2.0
5.7
4.6
3.7
2.9
25A-D6P0N104
25B-D6P0N104
6.0
4.8
3.9
3.0
7.5
6.0
4.9
3.8
25A-D010N104
25B-D010N104
10.5
8.4
6.8
5.3
13.8
11.0
9.0
6.9
25A-D013N104
25B-D013N104
13.0
10.4
8.5
6.5
15.4
12.3
10.0
7.7
25A-D017N104
25B-D017N104
17.0
13.6
11.1
8.5
18.4
14.7
12.0
9.2
25A-D024N104
25B-D024N104
24.0
19.2
15.6
12.0
26.4
21.1
17.2
13.2
25A-D030N104
25B-D030N104
30.0
24.0
19.5
15.0
33.0
26.4
21.5
16.5
25A-D1P4N114
25B-D1P4N114
1.4
1.1
0.9
0.7
1.9
1.5
1.2
1.0
25A-D2P3N114
25B-D2P3N114
2.3
1.8
1.5
1.2
3.2
2.6
2.1
1.6
25A-D4P0N114
25B-D4P0N114
4.0
3.2
2.6
2.0
5.7
4.6
3.7
2.9
25A-D6P0N114
25B-D6P0N114
6.0
4.8
3.9
3.0
7.5
6.0
4.9
3.8
25A-D010N114
25B-D010N114
10.5
8.4
6.8
5.3
13.8
11.0
9.0
6.9
25A-D013N114
25B-D013N114
13.0
10.4
8.5
6.5
15.4
12.3
10.0
7.7
25A-D017N114
25B-D017N114
17.0
13.6
11.1
8.5
18.4
14.7
12.0
9.2
25A-D024N114
25B-D024N114
24.0
19.2
15.6
12.0
26.4
21.1
17.2
3.2
25A-D030N114
25B-D030N114
30.0
24.0
19.5
15.0
33.0
26.4
21.5
16.5
25A-D037N114
25B-D037N114
37.0
29.6
24.1
18.5
33.7
27.0
21.9
16.9
25A-D043N114
25B-D043N114
43.0
34.4
28.0
21.5
38.9
31.1
25.3
19.5
25A-E0P9N104
25B-E0P9N104
0.9
0.7
0.6
0.5
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
25A-E1P7N104
25B-E1P7N104
1.7
1.4
1.1
0.9
2.3
1.8
1.5
1.2
25A-E3P0N104
25B-E3P0N104
3.0
2.4
2.0
1.5
3.8
3.0
2.5
1.9
25A-E4P2N104
25B-E4P2N104
4.2
3.4
2.7
2.1
5.3
4.2
3.4
2.7
25A-E6P6N104
25B-E6P6N104
6.6
5.3
4.3
3.3
8.0
6.4
5.2
4.0
25A-E9P9N104
25B-E9P9N104
9.9
7.9
6.4
5.0
11.2
9.0
7.3
5.6
25A-E012N104
25B-E012N104
12.0
9.6
7.8
6.0
13.5
10.8
8.8
6.8
25A-E019N104
25B-E019N104
19.0
15.2
12.4
9.5
24.0
19.2
15.6
12.0
25A-E022N104
25B-E022N104
22.0
17.6
14.3
11.0
27.3
21.8
17.7
13.7
25A-E027N104
25B-E027N104
27.0
21.6
17.6
13.5
24.7
19.8
16.1
12.4
25A-E032N104
25B-E032N104
32.0
25.6
20.8
16.0
29.2
23.4
19.0
14.6
174
Appendix

Product Selection
Catalog Number Description
25B
Drive
2P5
Voltage Rating
Rating
Enclosure
HIM
Emission Class
Version
PowerFlex 520-Series Drive Ratings

Output Ratings
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
Output
Input
Frame PowerFlex 523
HP
kW
HP
kW
Current (A) Voltage Range Size Catalog No.
0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2
1.6
85...132
A
25A-V1P6N104(2)
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.5
85...132
A
25A-V2P5N104
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
4.8
85...132
B
25A-V4P8N104
1.5
1.1
1.5
1.1
6.0
85...132
B
25A-V6P0N104
0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2
1.6
170...264
A
25A-A1P6N104(2)
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.5
170...264
A
25A-A2P5N104
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
4.8
170...264
A
25A-A4P8N104
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
8.0
170...264
B
25A-A8P0N104
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
11.0
170...264
B
25A-A011N104
0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2
1.6
170...264
A
25A-A1P6N114
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.5
170...264
A
25A-A2P5N114
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
4.8
170...264
A
25A-A4P8N114
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
8.0
170...264
B
25A-A8P0N114
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
11.0
170...264
B
25A-A011N114
0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2
1.6
170...264
A
25A-B1P6N104(2)
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.5
170...264
A
25A-B2P5N104
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
5.0
170...264
A
25A-B5P0N104
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
8.0
170...264
A
25A-B8P0N104
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
11.0
170...264
A
25A-B011N104
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
17.5
170...264
B
25A-B017N104
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
24.0
170...264
C
25A-B024N104
10.0
7.5
10.0
7.5
32.2
170...264
D
25A-B032N104
15.0
11.0
10.0
7.5
48.3
170...264
E
25A-B048N104
20.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
62.1
170...264
E
25A-B062N104
380...480V AC (-15%, +10%) 3-Phase Input, 0...460V 3-Phase Output(1)
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.4
323...528
A
25A-D1P4N104(2)
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
2.3
323...528
A
25A-D2P3N104
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
4.0
323...528
A
25A-D4P0N104
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
6.0
323...528
A
25A-D6P0N104
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
10.5
323...528
B
25A-D010N104
PowerFlex 525
Catalog No.
25B-V2P5N104
25B-V4P8N104
25B-V6P0N104
25B-A2P5N104
25B-A4P8N104
25B-A8P0N104
25B-A011N104
25B-A2P5N114
25B-A4P8N114
25B-A8P0N114
25B-A011N114
25B-B2P5N104
25B-B5P0N104
25B-B8P0N104
25B-B011N104
25B-B017N104
25B-B024N104
25B-B032N104
25B-B048N104
25B-B062N104
25B-D1P4N104(2)
25B-D2P3N104
25B-D4P0N104
25B-D6P0N104
25B-D010N104
175
Appendix B
PowerFlex 520-Series Drive Ratings

Output Ratings
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
Output
Input
Frame PowerFlex 523
HP
kW
HP
kW
Current (A) Voltage Range Size Catalog No.
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
13.0
323...528
C
25A-D013N104
10.0
7.5
10.0
7.5
17.0
323...528
C
25A-D017N104
15.0
11.0
15.0
11.0
24.0
323...528
D
25A-D024N104
20.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
30.0
323...528
D
25A-D030N104
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.4
323...528
A
25A-D1P4N114
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
2.3
323...528
A
25A-D2P3N114
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
4.0
323...528
A
25A-D4P0N114
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
6.0
323...528
A
25A-D6P0N114
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
10.5
323...528
B
25A-D010N114
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
13.0
323...528
C
25A-D013N114
10.0
7.5
10.0
7.5
17.0
323...528
C
25A-D017N114
15.0
11.0
15.0
11.0
24.0
323...528
D
25A-D024N114
20.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
30.0
323...528
D
25A-D030N114
25.0
18.5
20.0
15.0
37.0
323...528
E
25A-D037N114
30.0
22.0
25.0
18.5
43.0
323...528
E
25A-D043N114
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
0.9
446...660
A
25A-E0P9N104(2)
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
1.7
446...660
A
25A-E1P7N104
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
3.0
446...660
A
25A-E3P0N104
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
4.2
446...660
A
25A-E4P2N104
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
6.6
446...660
B
25A-E6P6N104
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
9.9
446...660
C
25A-E9P9N104
10.0
7.5
10.0
7.5
12.0
446...660
C
25A-E012N104
15.0
11.0
15.0
11.0
19.0
446...660
D
25A-E019N104
20.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
22.0
446...660
D
25A-E022N104
25.0
18.5
20.0
15.0
27.0
446...660
E
25A-E027N104
30.0
22.0
25.0
18.5
32.0
446...660
E
25A-E032N104
PowerFlex 525
Catalog No.
25B-D013N104
25B-D017N104
25B-D024N104
25B-D030N104
25B-D1P4N114
25B-D2P3N114
25B-D4P0N114
25B-D6P0N114
25B-D010N114
25B-D013N114
25B-D017N114
25B-D024N114
25B-D030N114
25B-D037N114
25B-D043N114
25B-E0P9N104(2)
25B-E1P7N104
25B-E3P0N104
25B-E4P2N104
25B-E6P6N104
25B-E9P9N104
25B-E012N104
25B-E019N104
25B-E022N104
25B-E027N104
25B-E032N104
(1) A non-filtered drive is not available for 380...480V AC 25 HP (18.5 kW) and 30 HP (22.0 kW) ratings. Filtered drives are available,
however you must verify that the application will support a filtered drive.
(2) These drive ratings do not come with a heatsink cooling fan and are in accordance with design specifications.
Dynamic Brake Resistors

Drive Ratings
Input Voltage
100...120V
50/60 Hz
1-Phase
200...240V
50/60 Hz
1-Phase
176
HP
kW
0.25
0.5
1.0
1.5
0.25
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
Minimum
Resistance
10%
56
56
56
41
56
56
56
41
32
Resistance
5%
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
47
Catalog No.(1)(2)
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-047P500
Appendix B
Dynamic Brake Resistors

Drive Ratings
Input Voltage
200...240V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
380...480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
525...600V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
HP
kW
0.25
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
Minimum
Resistance
10%
56
56
56
41
32
18
16
14
14
10
89
89
89
89
47
47
47
43
43
27
27
112
112
112
112
86
59
59
59
59
53
34
Resistance
5%
91
91
91
91
47
47
30
30
15
15
360
360
360
120
120
120
120
60
60
40
40
360
360
360
120
120
120
120
60
60
60
40
Catalog No.(1)(2)
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-091P500
AK-R2-047P500
AK-R2-047P500
AK-R2-030P1K2
AK-R2-030P1K2
AK-R2-030P1K2(3)
AK-R2-030P1K2(3)
AK-R2-360P500
AK-R2-360P500
AK-R2-360P500
AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2(3)
AK-R2-120P1K2(3)
AK-R2-120P1K2(4)
AK-R2-120P1K2(4)
AK-R2-360P500
AK-R2-360P500
AK-R2-360P500
AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2
AK-R2-120P1K2(3)
AK-R2-120P1K2(3)
AK-R2-120P1K2(3)
AK-R2-120P1K2(4)
(1) The resistors listed in this tables are rated for 5% duty cycle.
(2) Use of Rockwell Automation resistors is always recommended. The resistors listed have been carefully selected for optimizing
performance in a variety of applications. Alternative resistors may be used, however, care must be taken when making a selection.
See the PowerFlex Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator, publication PFLEX-AT001.
(3) Requires two resistors wired in parallel.
(4) Requires three resistors wired in parallel.
EMC Line Filters

Short Circuit Current Rating = 100 kA
Drive Ratings
Input Voltage
HP
100...120V
0.25
50/60 Hz
0.5
1-Phase
1.0
1.5
kW
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.1
Current (A)
1.6
2.5
4.8
6.0
Frame Size
A
A
B
B
Catalog No.
25-RF011-AL
25-RF011-AL
25-RF023-BL
25-RF023-BL
177
Appendix B
EMC Line Filters

Short Circuit Current Rating = 100 kA
Drive Ratings
Input Voltage
HP
200...240V
0.25
50/60 Hz
0.5
1-Phase
1.0
2.0
3.0
200...240V
0.25
50/60 Hz
0.5
3-Phase
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
380...480V
0.5
50/60 Hz
1.0
3-Phase
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
525...600V
0.5
50/60 Hz
1.0
3-Phase
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
kW
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
Current (A)
1.6
2.5
4.8
8.0
11.0
1.6
2.5
5.0
8.0
11.0
17.5
24.0
32.2
48.3
62.1
1.4
2.3
4.0
6.0
10.5
13.0
17.0
24.0
30.0
37.0
43.0
0.9
1.7
3.0
4.2
6.6
9.9
12.0
19.0
22.0
27.0
32.0
Frame Size
A
A
A
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
B
C
D
E
E
A
A
A
A
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
A
A
A
A
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
Catalog No.
25-RF011-AL
25-RF011-AL
25-RF011-AL
25-RF023-BL
25-RF023-BL
25-RF014-AL
25-RF014-AL
25-RF014-AL
25-RF014-AL
25-RF014-AL
25-RF021-BL
25-RF027-CL
25-RF035-DL
25-RF056-EL
25-RF056-EL
25-RF7P5-AL
25-RF7P5-AL
25-RF7P5-AL
25-RF7P5-AL
25-RF014-BL
25-RF018-CL
25-RF018-CL
25-RF033-DL
25-RF033-DL
25-RF039-EL
25-RF039-EL(1)
25-RF8P0-BL(2)
25-RF8P0-BL(2)
25-RF8P0-BL(2)
25-RF8P0-BL(2)
25-RF8P0-BL
25-RF014-CL
25-RF014-CL
25-RF027-DL
25-RF027-DL
25-RF029-EL
25-RF029-EL(1)
(1) EMC Line Filter size is based on the input current of the drive. See the tables on page 26 and page 27 for more information.
(2) This 600V drive rating needs to be matched with a frame B EMC Line Filter.
178
Appendix B
EMC Plates
Item
EMC Plate
Description
Optional grounding plate for shielded cables.
Frame
Size
A
B
C
D
E
Catalog No.
25-EMC1-FA
25-EMC1-FB
25-EMC1-FC
25-EMC1-FD
25-EMC1-FE
Human Interface Module (HIM) Option Kits and Accessories

Item
Description
LCD Display, Remote Panel Digital speed control
Mount
CopyCat capable
IP66 (NEMA Type 4X/12) indoor use only
Includes 2.0 meter cable
LCD Display, Remote
Digital speed control
Handheld
Full numeric keyboard
CopyCat capable
IP 30 (NEMA Type 1)
Includes 1.0 meter cable
Panel mount with optional Bezel Kit
Bezel Kit
Panel mount for LCD Display, Remote Handheld unit, IP 30 (NEMA Type 1)
Includes 2.0 m DSI cable
DSI HIM Cable
1.0 m (3.3 ft)
(DSI HIM to RJ45 cable)
2.9 m (9.51 ft)
Catalog No.
22-HIM-C2S
22-HIM-A3
22-HIM-B1
22-HIM-H10
22-HIM-H30
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Kit

Item
Description
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Kit Field installed kit. Converts drive to IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1
enclosure. Includes conduit box with mounting screws and
plastic top panel.
Frame
Size
A
B
C
D
E
Catalog No.
25-JBAA
25-JBAB
25-JBAC
25-JBAD
25-JBAE
Frame
Size
A...D
E
Catalog No.
25-FAN1-70C
25-FAN2-70C

Item
Description
For use with drive in environments with ambient
temperatures up to 70 C or horizontal mounting.
Incremental Encoder Input Option

Item
Incremental Encoder
Description
Incremental encoder input option board.
Catalog No.
25-ENC-1
WARNING: Only the 25-ENC-1 Encoder will work properly in the PowerFlex 525
drive. Installing an incorrect encoder card, such as the PowerFlex 527 25-ENC-2
will cause damage to the PowerFlex 525 drive.
179
Appendix B
Bulletin 160 to PowerFlex 520-Series Mounting Adapter Plate
Item
Mounting Adapter Plate
Description
For use with drive when replacing Bulletin 160 drives in
existing installations to a PowerFlex 520-Series drive. Select
the catalog number based on the frame size of your Bulletin
160 drive.
B160
Frame
Size
A
B
Catalog No.
25-MAP-FA
25-MAP-FB
Replacement Parts
PowerFlex 520-Series Power Module
Item
PowerFlex 520-Series
Power Module
Description
Replacement power module for use with PowerFlex 520-Series drives. Includes:
Power Module
Power Module Front Cover
Power Terminal Guard
Heatsink Fan
Output Ratings
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
Output
Input
Frame
HP
kW
HP
kW
Current (A) Voltage Range Size
0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2
1.6
85...132
A
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.5
85...132
A
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
4.8
85...132
B
1.5
1.1
1.5
1.1
6.0
85...132
B
0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2
1.6
170...264
A
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.5
170...264
A
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
4.8
170...264
A
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
8.0
170...264
B
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
11.0
170...264
B
0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2
1.6
170...264
A
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.5
170...264
A
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
4.8
170...264
A
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
8.0
170...264
B
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
11.0
170...264
B
0.25
0.2
0.25
0.2
1.6
170...264
A
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
2.5
170...264
A
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
5.0
170...264
A
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
8.0
170...264
A
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
11.0
170...264
A
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
17.5
170...264
B
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
24.0
170...264
C
10.0
7.5
10.0
7.5
32.2
170...264
D
15.0
11.0
10.0
7.5
48.3
170...264
E
20.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
62.1
170...264
E
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.4
323...528
A
180
Catalog No.
25-PM1-V1P6
25-PM1-V2P5
25-PM1-V4P8
25-PM1-V6P0
25-PM1-A1P6
25-PM1-A2P5
25-PM1-A4P8
25-PM1-A8P0
25-PM1-A011
25-PM2-A1P6
25-PM2-A2P5
25-PM2-A4P8
25-PM2-A8P0
25-PM2-A011
25-PM1-B1P6
25-PM1-B2P5
25-PM1-B5P0
25-PM1-B8P0
25-PM1-B011
25-PM1-B017
25-PM1-B024
25-PM1-B032
25-PM1-B048
25-PM1-B062
25-PM1-D1P4
Output Ratings
Normal Duty
Heavy Duty
Input
Frame
Output
HP
kW
HP
kW
Current (A) Voltage Range Size
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
2.3
323...528
A
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
4.0
323...528
A
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
6.0
323...528
A
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
10.5
323...528
B
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
13.0
323...528
C
10.0
7.5
10.0
7.5
17.0
323...528
C
15.0
11.0
15.0
11.0
24.0
323...528
D
20.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
30.0
323...528
D
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.4
323...528
A
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
2.3
323...528
A
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
4.0
323...528
A
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
6.0
323...528
A
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
10.5
323...528
B
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
13.0
323...528
C
10.0
7.5
10.0
7.5
17.0
323...528
C
15.0
11.0
15.0
11.0
24.0
323...528
D
20.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
30.0
323...528
D
25.0
18.5
20.0
15.0
37.0
323...528
E
30.0
22.0
25.0
18.5
43.0
323...528
E
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
0.9
446...660
A
1.0
0.75
1.0
0.75
1.7
446...660
A
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
3.0
446...660
A
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
4.2
446...660
A
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
6.6
446...660
B
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
9.9
446...660
C
10.0
7.5
10.0
7.5
12.0
446...660
C
15.0
11.0
15.0
11.0
19.0
446...660
D
20.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
22.0
446...660
D
25.0
18.5
20.0
15.0
27.0
446...660
E
30.0
22.0
25.0
18.5
32.0
446...660
E
Appendix B
Catalog No.
25-PM1-D2P3
25-PM1-D4P0
25-PM1-D6P0
25-PM1-D010
25-PM1-D013
25-PM1-D017
25-PM1-D024
25-PM1-D030
25-PM2-D1P4
25-PM2-D2P3
25-PM2-D4P0
25-PM2-D6P0
25-PM2-D010
25-PM2-D013
25-PM2-D017
25-PM2-D024
25-PM2-D030
25-PM2-D037
25-PM2-D043
25-PM1-E0P9
25-PM1-E1P7
25-PM1-E3P0
25-PM1-E4P2
25-PM1-E6P6
25-PM1-E9P9
25-PM1-E012
25-PM1-E019
25-PM1-E022
25-PM1-E027
25-PM1-E032
PowerFlex 520-Series Control Module

Item
PowerFlex 523 Control
Module
Module
Description
Replacement control module for use with
PowerFlex 520-Series drives. Includes:
Control Module
Control Module Front Cover
Frame
Size
A...E
Catalog No.
25A-CTM1
25B-CTM1
Other Parts
Item
Module Front Cover
Module Front Cover
Description
Replacement cover for the control module I/O terminals,
EtherNet/IP and DSI ports.
Frame
Size
A...E
Catalog No.
25A-CTMFC1
25B-CTMFC1
181
Appendix B
Other Parts
Item
Description
Replacement cover for the PowerFlex 520-Series power
Power Module Front Cover module.
Power Terminal Guard
Replacement finger guard for power terminals.
Heatsink Fan Kit
Replacement fan for drive power module.
PowerFlex 520-Series EMC Replacement EMC cores

Cores
Frame
Size
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
Catalog No.
25-PMFC-FB
25-PMFC-FC
25-PMFC-FD
25-PMFC-FE
25-PTG1-FA
25-PTG1-FB
25-PTG1-FC
25-PTG1-FD
25-PTG1-FE
25-FAN1-FA
25-FAN1-FB
25-FAN1-FC
25-FAN1-FD
25-FAN1-FE
25-CORE-A
25-CORE-RF-A
25-CORE-B
25-CORE-RF-B
25-CORE-C
25-CORE-RF-C
25-CORE-D
25-CORE-RF-D
25-CORE-E
25-CORE-RF-E
Communication Option Kits and Accessories

Item
Communication Adapters
Description
Embedded communication options for use with the
PowerFlex 520-Series drives:
DeviceNet
Dual Port EtherNet/IP
PROFIBUS DP-V1
Catalog No.
25-COMM-D
25-COMM-E2P
25-COMM-P
Compact I/O Module
Three channel
1769-SM2
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Provides serial communication with DF1 protocol for use with 1203-USB
Converter Module
Connected Components Workbench software. Includes:
2 m USB cable (1)
20-HIM-H10 cable (1)
22-HIM-H10 cable (1)
Serial Converter Module
Provides serial communication with DF1 protocol for use with 22-SCM-232
(RS485 to RS232)
Connected Components Workbench software. Includes:
DSI to RS232 serial converter (1)
1203-SFC serial cable (1)
22-RJ45CBL-C20 cable (1)
DSI Cable
2.0 m RJ45 to RJ45 cable, male to male connectors.
22-RJ45CBL-C20
Serial Cable
2.0 m serial cable with a locking low profile connector to
1203-SFC
connect to the serial converter and a 9-pin sub-miniature D
female connector to connect to a computer.
Splitter Cable
RJ45 one to two port splitter cable (Modbus only)
AK-U0-RJ45-SC1
182
Appendix B
Communication Option Kits and Accessories

Item
Terminating Resistors
Terminal Block
Workbench Software
(Download or DVD-ROM)
Description
RJ45 120 Ohm resistors (2 pieces)
RJ45 Two position terminal block (5 pieces)
Windows-based software packages for programming and
configuring Allen-Bradley drives and other Rockwell
Automation products.
Compatibility:
Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7
Catalog No.
AK-U0-RJ45-TR1
AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P
http://
ab.rockwellautomation.co
m/programmablecontrollers/connectedcomponents-workbenchsoftware
Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors

Output Ratings(1)
Normal Duty Heavy Duty
HP
kW
HP
kW
200...240V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase(2)
0.25 0.2
0.25 0.2
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.0
0.75 1.0
0.75
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
200...240V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase
0.25 0.2
0.25 0.2
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.0
0.75 1.0
0.75
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
10.0 7.5
10.0 7.5
15.0 11.0 10.0 7.5
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0
380...480V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.0
0.75 1.0
0.75
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
3.0
2.2
3.0
2.2
5.0
4.0
5.0
4.0
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
10.0 7.5
10.0 7.5
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0
25.0
30.0
18.5
22.0
20.0
25.0
15.0
18.5
525...600V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase

0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
1.0
0.75 1.0
0.75
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
Input Line Reactor(3)(4)

IP00
IP11
(Open Style)
(NEMA/UL Type 1)
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
Output Line Reactor(3)(4)

IP00
IP11
(Open Style)
(NEMA/UL Type 1)
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
1321-3R4-A
1321-3R8-A
1321-3R8-A
1321-3R18-A
1321-3R18-A
1321-3RA4-A
1321-3RA8-A
1321-3RA8-A
1321-3RA18-A
1321-3RA18-A
1321-3R2-D
1321-3R2-D
1321-3R4-A
1321-3R8-A
1321-3R12-A
1321-3RA2-D
1321-3RA2-D
1321-3RA4-A
1321-3RA8-A
1321-3RA12-A
1321-3R2-D
1321-3R2-D
1321-3R4-A
1321-3R8-A
1321-3R12-A
1321-3R18-A
1321-3R25-A
1321-3R35-A
1321-3R45-A
1321-3R55-A (ND)
1321-3R45-A (HD)
1321-3RA2-D
1321-3RA2-D
1321-3RA4-A
1321-3RA8-A
1321-3RA12-A
1321-3RA18-A
1321-3RA25-A
1321-3RA35-A
1321-3RA45-A
1321-3RA55-A (ND)
1321-3RA45-A (HD)
1321-3R2-D
1321-3R2-D
1321-3R4-A
1321-3R8-A
1321-3R12-A
1321-3R18-A
1321-3R25-A
1321-3R35-A
1321-3R45-A
1321-3R55-A (ND)
1321-3R45-A (HD)
1321-3RA2-D
1321-3RA2-D
1321-3RA4-A
1321-3RA8-A
1321-3RA12-A
1321-3RA18-A
1321-3RA25-A
1321-3RA35-A
1321-3RA45-A
1321-3RA55-A (ND)
1321-3RA45-A (HD)
1321-3R2-B
1321-3R4-C
1321-3R4-B
1321-3R8-C
1321-3R12-B
1321-3R12-B
1321-3R18-B
1321-3R25-B
1321-3R35-B (ND)
1321-3R25-B (HD)
1321-3R35-B
1321-3R45-B (ND)
1321-3R35-B (HD)
1321-3RA2-B
1321-3RA4-C
1321-3RA4-B
1321-3RA8-C
1321-3RA12-B
1321-3RA12-B
1321-3RA18-B
1321-3RA25-B
1321-3RA35-B (ND)
1321-3RA25-B (HD)
1321-3RA35-B
1321-3RA45-B (ND)
1321-3RA35-B (HD)
1321-3R2-B
1321-3R4-C
1321-3R4-B
1321-3R8-C
1321-3R12-B
1321-3R12-B
1321-3R18-B
1321-3R25-B
1321-3R35-B (ND)
1321-3R25-B (HD)
1321-3R35-B
1321-3R45-B (ND)
1321-3R35-B (HD)
1321-3RA2-B
1321-3RA4-C
1321-3RA4-B
1321-3RA8-C
1321-3RA12-B
1321-3RA12-B
1321-3RA18-B
1321-3RA25-B
1321-3RA35-B (ND)
1321-3RA25-B (HD)
1321-3RA35-B
1321-3RA45-B (ND)
1321-3RA35-B (HD)
1321-3R1-C
1321-3R2-B
1321-3R4-C
1321-3RA1-C
1321-3RA2-B
1321-3RA4-C
1321-3R1-C
1321-3R2-B
1321-3R4-C
1321-3RA1-C
1321-3RA2-B
1321-3RA4-C
183
Appendix B
Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors

Output Ratings(1)
Normal Duty
HP
kW
3.0
2.2
5.0
4.0
7.5
5.5
10.0 7.5
15.0 11.0
20.0 15.0
Heavy Duty
HP
kW
3.0
2.2
5.0
4.0
7.5
5.5
10.0 7.5
15.0 11.0
15.0 11.0
25.0
18.5
20.0
15.0
30.0
22.0
25.0
18.5
Input Line Reactor(3)(4)

IP00
IP11
(Open Style)
(NEMA/UL Type 1)
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
1321-3R4-B
1321-3RA4-B
1321-3R8-C
1321-3RA8-C
1321-3R12-B
1321-3RA12-B
1321-3R12-B
1321-3RA12-B
1321-3R18-B
1321-3RA18-B
1321-3R25-B (ND) 1321-3RA25-B (ND)
1321-3R18-B (HD) 1321-3RA18-B (HD)
1321-3R35-C (ND) 1321-3RA35-C (ND)
1321-3R25-C (HD) 1321-3RA25-C (HD)
1321-3R35-C (ND) 1321-3RA35-C (ND)
1321-3R25-B (HD) 1321-3RA25-B (HD)
Output Line Reactor(3)(4)

IP00
IP11
(Open Style)
(NEMA/UL Type 1)
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
1321-3R4-B
1321-3RA4-B
1321-3R8-C
1321-3RA8-C
1321-3R12-B
1321-3RA12-B
1321-3R12-B
1321-3RA12-B
1321-3R18-B
1321-3RA18-B
1321-3R25-B (ND) 1321-3RA25-B (ND)
1321-3R18-B (HD) 1321-3RA18-B (HD)
1321-3R35-C (ND) 1321-3RA35-C (ND)
1321-3R25-C (HD) 1321-3RA25-C (HD)
1321-3R35-C (ND) 1321-3RA35-C (ND)
1321-3R25-B (HD) 1321-3RA25-B (HD)
(1) Normal Duty and Heavy Duty ratings for 15 HP (11 kW) and below are identical except for 200...240V 3-Phase 15 HP (11 kW) drive.
(2) Standard 3-phase reactors can be used for 1-phase applications by routing each of the two supply conductors through an outside
coil and leaving the center open.
(3) Catalog numbers listed are for 3% impedance at 60 Hz. 5% impedance reactor types are also available. See publication 1321-TD001.
(4) Input line reactors were sized based on the NEC fundamental motor amps. Output line reactors were sized based on the VFD rated
output currents.
184
The PowerFlex 520-series drive is available in five frame sizes. See the PowerFlex
520-Series Drive Ratings on page 175 for information on power ratings.
PowerFlex 520-Series Drive Weight
Frame Size
A
B
C
D
E
Weight (kg/lb)
1.1 / 2.4
1.6 / 3.5
2.3 / 5.0
3.9 / 8.6
12.9 / 28.4
IP 20/Open Type Frame A

Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
72.0 (2.83)
57.5 (2.26)
152.0 (5.98)
Esc
172.0 (6.77)
Sel
92.7 (3.65)
140.0 (5.51)
Product Dimensions
Appendix B
6.0 (0.24)
185
Appendix B
IP 20/Open Type Frame B

87.0 (3.43)
72.5 (2.85)
180.0 (7.09)
Sel
92.7 (3.65)
168.0 (6.61)
Esc
172.0 (6.77)
6.0 (0.24)
IP 20/Open Type Frame C

184.0 (7.24)
Sel
92.7 (3.65)
207.0 (8.15)
Esc
220.0 (8.66)
109.0 (4.29)
90.5 (3.56)
6.0 (0.24)
186
Appendix B
IP 20/Open Type Frame D

212.0 (8.35)
130.0 (5.12)
Sel
247.0 (9.72)
Esc
260.0 (10.24)
116.0 (4.57)
6.0 (0.24)
IP 20/Open Type Frame E

185.0 (7.28)
160.0 (6.30)
300.0 (11.81)
Sel
280.0 (11.02)
Esc
279.0 (10.98)
7.6 (0.30)
187
Appendix B

25-FAN1-70C
Specifications
Rated Voltage
Operation Voltage
Input Current
Speed (Reference)
Maximum Air Flow (At zero static pressure)
Maximum Air Pressure (At zero air flow)
Acoustical Noise
Insulation Type
Frame Size
Wire Size
Torque
25-FAN2-70C
25-FAN1-70C
24V DC
14...27.6V DC
0.1 A
7000 rpm
0.575 m3/min
7.70 mmH2O
40.5 dB-A
UL Class A
Frame A...D
0.32 mm2 (22 AWG)
0.29...0.39 Nm (2.6...3.47 lb-in.)
25-FAN2-70C
0.15 A
4500 10% rpm
1.574 m3/min
9.598 mmH2O
46.0 dB-A
Frame E
IP 20/Open Type with Control Module Fan Kit Frame A...C

IMPORTANT
188
An external 24V DC power source is required when using

the Control Module Fan Kit with drive frames A, B, and C.
Esc
32.0 (1.26)
220.0 (8.66)
32.0 (1.26)
Sel
109.0 (4.29)
90.5 (3.56)
Sel
207.0 (8.15)
Esc
180.0 (7.09)
87.0 (3.43)
72.5 (2.85)
Frame C
168.0 (6.61)
Sel
140.0 (5.51)
Esc
152.0 (5.98)
72.0 (2.83)
57.5 (2.26)
Frame B
32.0 (1.26)
Frame A
Appendix B
IP 20/Open Type with Control Module Fan Kit Frame D...E

Frame E
130.0 (5.12)
Sel
IMPORTANT
300.0 (11.81)
Esc
280.0 (11.02)
Sel
247.0 (9.72)
Esc
260.0 (10.24)
52.0 (2.05)
116.0 (4.57)
196.0 (7.72)
185.0 (7.28)
160.0 (6.30)
32.0 (1.26)
Frame D
Remove the label to access the built-in 24V supply on drive frames D and E for use with the
Control Module Fan Kit.
189
Appendix B
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame A
15.0 (0.59)

72.0 (2.83)
Sel
92.7 (3.65)
Esc
172.0 (6.77)
140.0 (5.51)
152.0 (5.98)
219.0 (8.62)
57.5 (2.26)
IP 30/NEMA 1/ UL Type 1 top panel
6.0 (0.24)
51.1 (2.01)
IP 30/NEMA 1/ UL Type 1 conduit box

21.0 (0.82)
64.7 (2.55)
88.2 (3.47)
111.9 (4.41)
135.4 (5.33)
21.5 (0.85)
190
Appendix B
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame B

15.0 (0.59)

87.0 (3.43)
Sel
92.7 (3.65)
168.0 (6.61)
180.0 (7.09)
Esc
172.0 (6.77)
218.0 (8.58)
72.5 (2.85)
6.1 (0.24)
66.1 (2.60)
63.1 (2.48)

33.5 (1.32)
23.9 (0.94)
21.5 (0.85)
67.3 (2.65)
88.3 (3.48)
108.5 (4.27)
128.5 (5.06)
27.5 (1.08)
191
Appendix B
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame C
15.0 (0.59)
184.0 (7.24)
Sel
92.7 (3.65)
207.0 (8.15)
222.0 (8.66)
Esc
255.0 (10.04)
109.0 (4.29)
90.5 (3.56)
6.0 (0.24)
80.5 (3.17)
66.5 (2.62)

34.5 (1.36)
26.5 (1.04)
21.5 (0.85)
82.2 (3.24)
123.3 (4.85)
27.5 (1.08)
192
Appendix B
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame D
15.0 (0.59)
Esc
Sel

212.0 (8.35)
247.0 (9.72)
260.0 (10.24)
295.0 (11.61)
130.0 (5.12)
116.0 (4.57)
6.0 (0.24)
96.0 (3.78)
70.0 (2.76)

44.0 (1.73)
30.0 (1.18)
21.5 (0.85)
109.8 (4.32)
153.3 (6.04)
33.5 (1.32)
193
Appendix B
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame E

15.0 (0.59)
Esc

279.0 (10.98)
280.0 (11.02)
300.0 (11.81)
350.0 (13.78)
185.0 (7.28)
160.0 (6.30)
Sel
7.6 (0.30)
127.5 (5.02)
82.5 (3.25)

62.5 (2.46)
42.5 (1.67)
21.5 (0.85)
164.0 (6.46)
181.0 (7.13)
212.0 (8.35)
43.7 (1.72)
194
Appendix B
EMC Line Filter Frame A

Filter can be mounted onto the back of the drive.
55.0 (2.17)
72.0 (2.83)
30.0 (1.18)
54.0 (2.13)
223.0
(8.78)
20.0 (0.79)
5.5 (0.22)
234.0
(9.21) 223.0
(8.78)
23.0 (0.91)
5.5 (0.22)
54.0 (2.13)
EMC Line Filter Frame B

70.0 (2.76)
87.0 (3.43)
35.0 (1.38)
58.0 (2.28)
258.0
(10.16)
25.0 (0.98)
5.5 (0.22)
270.0
(10.63)
258.0
(10.16)
24.0 (0.94)
5.5 (0.22)
58.0 (2.28)
195
Appendix B
EMC Line Filter Frame C

70.0 (2.76)
37.0 (1.46)
109.0 (4.29)
76.0 (2.99)
275.0
(10.83)
263.0
(10.35)
263.0
(10.35)
25.0 (0.98)
5.5 (0.22)
28.0 (1.10)
76.0 (2.99)
5.5 (0.22)
EMC Line Filter Frame D

80.0 (3.15)
33.0 (1.30)
196
130.0 (5.12)
90.0 (3.54)
28.0 (1.10)
298.0
(11.73)
33.0 (1.30)
310.0
(12.20)
5.5 (0.22)
298.0
(11.73)
28.0 (1.10)
90.0 (3.54)
5.5 (0.22)
Appendix B
EMC Line Filter Frame E

33.0 (1.30)
80.0 (3.15)
375.0
(14.76)
33.0 (1.30)
155.0 (6.10)
110.0 (4.33)
28.0 (1.10)
5.5 (0.22)
390.0
(15.35)
375.0
(14.76)
28.0 (1.10)
110.0 (4.33)
5.5 (0.22)
197
Appendix B
Optional Accessories and Kits Installing a Communication Adapter

1. Insert the communication adapter interface connector into the Control
Module. Make sure the indicator line on the connector is aligned with the
surface of the Control Module.
For PowerFlex 523
Communication
adapter interface
connector
For PowerFlex 525

Communication
adapter interface
connector
2. Align the connectors on the communication adapter to the

communication adapter interface connector, then push the back cover
down.
198
Appendix B
3. Press along the edges of the back cover until it snaps firmly into place.
Communication
adapter interface
connector
Removing a Communication Adapter

1. Insert a finger into the slot at the top of the back cover. Lift to separate the
back cover from the Control Module.
199
Appendix B
Notes:
200
Appendix

PowerFlex 520-series drives support the RS485 (DSI) protocol to allow efficient
operation with Rockwell Automation peripherals. In addition, some Modbus
functions are supported to allow simple networking. PowerFlex 520-series drives
can be multi-dropped on an RS485 network using Modbus protocol in RTU
mode.
PowerFlex 520-Series Drive Network
Esc
Esc
Sel
Esc
Sel
Esc
Sel
Sel
Controller
For information regarding EtherNet/IP or other communication protocols, refer

to the appropriate user manual.
Network Wiring
Network wiring consists of a shielded 2-conductor cable that is daisy-chained

from node to node.
ATTENTION: Never attempt to connect a Power over Ethernet (PoE) cable to the
RS485 port. Doing so may damage the circuitry.
Network Wiring Diagram Example
PowerFlex 525
Node 1
Master
TxRxD+
120 ohm resistor
TxRxD-
TxRxD+
Shield
RS485
(DSI)
TxRxD-
5
Shield
PowerFlex 523
Node 2
5
X
TxRxD+
TxRxDShield
C1 C2
AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P
TxRxD+
TxRxD-
IMPORTANT
PowerFlex 525
Node n
120 ohm resistor
FRONT
5
PIN 1
RS485
(DSI)
PIN 8
C1 C2
TxRxD+
TxRxD-
DC- DC+ BRBR+
DC- DC+ BRBR+
The shield is connected at ONLY ONE end of each cable segment.
201
Appendix C
Only pins 4 and 5 on the RJ45 plug should be wired. The other pins on the
PowerFlex 520-series drives RJ45 socket must not be connected because they
contain power, etc. for other Rockwell Automation peripheral devices.
Wiring terminations on the master controller will vary depending on the master
controller used and TxRxD+ and TxRxD- are shown for illustration
purposes only. Refer to the master controllers user manual for network
terminations. Note that there is no standard for the + and - wires, and
consequently Modbus device manufacturers interpret them differently. If you
have problems with initially establishing communications, try swapping the two
network wires at the master controller.
Standard RS485 wiring practices apply.
Termination resistors need to be applied at each end of the network cable.
RS485 repeaters may need to be used for long cable runs, or if greater than
32 nodes are needed on the network.
Network wiring should be separated from power wires by at least
0.3 meters (1 foot).
Network wiring should only cross power wires at a right angle.
I/O Terminal C1 (RJ45 Shield) for the Ethernet and DSI network cables on the
PowerFlex 520-series drive must also be connected to PE ground (there are two
PE terminals on the drive). The shield for the network cables should be
connected to PE ground at one end only.
I/O Terminal C2 (Comm Common) is internally tied to Network Common for
the network signals, and NOT to RJ45 Shield. Tying I/O Terminal C2 to PE
ground may improve noise immunity in some applications.
See I/O Control Terminal Designations on page 40 and page 43 for more
information.
Parameter Configuration
The following PowerFlex 520-series drive parameters are used to configure the
drive to operate on a DSI network.
Configuring Parameters for DSI Network
Parameter
Details
Set to 3 Serial/DSI if Start is controlled from the network.
Set to 3 Serial/DSI if the Speed Reference is controlled from the network.
Sets the data rate for the RS485 (DSI) Port. All nodes on the network must be
set to the same data rate.
C124 [RS485 Node Addr] Sets the node address for the drive on the network. Each device on the
network requires a unique node address.
C125 [Comm Loss Action] Selects the drives response to communication problems.
Sets the time that the drive will remain in communication loss before the
drive implements C125 [Comm Loss Action].
C127 [Comm Format]
Sets the transmission mode, data bits, parity and stop bits for the RS485 (DSI)
Port. All nodes on the network must be set to the same setting.
C121 [Comm Write Mode] Set to 0 Save when programming drive.
Set to 1 RAM only to only write to volatile memory.
202
Reference
page 87
page 87
page 101
page 101
page 101
page 101
page 102
page 101
Supported Modbus Function

Codes
The peripheral interface (DSI) used on PowerFlex 520-series drives supports

some of the Modbus function codes.
Supported Modbus Function Codes
Modbus Function Code (Decimal)
03
06
16 (10 Hexadecimal)
IMPORTANT
Writing (06) Logic Command

Data
Appendix C
Command
Read Holding Registers
Preset (Write) Single Register
Preset (Write) Multiple Registers
Modbus devices can be 0-based (registers are numbered starting at 0) or 1based (registers are numbered starting at 1). Depending on the Modbus
Master used, the register addresses listed on the following pages may need to
be offset by +1. For example, Logic Command may be register address 8192 for
some master devices (e.g. ProSoft 3150-MCM SLC Modbus scanner) and 8193
for others (e.g. PanelViews).
The PowerFlex 520-series drive can be controlled through the network by

sending Function Code 06 writes to register address 2000H (Logic Command).
P046 [Start Source 1] must be set to 3 Serial/DSI in order to accept the
commands. PowerFlex 523 drives support only Velocity bit definitions.
PowerFlex 525 drives can use Parameter C122 [Cmd Stat Select] to select either
Velocity or Position bit definitions.
TIP
Powerup/Reset the drive after selecting an option for C122 [Cmd Stat Select]
for the change to take effect.
203
Appendix C
Velocity Bit Definitions

Comm Logic Command C122 = 0 Velocity
Address (Decimal)
Bit(s)
2000H (8192)
0
1
2
3
5, 4
6
7
9, 8
11, 10
14, 13, 12
15
204
Description
1 = Stop, 0 = Not Stop
1 = Start, 0 = Not Start
1 = Jog, 0 = No Jog
1 = Clear Faults, 0 = Not Clear Faults
00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = No Command
1 = Force Keypad Control, 0 = Not Force Keypad Control
1 = MOP Increment, 0 = Not Increment
00 = No Command
01 = Accel Rate 1 Enable
10 = Accel Rate 2 Enable
11 = Hold Accel Rate Selected
00 = No Command
01 = Decel Rate 1 Enable
10 = Decel Rate 2 Enable
11 = Hold Decel Rate Selected
000 = No Command
001 = Freq. Source = P047 [Speed Reference1]
100 = A410 [Preset Freq 0]
1 = MOP Decrement, 0 = Not Decrement
Appendix C
Position Bit Definitions

Comm Logic Command C122 = 1 Position
Address (Decimal)
Bit(s)
2000H (8192)
0
1
2
3
5, 4
6
7
10, 9, 8
11
12
13
14
15
Writing (06) Comm

Frequency Command
Description
1 = Stop, 0 = Not Stop
1 = Start, 0 = Not Start
1 = Jog, 0 = No Jog
1 = Clear Faults, 0 = Not Clear Faults
00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = No Command
1 = Logic In 1
1 = Logic In 2
000 = Freq. and Position Step 0
1 = Find Home
1 = Hold Step
1 = Pos Redefine
1 = Sync Enable
1 = Traverse Disable
The PowerFlex 520-series drive Comm Frequency Command can be controlled

through the network by sending Function Code 06 writes to register address
2001H (Comm Frequency Command).
Comm Frequency Command
Reference
Address (Decimal)
2001H (8193)
Reading (03) Logic Status

Data
Description
Used by internal comm modules to control the reference of the drive. In units of
0.01 Hz.
The PowerFlex 520-series drive Logic Status data can be read through the
network by sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 2100H (Logic
Status). PowerFlex 523 drives support only Velocity bit definitions.
PowerFlex 525 drives can use Parameter C122 [Cmd Stat Select] to select either
Velocity or Position bit definitions.
205
Appendix C
Velocity Bit Definitions

Comm Logic Status C122 = 0 Velocity
Address (Decimal)
Bit(s)
2100H (8448)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
1 = Ready, 0 = Not Ready
1 = Active (Running), 0 = Not Active
1 = Cmd Forward, 0 = Cmd Reverse
1 = Rotating Forward, 0 = Rotating Reverse
1 = Accelerating, 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Decelerating, 0 = Not Decelerating
Not Used
1 = Faulted, 0 = Not Faulted
1 = At Reference, 0 = Not At Reference
1 = Main Freq Controlled by Active Comm
1 = Operation Cmd Controlled by Active Comm
1 = Parameters have been locked
Digital Input 1 Status (DigIn TermBlk 05)
Position Bit Definitions

Comm Logic Status C122 = 1 Position
Address (Decimal)
Bit(s)
2100H (8448)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
206
Description
1 = Ready, 0 = Not Ready
1 = Active (Running), 0 = Not Active
1 = Cmd Forward, 0 = Cmd Reverse
1 = Rotating Forward, 0 = Rotating Reverse
1 = Accelerating, 0 = Not Accelerating
1 = Decelerating, 0 = Not Decelerating
1 = Forward Travel Position, 0 = Reverse Travel Position
1 = Faulted, 0 = Not Faulted
1 = At Reference, 0 = Not At Reference
1 = At Position, 0 = Not At Position
1 = At Home, 0 = Not At Home
1 = Drive Homed, 0 = Not Drive Homed
1 = Sync Hold, 0 = Not Sync Hold
1 = Sync Ramp, 0 = Not Sync Ramp
1 =Traverse On, 0 = Traverse Off
1 = Traverse Decel, 0 = Not Traverse Decel
Reading (03) Drive Error

Codes
Appendix C
The PowerFlex 520-series Error Code data can be read through the network by
sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 2101H (Drive Error Codes).
Drive Error Codes
Logic Status
Address (Decimal) Value (Decimal)
2101H (8449)
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
15
21
29
33
38
39
40
41
42
43
48
59
63
64
70
71
72
73
80
81
82
83
91
94
100
101
105
106
107
109
110
111
114
122
Description
No Fault
Auxiliary Input
Power Loss
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Motor Stalled
Motor Overload
Heatsink Overtemperature
Control Module Overtemperature
HW Overcurrent (300%)
Ground Fault
Load Loss
Output Phase Loss
Analog Input Loss
Auto Restart Tries
Phase U to Ground Short
Phase V to Ground Short
Phase W to Ground Short
Phase UV Short
Phase UW Short
Phase VW Short
Parameters Defaulted
Safety Open
Software Overcurrent
Drive Overload
Power Unit Fail
DSI Network Loss
Option Card Network Loss
Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter Network Loss
AutoTune Fail
DSI Communication Loss
Option Card Communication Loss
Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter Communication Loss
Encoder Loss
Function Loss
Parameter Checksum Error
External Storage
Control Module Connect Error
Incompatible Control-Power Module
Unrecognized Control-Power Module
Mismatched Control-Power Module
Keypad Membrane
Safety Hardware
Microprocessor Failure
I/O Board Fail
207
Appendix C
Drive Error Codes

Logic Status
Address (Decimal) Value (Decimal)
2101H (8449)
125
126
127
Reading (03) Drive

Operational Values
Description
Flash Update Required
Non Recoverable Error
DSI Flash Update Required
The PowerFlex 520-series Drive Operational Values can be read through the
network by sending Function Code 03 reads to register addresses
2102H...210AH.
Drive Operational Values
Reference
Address (Decimal)
2102H (8450)
2103H (8451)
2104H (8452)
2105H (8453)
2106H (8454)
Description
Frequency Command (xxx.xx Hz)
Output Frequency (xxx.xx Hz)
Output Current (xxx.xx A)
DC-BUS Voltage (xxxV)
Output Voltage (xxx.xV)
Reading (03) and Writing

(06) Drive Parameters
To access drive parameters, the Modbus register address equals the parameter
number. For example, a decimal 1 is used to address Parameter b001 [Output
Freq] and decimal 41 is used to address Parameter P041 [Accel Time 1].
Additional Information
See http://www.ab.com/drives/ for additional information.
208
Appendix
Velocity StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/

Counter Functions
Four PowerFlex 520-series logic functions provide the capability to program

simple logic functions without a separate controller.
Velocity StepLogic Function (specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only)
Steps through up to eight preset speeds based on programmed logic.
Programmed logic can include conditions that need to be met from digital
inputs programmed as Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 before stepping from
one preset speed to the next. A timer is available for each of the eight steps
and is used to program a time delay before stepping from one preset speed
to the next. The status of a digital output can also be controlled based on
the step being executed.
Basic Logic Function (specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only)
Up to two digital inputs can be programmed as Logic In 1 and/or Logic
In 2. A digital output can be programmed to change state based on the
condition of one or both inputs based on basic logic functions such as
AND, OR, NOR. The basic logic functions can be used with or without
StepLogic.
Timer Function
A digital input can be programmed for Timer Start. A digital output can
be programmed as a Timer Out with an output level programmed to the
desired time. When the timer reaches the time programmed into the
output level the output will change state. The timer can be reset with a
digital input programmed as Reset Timer.
Counter Function
A digital input can be programmed for Counter In. A digital output can
be programmed as Counter Out with an output level programmed to the
desired number of counts. When the counter reaches the count
programmed into the output level the output will change state. The
counter can be reset with a digital input programmed as Reset Counter.
TIP
Use the Wizard in Connected Components Workbench to simplify setup instead

of manually configuring the parameters.
209
Appendix D
Velocity StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions
Velocity StepLogic Using

Timed Steps
IMPORTANT
This function is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
To activate this function, set one of the three speed reference sources, parameter
P047, P049 or P051[Speed Referencex] to 13 Step Logic and activate that
speed reference source. Three parameters are used to configure the logic, speed
reference and time for each step.
Logic is defined using parameters L180...L187 [Stp Logic x].
Preset Speeds are set with parameters A410...A417 [Preset Freq 0...7].
Time of operation for each step is set with parameters L190...L197 [Stp
Logic Time x].
The direction of motor rotation can be forward or reverse.
Using Timed Steps
Step 0
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6
Step 7
Forward
0
Reverse
Time
Velocity StepLogic Sequence

Sequence begins with a valid start command.
A normal sequence begins with Step 0 and transition to the next step when
the corresponding StepLogic time has expired.
Step 7 is followed by Step 0
Sequence repeats until a stop is issued or a fault condition occurs.
Velocity StepLogic Using

Basic Logic Functions
IMPORTANT
This function is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Digital input and digital output parameters can be configured to use logic to
transition to the next step. Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 are defined by programming
parameters t062...t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] to 24 Logic In 1 or
25 Logic In 2.
Example
Run at Step 0.
Transition to Step 1 when Logic In 1 is true.
Logic senses the edge of Logic In 1 when it transitions from off to on.
Logic In 1 is not required to remain on.
210
Appendix D
Transition to Step 2 when both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 are true.

The drive senses the level of both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 and transitions
to Step 2 when both are on.
Transition to Step 3 when Logic In 2 returns to a false or off state.
Inputs are not required to remain in the on condition except under the
logic conditions used for the transition from Step 2 to Step 3.
Start
Step 0
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Frequency
Logic In 1
Logic In 2
Time
The step time value and the basic logic may be used together to satisfy machine
conditions. For instance, the step may need to run for a minimum time period
and then use the basic logic to trigger a transition to the next step.
Start
Step 0
Step 1
Frequency
Logic In 1
Logic In 2
Time
Timer Function
Digital inputs and outputs control the timer function and are configured with
parameters t062...t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] set to 19 Timer Start
and 21 Reset Timer.
Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate when the
level is reached. Level parameters t077 [Relay Out1 Level], t082[Relay Out2
Level], t070 [Opto Out1 Level] and t073 [Opto Out2 Level] are used to set the
desired time in seconds.
Parameters t076 [Relay Out1 Sel], t081 [Relay Out2 Sel], t069 [Opto Out1 Sel]
and t072 [Opto Out2 Sel] are set to 25 Timer Out and causes the output to
change state when the preset level is reached.
Example
Drive starts up and accelerates to 30 Hz.
After 30 Hz has been maintained for 20 seconds, a 4-20 mA analog input
becomes the reference signal for speed control.
211
Appendix D
The timer function is used to select a preset speed with a 20 second run
time that overrides the speed reference while the digital input is active.
Parameters are set to the following options:
P047 [Speed Reference1] = 6 4-20mA Input
P049 [Speed Reference2] = 7 Preset Freq
t062 [DigIn TermBlk 02] = 1 Speed Ref 2
t063 [DigIn TermBlk 03] = 19 Timer Start
t076 [Relay Out1 Sel] = 25 Timer Out
t077 [Relay Out1 Level] = 20.0 Secs
A411 [Preset Freq 1] = 30.0 Hz
The control terminal block is wired such that a start command will also
trigger the timer start.
The relay output is wired to I/O Terminal 02 (DigIn TermBlk 02) so that
it forces the input on when the timer starts.
After the timer is complete, the output is turned off releasing the preset
speed command. The drive defaults to following the analog input
reference as programmed.
Note that a Reset Timer input is not required for this example since the Timer
Start input both clears and starts the timer.
Counter Function
Digital inputs and outputs control the counter function and are configured with
parameters t062...t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] set to 20 Counter In
and 22 Reset Countr.
Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate when the
level is reached. Level parameters t077 [Relay Out1 Level], t082[Relay Out2
Level], t070 [Opto Out1 Level] and t073 [Opto Out2 Level] are used to set the
desired count value.
Parameters t076 [Relay Out1 Sel], t081 [Relay Out2 Sel], t069 [Opto Out1 Sel]
and t072 [Opto Out2 Sel] are set to 26 Counter Out which causes the output
to change state when the level is reached.
Example
A photo eye is used to count packages on a conveyor line.
An accumulator holds the packages until 5 are collected.
A diverter arm redirects the group of 5 packages to a bundling area.
The diverter arm returns to its original position and triggers a limit switch
that resets the counter.
Parameters are set to the following options:
t065 [DigIn TermBlk 05] = 20 Counter In
t066 [DigIn TermBlk 06] = 22 Reset Countr
t076 [Relay Out1 Sel] = 26 Counter Out
t077 [Relay Out1 Level] = 5.0 Counts
212
Appendix D
Output
Frequency
Start
Relay Out
Photo Eye
DigIn TermBlk 05
Counter In
DigIn TermBlk 06
Reset Counter
Limit Switch
Velocity StepLogic
Parameters
Code Descriptions for Parameters L180...L187

Digit 4
0
Digit 3
0
Digit 2
F
Digit 1
1
Digit 4 Defines the action during the step currently executing

Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
Accel/Decel Parameter
Used
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
StepLogic Output State
Commanded Direction
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
Digit 3 Defines what step to jump to or how to end program when the logic conditions specified
in Digit 2 are met.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
Logic
Jump to Step 0
Jump to Step 1
Jump to Step 2
Jump to Step 3
Jump to Step 4
Jump to Step 5
Jump to Step 6
Jump to Step 7
213
Appendix D
Digit 2 Defines what logic must be met to jump to a step other than the very next step.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
Description
Skip Step (jump immediately)
Step based on the time programmed in the respective [Stp Logic Time x] parameter.
Step if Logic In 1 is active (logically true)
Step if Logic In 1 is not active (logically false)
Step if either Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is active (logically true)
Step if both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 is active (logically true)
Step if neither Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is active (logically true)
Step if Logic In 1 is active (logically true) and Logic In 2 is not active (logically false)
Step if Logic In2 is active (logically true) and Logic In 1 is not active (logically false)
Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is active (logically true)
Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is not active (logically false)
Do not step OR no jump to, so use Digit 0 logic
Logic
SKIP
TIMED
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
OR
AND
NOR
XOR
XOR
TIMED AND
TIMED AND
TIMED OR
TIMED OR
IGNORE
Digit 1 Defines what logic must be met to jump to the very next step.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
214
Description
Skip Step (jump immediately)
Step based on the time programmed in the respective [Stp Logic Time x] parameter.
Step if either Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is active (logically true)
Step if both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 is active (logically true)
Step if neither Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is active (logically true)
Use logic programmed in Digit 1
Logic
SKIP
TIMED
TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
OR
AND
NOR
XOR
XOR
TIMED AND
TIMED AND
TIMED OR
TIMED OR
IGNORE
Appendix
Encoder/Pulse Train Usage and Position

StepLogic Application
Encoder and Pulse Train
Usage
The PowerFlex 520-series drives include a pulse train input built into the
terminal block. PowerFlex 525 drives also support an optional encoder card. The
pulse train and encoder can be used for many of the same functions, but the pulse
train supports up to 100 kHz at 24V, and uses the drive built-in terminal block.
The encoder supports up to 250 kHz dual channel at 5, 12 or 24V and requires
the optional encoder board to be installed. When A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] is set
to a value other than zero, the drive is set to use an encoder or pulse train. The
drive will use the encoder or pulse train in several ways depending on the settings
of other parameters. The drive will use the encoder or pulse train as shown below
(listed in order of priority):
1. If enabled by P047, P049, or P051 [Speed Referencex], the encoder or
pulse train will be used directly as a commanded speed (normally used
with a pulse train) or as a position reference (normally used with a
quadrature encoder).
2. If not enabled by the Speed Reference parameters, the encoder or pulse
train can be used with the PID function if enabled by A459 or A471 [PID
x Ref Sel], or A460 or A472 [PID x Fdback Sel].
3. If not enabled by the Speed Reference or PID function parameters, the
encoder or pulse train can be used with A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] for
direct feedback and trim of the speed command. The normal slip
compensation is not used in this case. Instead the drive will use the encoder
or pulse train to determine actual output frequency and adjust the output
frequency to match the command. Parameters A538 [Ki Speed Loop] and
A539 [Kp Speed Loop] are used in this control loop. The primary benefit
of this mode is increased speed accuracy when compared to open-loop slip
compensation. It does not provide speed bandwidth improvement.
IMPORTANT
The encoder usage, and position StepLogic application covered in this chapter
is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
215
Appendix E
Encoder/Pulse Train Usage and Position StepLogic Application
Encoder Interface
The incremental encoder option card can source 5 or 12 volt power and accept 5,
12 or 24 volt single ended or differential inputs. See Appendix B for ordering
information.
Only the 25-ENC-1 Encoder will work properly in the PowerFlex 525 drive.
Installing an incorrect encoder card, such as the PowerFlex 527 25-ENC-2 will
cause damage to the PowerFlex 525 drive.
IMPORTANT
No.
+V
Cm
BB
AA
+V
Cm
BB
AA
12V
5V
Signal
5...12V Power(1)(2)
Power Return
Encoder B (NOT)
Encoder B
Encoder A (NOT)
Encoder A
Description
Output
DIP switch selects 12 or 5 volt power supplied at terminals +V and Cm

for the encoder.
Internal power source 250 mA (isolated).

Quadrature B input.
Single channel, pulse train or quadrature A input.
(1) When using 12V Encoder power, 24V I/O power, maximum output current at I/O Terminal 11 is 50 mA.
(2) If Encoder requires 24V power, it must be supplied by an external power source.
Encoder Wiring Examples
Internal (drive)
12V DC, 250mA
Encoder Signal
Single-Ended,
Dual Channel
B
AA
SHLD
External
Power
Supply
to SHLD
to Power Supply
Common
+V
Cm
BB
AA
I/O
Connection Example
Encoder Power
External
Power Source
to
B NOT
B
A NOT
A
Common
I/O
Connection Example
Encoder Power
+12V DC
(250 mA)
Internal Drive +V
Cm
Power
Common
B-
Encoder Signal
Differential,
Dual Channel
+V
Cm
BB
AA
to SHLD
B NOT
B
A NOT
A
to SHLD
Wiring Notes
The encoder option card can supply 5V or 12V power (250 mA maximum) for
an encoder. Be sure the DIP switch is set properly for the encoder. In general, 12V
will provide higher noise immunity.
The encoder can handle 5V, 12V, or 24V inputs, but the pulse train can handle
only 24V inputs. The inputs will automatically adjust to the voltage applied and
no additional drive adjustment is necessary. If a single-channel input is used, it
must be wired between the A (signal) and A- (signal common) channels.
216
IMPORTANT
Determine Encoder Pulse Per

Revolution (PPR)
Specification Based on Speed
Resolution
Appendix E
A quadrature encoder provides rotor speed and direction. Therefore, the

encoder must be wired such that the forward direction matches the motor
forward direction. If the drive is reading encoder speed but the position
regulator or other encoder function is not working properly, remove power to
the drive, then do one of the following:
Swap the A and A (NOT) encoder channels.
Swap the B and B (NOT) encoder channels.
Swap any two motor leads.
Drives will fault when an encoder is incorrectly wired and A535 [Motor Fdbk
Type] is set to 5 Quad Check.
Use the following formula to determine the encoder pulse per revolution (PPR)
specification based on the speed resolution.
1
Speed resolution (Hz) =
encoder pulse number x 4
x pole pairs
10-3 sec
TIP
The operating speed range will depend on the motor control mode selected
(SVC or VVC). For more information, see Performance with Encoder on
page 170.
Example 1
To determine the PPR for quadrature encoder, to achieve 0.06 Hz of speed
resolution on a 4-pole motor (2-pole pair) with a base speed of 60 Hz:
1
0.06 Hz =
encoder pulse number x 4
x2
10-3 sec
= ~8333 pulse
Therefore, select 8333 PPR or higher for the quadrature encoder to achieve the
desired speed resolution of 0.06 Hz.
Example 2
To determine the speed resolution, using a 1024 PPR quadrature incremental
encoder on a 4-pole (2-pole pair) motor:
1
Speed resolution (Hz) =
1024 x 4
x2
10-3 sec
= 0.49 Hz
Therefore, using a 1024 PPR quadrature encoder will give a speed resolution of
0.49 Hz.
217
Appendix E
Positioning Overview
The PowerFlex 525 drive includes a simple position regulator which can be used
in a variety of position applications without the need for multiple limit switches
or photo-eyes. This can be used as a stand-alone controller for simple
applications (up to 8 positions) or in conjunction with a controller for more
flexibility.
Please note that this is not intended to replace high end servo controllers or any
application that needs high bandwidth or very high torque at low speeds.
Common Guidelines for All

Applications
The position regulator can be configured for operation appropriate for a variety
of applications. Certain parameters will need to be adjusted in all cases.
P047 [Speed Reference1] must be set to 16 Positioning.
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] must be set to the match the feedback device.
Positioning mode must use A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] option 4.
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] Options
0 None indicates no encoder is used. This can not be used for
positioning.
1 Pulse Train is a single channel input, no direction, speed feedback
only. This should not be used for positioning. The Single Channel
selection is similar to a Pulse Train, but uses the standard encoder scaling
parameters.
2 Single Chan is a single channel input, no direction, speed feedback
only. This should not be used for positioning. Single channel uses the
standard encoder scaling parameters.
3 Single Check is a single channel input with encoder signal loss
detection. The drive will fault if it detects that the input pulses do not
match the expected motor speed. This should not be used for positioning.
4 Quadrature is a dual channel encoder input with direction and speed
from the encoder. This may be used for positioning control.
5 Quad Check is a dual channel encoder with encoder signal loss
detection. The drive will fault if it detects that the encoder speed does not
match the expected motor speed.
A544 [Reverse Disable] should be set to 0 Rev Enabled to allow bidirectional
movement necessary for position control.
P039 [Torque Perf Mode] default setting is 1 SVC. However, any mode can be
used to improve the low speed torque for positioning applications. For best
results, tune the application first. The autotune routine can be completed to
further improve the drive-motor performance.
218
Appendix E
A550 [Bus Reg Enable] default setting is 1 Enabled. If the deceleration time is
too short, the drive may overshoot the desired position. For best results, a longer
deceleration time may be necessary. A550 [Bus Reg Enable] can be disabled to
provide precise stopping movements, but the deceleration time will need to be
manually tuned so that it is long enough to avoid F005 OverVoltage faults.
A437 [DB Resistor Sel] default setting is 0 Disabled. If improved deceleration
performance is required a Dynamic Brake resistor can be used. If used, this
parameter should be set to the appropriate setting for the resistor selected.
P035 [Motor NP Poles] must be set to match the number of motor poles on the
motor driven by the PowerFlex 520-series drive.
A536 [Encoder PPR] must be set to match the number of pulses per revolution
of the encoder used (i.e., 1024 PPR Encoder).
A559 [Counts Per Unit] sets the number of encoder counts that will be used to
define one position unit. This allows the encoder positions to be defined in terms
of units important to the application. For example, if 1cm of travel on a conveyor
belt requires 0.75 turns of the motor, the motor encoder is 1024 PPR, and the
Motor Feedback type is set to Quadrature, then this parameter would need to be
set to (4 x 1024 x 0.75) = 3072 counts for one cm of travel. Then all other
positions could be setup in units of cm.
A564 [Encoder Pos Tol] indicates the desired position tolerance for the system.
This will determine how close the drive must be to the commanded position
before the drive will indicate At Home or At Position in units of raw encoder
pulses. This has no effect on the actual positioning control of the motor.
219
Appendix E
Positioning Operation
Parameter A558 [Positioning Mode] must be set to properly match the desired
operation of the positioning function.
A558 [Positioning Mode] Options
0 Time Steps uses Step Logic times. This mode ignores the Step Logic
settings and moves through the steps (Step 0 to Step 7 and back to Step 0)
based on the times programmed into L190...L197 [Stp Logic Time x].
This can be used when the desired position is based only on time. In
addition, this mode only accepts absolute positions in a positive direction
from home. This option provides an easy way to implement a simple
positioning program or to test the basic positioning setup. For additional
flexibility one of the other settings should be used.
1 Preset Input directly commands movement to any step based on the
status of the digital inputs programmed for Preset Freq. This setting
ignores the Step Logic Commands settings and instead the drive will move
directly to whatever step is currently commanded by A410...A425 [Preset
Freq x] and L200...L214 [Step Units x]. This is useful when an application
needs direct access to any position step based on discrete inputs. This
mode moves in the forward direction from Home and is an absolute move.
IMPORTANT
Advanced Step Logic options such as incremental move are not

available in this mode.
2 Step Logic provides a highly flexible mode of operation. This can be

used to move through the steps (Step 0 to Step 7 and back to Step 0) or can
jump to a different step at any time based on time or the status of digital
inputs or communication commands. In this mode the drive always starts
at Step 0 of the Step Logic profile.
3 Preset StpL is identical to 2 Step Logic except the drive will use the
current status of the Preset Inputs to determine which Step Logic step to
begin. This only affects the initial step. After start, the drive will move
through the steps in the same manner as if setting 2 was selected.
4 StpLogic-Lst is identical to 2 Step Logic except the drive will use
the step prior to its last stop command to determine which Step Logic step
to begin. This only affects the initial step. After start, the drive will move
through the steps in the same manner as if setting 2 was selected. This
allows a process to be stopped and then restarted at the position where it
stopped.
220
Appendix E
In all position modes, the following parameters will control the characteristics at
each step:
L200, L202, L204, L206, L208, L210, L212 and L214 [Step Units x] are the
number value to the left of the decimal (whole number) of the 8 positions desired
for an application, beginning with Step 0 (L200) and continuing with each step
until Step 7 (L214). For example, enter 2 into this parameter if you would like a
commanded position of 2.77.
L201, L203, L205, L207, L209, L211, L213 and L215 [Step Units F x] are the
number value to the right of the decimal (the portion less than 1) of the 8
positions desired for an application, beginning with Step 0 (L201) and
continuing with each step until Step 7 (L215). For example, enter 0.77 into this
parameter if you would like a commanded position of 2.77.
A410...A417 [Preset Freq x] are the parameters that define the maximum
frequency the drive will run at during the corresponding step. For example, if
[Preset Freq 2] is set to 40 Hz, the drive will accelerate to 40 Hz maximum when
moving to Position 2.
Frequency Source
IMPORTANT
Step Source
L180 [Stp Logic 0]
L181 [Stp Logic 1]
L182 [Stp Logic 2]
L183 [Stp Logic 3]
L184 [Stp Logic 4]
L185 [Stp Logic 5]
L186 [Stp Logic 6]
L187 [Stp Logic 7]
Position Source
L200 [Step Units 0]
L202 [Step Units 1]
L204 [Step Units 2]
L206 [Step Units 3]
L208 [Step Units 4]
L210 [Step Units 5]
L212 [Step Units 6]
L214 [Step Units 7]
The default value for A410 [Preset Freq 0] is 0.00 Hz. This value needs to be
changed or the drive will not be able to move during Step 0.
L190...L197 [Stp Logic Time x] are the parameters that define the time the drive
will remain in each corresponding step if that step is time-based. For example, if
L192 [Stp Logic Time 2] is set to 5.0 seconds and that step is time-based, the
drive will remain in Step 2 for 5.0 seconds. Note that this is the total time in that
step, not the time at that position. Therefore, it will include the time needed to
accelerate, run, and decelerate to that position.
L180...L187 [Stp Logic x] are the parameters that allow additional flexibility and
control various aspects of each step when a positioning mode is selected that
utilizes the Step Logic functions. Note that in Positioning mode these parameters
have a different function than when used for normal velocity Step Logic. Each of
the 4 digits controls one aspect of the each position step. The following is a listing
of the available settings for each digit:
221
Appendix E
Logic for next step

Logic to jump to a different step
Different step to jump
Step settings
Not Used
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Velocity Control Settings (Digit 4)

Required
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
StepLogic
Output State
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Settings (Digit 3)
Commanded
Direction
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
Settings (Digit 2 and 1)
Positioning Settings (Digit 4)

Required
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
StepLogic
Output State
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
TIP
Direction
From Home
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
Description
Jump to Step 0
Jump to Step 1
Jump to Step 2
Jump to Step 3
Jump to Step 4
Jump to Step 5
Jump to Step 6
Jump to Step 7
Type of
Command
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Absolute
Incremental
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
Description
Skip Step (Jump Immediately)
Step Based on [Stp Logic Time x]
Step if either Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is Active
Step if both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 are Active
Step if neither Logic In 1 nor Logic In 2 is Active
Do Not Step/Ignore Digit 2 Settings
Use the Wizard in Connected Components Workbench to simplify setup instead

of manually configuring the parameters.
Note: Incremental move commands will cause the drive to move the amount
specified based on the current position. Absolute commands are always with
reference to Home.
A565 [Pos Reg Filter] provides a low pass filter at the input of the position
regulator.
222
Appendix E
A566 [Pos Reg Gain] is a single adjustment for increasing or decreasing the
responsiveness of the position regulator. For faster response, the filter should be
reduced and/or the gain should be increased. For smoother response with less
overshoot, the filter should be increased and/or the gain should be reduced. In
general, the gain will have a larger effect on most systems than the filter.
Homing Routine
This drive supports incremental encoders only. Therefore, when the drive powers
up it will reset the current position to zero. If this is known to be correct the
position routine can be started without further adjustment. However, in most
applications the drive will need to be homed after each power-up and prior to
starting the position routine.
This can be accomplished in one of the following two ways:
1. Manual HomingProgram the following drive parameters:
t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] = 37 Pos Redefine
Program one of the digital inputs to 37 Pos Redefine. Then, move the
system into the home position with a run command, a jog command, or by
manually moving the system into the home position. Then, toggle the Pos
Redefine input. This will set the drive to Home at its current position
and d388 [Units Traveled H] and d389 [Units Traveled L] are set to zero.
Alternately, the Pos Redefine bit in A560 [Enh Control Word] can be
toggled instead of utilizing a digital input.
IMPORTANT The Pos Redefine input or bit must be returned to inactive before
starting the position routine. Otherwise the drive will continuously read
a position of 0 (home) and the position routine will not function
correctly.
2. Automatic Homing to Limit SwitchProgram the following drive
parameters:
t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] = 35 Find Home
Program one of the digital inputs to 35 Find Home.
t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] = 34 Home Limit
Program one of the digital inputs to 34 Home Limit. Normally, the
Home Limit input would be wired to a proximity switch or photo-eye
and will indicate the system is in the home position.
A562 [Find Home Freq] sets the frequency the drive will use while it is
moving to the home position during the automatic homing routine.
A563 [Find Home Dir] sets the direction the drive will use while it is
moving to the home position during the automatic homing routine.
223
Appendix E
To begin the automatic homing routine, activate the Find Home input and
then initiate a valid start command. The drive will then ramp to the speed set in
A562 [Find Home Freq] and in the direction set in A563 [Find Home Dir] until
the digital input defined as Home Limit is activated. If the drive passes this
point too quickly it will then reverse direction at 1/10th A562 [Find Home Freq]
to the point where the Home Limit switch reactivates. Approximately one second
after the routine finds home the drive will stop. Alternately, the Find Home
Freq and/or Home Limit bits in A560 [Enh Control Word] can be activated
instead of utilizing a digital input. The inputs or bits should be returned to
inactive after the routine is complete.
IMPORTANT
Encoder and Position

Feedback
After the position is reached the drive will stop. If the Find Home is removed
before the homing is complete, the drive will begin running the position
routine without the proper home. In this case Home will not be reset and the
position will be in relation to the power up position.
d376 [Speed Feedback] indicates the measured speed feedback or the calculated
speed feedback when no feedback device is selected. Parameter d376 [Speed
Feedback] is the number value to the left of the decimal (whole number) and
d377 [Speed Feedback F] is the value to the right of the decimal (the portion less
than 1).
d378 [Encoder Speed] indicates the measured speed of the feedback device. This
is useful if the encoder is not used for motor speed control. However, the encoder
must be used for some purpose in order for d378 [Encoder Speed] to indicate a
value. Parameter d378 [Encoder Speed] is the number value to the left of the
decimal (whole number) and d379 [Encoder Speed F] is the number to the right
of the decimal (the portion less than 1).
d388, d389 [Units Traveled x] indicate the current position of the system in
terms of units away from Home. Parameter d388 [Units Traveled H] is the
number value to the left of the decimal (whole number) and d389 [Units
Traveled L] is the number to the right of the decimal (the portion less than 1).
d387 [Position Status] indicates the status of the positioning functions. The
indication bits are:
Bit 0 Dir Positive indicates the current direction the drive has moved
from Home.
Bit 1 At Position indicates whether the drive is at its commanded
position. If the drive is within A564 [Encoder Pos Tol] of the commanded
position, this bit will be active.
Bit 2 At Home indicates whether the drive is at Home. If the drive is
within A564 [Encoder Pos Tol] of Home, this bit will be active.
224
Appendix E
Bit 3 Drive Homed indicates whether the drive has been homed since
power-up. This bit will be active once the drive has been homed either
manually or automatically. It will remain active until the next power down.
Use Over Communications
If 8 steps are not adequate for the application or if dynamic program changes are
required, many of the positioning functions can be controlled through an active
communication network. The following parameters will allow this control.
Repeated writes to parameters over a communication network can cause damage
to the drive EEPROM. This parameter allows the drive to accept parameter
changes without writing to the EEPROM.
IMPORTANT
Parameter values set prior to setting 1 RAM only are saved in RAM.

Selects velocity-specific or position/fibers-specific Command and Status Word
bit definitions for use over a communication network.
A560 [Enh Control Word]
This parameter allows many of the positioning functions to be completed
through parameter control using an explicit message. This allows the operation
over communications instead of with hardware inputs. The bits have the same
functions as the digital input options of the same name. Options relating to
positioning are:
Bit 0 Home Limit indicates the drive is at the home position.
Bit 1 Find Home causes the drive to find home at the next start
command. Deactivate this bit after completing the homing routine.
Bit 2 Hold Step overrides other inputs and causes the drive to remain at
its current step (running at zero speed once it reaches its position) until
released.
Bit 3 Pos Redefine resets the home position to the current position of
the machine. Deactivate this bit after completing the homing routine.
Bit 4 Sync Enable holds the existing frequency when A571 [Sync Time]
is set to enable speed synchronization. When this bit is deactivated the
drive will accelerate to the new commanded frequency based on A571
[Sync Time].
Bit 5 Traverse Dis disables the traverse function when this bit is active.
225
Appendix E
Bit 6 Logic In 1 provides an identical function and is logically ORed

with setting 24 Logic In 1 for t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk
xx]. It can be used to move through the Step Logic functions (speed or
position) using comms control without requiring actual digital input
transitions.
Bit 7 Logic In 2 provides an identical function and is logically ORed
with setting 25 Logic In 2 for t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk
xx]. It can be used to move through the Step Logic functions (speed or
position) using comms control without requiring actual digital input
transitions.
L200...L214 [Step Units x]
All of the position steps can be written to while the drive is running. The changes
will take place at the next move. For example, if step 0 is over-written while the
drive is moving to step 0, the drive will move to the previous commanded
position at step 0. The next time the drive is commanded to return to step 0 it will
proceed to the new position. One possible use of this capability is when an
application requires full control of the movement by a controller external to the
drive. The Step Logic program might be written to jump from step 0 back to step
0 when Input 1 is active. The controller could write any desired position to step 0
and then toggle the input 1 bit of A560 [Enh Control Word] to cause the drive to
move to the new position. This allows almost unlimited flexibility and can be
used with absolute or incremental moves.
Setup Notes
226
The RA computer tool (Connected Components Workbench) can make setup of

the positioning functions much easier. Refer to the latest versions for additional
tools or wizards which can aid in the setup.
Appendix
PID Set Up
PID Loop
The PowerFlex 520-series drive features built-in PID (proportional, integral,

derivative) control loops. The PID loop is used to maintain a process feedback
(such as pressure, flow or tension) at a desired set point. The PID loop works by
subtracting the PID feedback from a reference and generating an error value. The
PID loop reacts to the error, based on the PID Gains, and outputs a frequency to
try to reduce the error value to 0.
To enable the PID loop, P047, P049 or P051 [Speed Referencex] must be set to
11 PID1 Output or 12 PID2 Output, and the corresponding speed reference
activated.
PowerFlex 523 has one PID control loop.
PowerFlex 525 has two PID control loops, of which only one can be in use at any
time.
IMPORTANT
Exclusive Control and Trim Control are two basic configurations where the PID
loop may be used.
Exclusive Control
In Exclusive Control, the Speed Reference becomes 0, and the PID Output
becomes the entire Freq Command. Exclusive Control is used when A458 or
A470 [PID x Trim Sel] is set to option 0. This configuration does not require a
master reference, only a desired set point, such as a flow rate for a pump.
PID Loop
PID Ref
+
PID Fdbk
PID
Error
PID Prop Gain

+
PID Integ Time
PID
Output
Accel/Decel
Ramp
Freq
Command
PID Diff Rate
PID Selected
Example
In a pumping application, the PID Reference equals the Desired System
Pressure set point.
The Pressure Transducer signal provides PID Feedback to the drive.
Fluctuations in actual system pressure, due to changes in flow, result in a
PID Error value.
The drive output frequency increases or decreases to vary motor shaft
speed to correct for the PID Error value.
227
Appendix F
PID Set Up
The Desired System Pressure set point is maintained as valves in the system
are opened and closed causing changes in flow.
When the PID Control Loop is disabled, the Commanded Speed is the
Ramped Speed Reference.
Esc
Sel
PID Feedback =
Pressure Transducer Signal
Pump
PID Reference =
Desired System Pressure
Trim Control
In Trim Control, the PID Output is added to the Speed Reference. In Trim
mode, the output of the PID loop bypasses the accel/decel ramp as shown. Trim
Control is used when A458 or A470 [PID x Trim Sel] is set to any option other
than 0.
[Speed Referencex]
PID Loop
PID Ref
+
PID Fdbk
PID
Error
Accel/Decel
Ramp
PID Prop Gain

+
PID Integ Time
PID
Output
+
+
Output
Freq
PID Diff Rate
PID Selected
Example
In a winder application, the PID Reference equals the Equilibrium set
point.
The Dancer Pot signal provides PID Feedback to the drive. Fluctuations in
tension result in a PID Error value.
The Master Speed Reference sets the wind/unwind speed.
228
PID Set Up
Appendix F
As tension increases or decreases during winding, the Speed Reference is

trimmed to compensate. Tension is maintained near the Equilibrium set
point.
0V
PID Reference =
Equilibrium Set Point
PID Feedback =
Dancer Pot Signal
Esc
Sel
10V
[Speed Referencex]
PID Reference and Feedback
PID mode is enabled by setting P047, P049 or P051 [Speed Referencex] to

11 PID1 Output or 12 PID2 Output, and activating the corresponding speed
reference.
IMPORTANT
PowerFlex 523 has one PID control loop.

PowerFlex 525 has two PID control loops, of which only one can be in use at any
time.
If A459 or A471 [PID x Ref Sel] is not set to 0 PID Setpoint, PID can still be
disabled by select programmable digital input options (parameters t062, t063,
t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx]) such as Purge.
A459, A471 [PID x Ref Sel] Options
Options
0 PID Setpoint
1 Drive Pot
2 Keypad Freq
2 Serial/DSI
4 Network Opt
5 0-10V Input
Description
A464 or A476 [PID x Setpoint] will be used to set the value of the PID Reference.
The drive potentiometer will be used to set the value of the PID Reference.
The drive keypad will be used to set the value of the PID Reference.
The reference word from the Serial/DSI communication network becomes the PID Reference.
The reference word from a communication network option becomes the PID Reference.
Selects the 0-10V Input. Note that the PID will not function with a bipolar analog input. It will
ignore any negative voltages and treat them like a zero.
6 4-20mA Input Selects the 4-20 mA Input.
7 Preset Freq
A410...A425 [Preset Freq x] will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
8 AnlgIn Multi(1) The product of the 0-10V and 4-20mA Inputs will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
9 MOP Freq
A427 [MOP Freq] will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
10 Pulse Input
Pulse train will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
11 Step Logic(1) Step Logic will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
Encoder will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
12 Encoder(1)
13 Ethernet/IP(1) The reference word from the Ethernet/IP communication network becomes the PID Reference.
229
Appendix F
PID Set Up
A460 and A472 [PID x Fdback Sel] are used to select the source of the PID
feedback.
A460, A472 [PID x Fdback Sel] Options
Options
0 0-10V Input
Description
Selects the 0-10V Input (default setting). Note that the PID will not function with a bipolar analog
input. It will ignore any negative voltages and treat them like a zero.
1 4-20mA Input Selects the 4-20 mA Input.
2 Serial/DSI
Serial/DSI will be used as an input for the PID Feedback.
3 Network Opt The reference word from a communication network option becomes the PID Reference.
4 Pulse Input
Pulse train will be used as an input for the PID Feedback.
Encoder will be used as an input for the PID Feedback.
5 Encoder(1)
6 Ethernet/IP(1) Ethernet/IP will be used as an input for the PID Feedback.
Analog PID Reference Signals
Parameters t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] and t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] are used to
scale or invert an analog PID Reference or PID Feedback.
Scale Function
For a 0...5V signal, the following parameter settings are used so that a 0V signal =
0% PID Reference and a 5V signal = 100% PID Reference.
t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] = 0.0%
t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] = 50.0%
A459 [PID 1 Ref Sel] = 5 0-10V Input
12
Input Volts
10
8
6
4
2
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PID Reference (%)
Invert Function
For a 4-20 mA signal, the following parameter settings are used so that a 20 mA
signal = 0% PID Reference and a 4 mA signal = 100% PID Reference.
t095 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] = 100.0%
t096 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi] = 0.0%
230
PID Set Up
Appendix F
A459 [PID 1 Ref Sel] = 6 4-20mA Input

4-20 mA Input
24
20
16
12
8
4
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PID Reference (%)
PID Deadband
Parameters A465 and A477 [PID x Deadband] are used to set a range, in percent,
of the PID Reference that the drive will ignore.
Example
A465 [PID 1 Deadband] = 5.0%
The PID Reference is 25.0%
The PID Regulator will not act on a PID Error that falls between 20.0 and
30.0%
PID Preload
The value set in A466 or A478 [PID x Preload], in Hz, will be pre-loaded into
the integral component of the PID at any start or enable. This will cause the
drives frequency command to initially jump to that preload frequency, and the
PID loop starts regulating from there.
PID Enabled
PID Output
PID Pre-load Value
Freq Cmd
PID Pre-load Value > 0
PID Limits
A456 and A468 [PID x Trim Hi] and A457 and A469 [PID x Trim Lo] are used
to limit the PID output and are only used in trim mode. [PID x Trim Hi] sets the
maximum frequency for the PID output in trim mode. [PID x Trim Lo] sets the
reverse frequency limit for the PID output in trim mode. Note that when the
231
Appendix F
PID Set Up
PID reaches the Hi or Lo limit, the PID regulator stops integrating so that
windup does not occur.
PID Gains
The proportional, integral, and differential gains make up the PID regulator.
A461 and A473 [PID x Prop Gain]
The proportional gain (unitless) affects how the regulator reacts to the
magnitude of the error. The proportional component of the PID regulator
outputs a speed command proportional to the PID error. For example, a
proportional gain of 1 would output 100% of max frequency when the
PID error is 100% of the analog input range. A larger value for [PID x
Prop Gain] makes the proportional component more responsive, and a
smaller value makes it less responsive. Setting [PID x Prop Gain] to 0.00
disables the proportional component of the PID loop.
A462 and A474 [PID x Integ Time]
The integral gain (units of seconds) affects how the regulator reacts to
error over time and is used to get rid of steady state error. For example, with
an integral gain of 2 seconds, the output of the integral gain component
would integrate up to 100% of max frequency when the PID error is 100%
for 2 seconds. A larger value for [PID x Integ Time] makes the integral
component less responsive, and a smaller value makes it more responsive.
Setting [PID x Integ Time] to 0.0 disables the integral component of the
PID loop.
A463 and A475 [PID x Diff Rate]
The Differential gain (units of 1/seconds) affects the rate of change of the
PID output. The differential gain is multiplied by the difference between
the previous error and current error. Thus, with a large error the D has a
large effect and with a small error the D has less of an effect. This
parameter is scaled so that when it is set to 1.00, the process response is
0.1% of P044 [Maximum Freq] when the process error is changing at 1% /
second. A larger value for [PID x Diff Rate] makes the differential term
have more of an effect and a small value makes it have less of an effect. In
many applications, the D gain is not needed. Setting [PID x Diff Rate] to
0.00 (factory default) disables the differential component of the PID loop.
Guidelines for Adjusting the PID Gains

1. Adjust the proportional gain. During this step it may be desirable to
disable the integral gain and differential gain by setting them to 0. After a
step change in the PID Feedback:
If the response is too slow increase A461 or A473 [PID x Prop Gain].
If the response is too quick and/or unstable (see Unstable Response on
page 233), decrease A461 or A473 [PID x Prop Gain].
Typically, A461 or A473 [PID x Prop Gain] is set to some value below
the point where the PID begins to go unstable.
232
PID Set Up
Appendix F
2. Adjust the integral gain (leave the proportional gain set as in Step 1). After
a step change in the PID Feedback:
If the response is too slow (see Slow Response Over Damped on
page 233), or the PID Feedback does not become equal to the PID
Reference, decrease A462 or A474 [PID x Integ Time].
If there is a lot of oscillation in the PID Feedback before settling out
(see Oscillation Under Damped on page 233), increase A462 or
A474 [PID x Integ Time].
3. At this point, the differential gain may not be needed. However, if after
determining the values for A461 or A473 [PID x Prop Gain] and A462 or
A474 [PID x Integ Time]:
Response is still slow after a step change, increase A463 or A475 [PID x
Diff Rate].
Response is still unstable, decrease A463 or A475 [PID x Diff Rate].
The following figures show some typical responses of the PID loop at different
points during adjustment of the PID Gains.
Unstable Response
PID Reference
PID Feedback
Time
Slow Response Over Damped
PID Reference
PID Feedback
Time
Oscillation Under Damped
PID Reference
PID Feedback
Time
233
Appendix F
PID Set Up
Good Response Critically Damped
PID Reference
PID Feedback
Time
234
Appendix
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function, when used with other safety
components, helps provide protection according to EN ISO 13849 and
EN62061 for safe-off and protection against restart. The PowerFlex 525 SafeTorque-Off function is just one component in a safety control system.
Components in the system must be chosen and applied appropriately to achieve
the desired level of operator safeguarding.
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Overview
EC Type Examination Certification
EMC Instructions
Using PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off
Enabling PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off
Wiring
Verify Operation
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Operation
Connection Examples
PowerFlex 525 Certification for Safe-Torque-Off
IMPORTANT
PowerFlex 525 Safe-TorqueOff Overview
See page...
235
236
236
236
239
239
240
239
241
245
The Safe-Torque-Off function covered in this chapter is specific to

PowerFlex 525 drives only.
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function:

Provides the Safe-Torque-Off (STO) function defined in
EN 61800-5-2.
Blocks gate-firing signals from reaching the Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT) output devices of the drive. This prevents the IGBTs
from switching in the sequence necessary to generate torque in the motor.
Can be used in combination with other safety devices to fulfill the
requirements of a system safe torque off function which satisfies
Category 3 / PL (d) according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL CL2
according to EN 62061, IEC 61508, and EN 61800-5-2.
IMPORTANT
The function is suitable for performing mechanical work on the drive system or
affected area of a machine only. It does not provide electrical safety.
235
Appendix G
ATTENTION: Electric Shock Hazard. Verify that all sources of AC and DC power
are de-energized and locked out or tagged out in accordance with the
requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70E, Part II.
To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has
discharged before performing any work on the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage
at the +DC and -DC terminals or test points (refer to your drives User Manual for
locations). The voltage must be zero.
In safe-off mode, hazardous voltages may still be present at the motor. To avoid an
electric shock hazard, disconnect power to the motor and verify that the voltage is
zero before performing any work on the motor.
EC Type Examination
Certification
TV Rheinland has certified the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function

compliant with the requirements for machines defined in Annex I of the
EC Directive 2006/42/EC, and that it complies with the requirements of the
relevant standards listed below:
EN ISO 13849-1 Safety of machinery Safety related parts of control
systems Part 1: General principles for design.
(PowerFlex 525 STO achieves Category 3 / PL(d))
EN 61800-5-2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-2
Safety requirements Functional.
(PowerFlex 525 STO achieves SIL CL 2)
EN 62061 Safety of machinery Functional safety of safety-related
electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems.
IEC 61508 Part 1-7 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/
programmable electronic safety-related systems Parts 1-7.
TV also certifies that the PowerFlex 525 STO may be used in applications up to
Category 3/ PL(d) according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 2 according to
EN 62061 / EN 61800-5-2 / IEC 61508.
The TV Rheinland certificate may be found at:
www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/.
EMC Instructions
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function requires CE Conformity as described

on page 52.
Using PowerFlex 525 SafeTorque-Off
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is intended to be part of the safety

related control system of a machine. Before use, a risk assessment should be
performed that compares the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function
specifications and all foreseeable operational and environmental characteristics of
the machine to which it is to be fitted.
236
Appendix G
A safety analysis of the machine section controlled by the drive is required to

determine how often the safety function should be tested for proper operation
during the life of the machine.
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper
installation. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the
compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for
the proper installation of this equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or
equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
ATTENTION: In safe-off mode, hazardous voltages may still be present at the
motor. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect power to the motor and
verify that the voltage is zero before performing any work on the motor.
ATTENTION: In the event of the failure of two output IGBTs in the drive, when
the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off has controlled the drive outputs to the off
state, the drive may provide energy for up to 180 of rotation in a 2-pole motor
before torque production in the motor ceases.
Safety Concept
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is suitable for use in safety

applications up to and including Category 3 / PL(d) according to
EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 2 according to EN 62061 / EN 61800-5-2 /
IEC 61508.
In addition, the PowerFlex 525 STO may be used together with other
components in a safety application to achieve an overall Category 3 / PL(e)
according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 3 according to EN 62061 and
IEC 61508. This is illustrated in Example 3 in this appendix.
Safety requirements are based on the standards current at the time of
certification.
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is intended for use in safety-related
applications where the de-energized state is considered to be the safe state. All of
the examples in this manual are based on achieving de-energization as the safe
state for typical Machine Safety and Emergency Shutdown (ESD) systems.
Important Safety Considerations

The system user is responsible for:
the set-up, safety rating, and validation of any sensors or actuators
connected to the system.
completing a system-level risk assessment and reassessing the system any
time a change is made.
certification of the system to the desired safety performance level.
project management and proof testing.
programming the application software and the safety option
configurations in accordance with the information in this manual.
237
Appendix G
access control to the system, including password handling.

analyzing all configuration settings and choosing the proper setting to
achieve the required safety rating.
IMPORTANT
When applying Functional Safety, restrict access to qualified, authorized

personnel who are trained and experienced.
ATTENTION: When designing your system, consider how personnel will exit
the machine if the door locks while they are in the machine. Additional
safeguarding devices may be required for your specific application.
Functional Proof Test

The PFD and PFH values provided in the table below are contingent upon the
Proof Test Interval (PTI). Before the end of the PTI specified in the table below,
a proof test of the STO safety function must be performed in order for the
specified PFD and PFH values to remain valid.
PFD and PFH Data

PFD and PFH calculations are based on the equations from Part 6 of EN 61508.
This table provides data for a 20-year proof test interval and demonstrates the
worst-case effect of various configuration changes on the data.
PFD and PFH for 20-year Proof Test Interval
Attribute
PFD
PFHD
SFF
DC
CAT
HFT
PTI
Hardware Type
Value
6.62E-05 (MTTF = 3593 years)
8.13E-10
83%
62.5%
3
1 (1oo2)
20 YEARS
Type A
Safety Reaction Time

The safety reaction time is the amount of time from a safety-related event as
input to the system until the system is in the Safe State.
The safety reaction time from an input signal condition that triggers a safe stop,
to the initiation of safe-torque-off, is 100 ms (maximum).
238
Enabling PowerFlex 525

Safe-Torque-Off
Appendix G
1. Remove all power to the drive.

ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage
on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on
the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage at the +DC and -DC terminals or
test points (refer to your drives user manual for the location of the
terminals). The voltage must be zero.
2. Loosen the screw of terminals Safety 1, Safety 2 and Safety +24V
(S1, S2, S+) on the control I/O terminal block.
3. Remove the protective jumper.
R1
R2
S1
R5
S2
R6
S+ 11
01
12
02
13
03
14
04
15
05
16
06
17
07
18
08
19
4. Safe-Torque-Off function is now enabled and the terminals are ready to

function as safety inputs.
Wiring
Important points to remember about wiring:

Always use copper wire.
Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended.
Control wires should be separated from power wires by at least
0.3 m (1 ft).
Recommended Wire
Type
Wire Type(1)
Description
Min. Insulation
Rating
Shielded Multi-conductor shielded cable such as Belden 8770 (or equiv.) 0.750 mm2 (18 AWG), 300V, 60 C (140 F)
3 conductor, shielded.
(1) Recommendations are for 50 C ambient temperature.

See I/O Wiring on page 36 for wiring recommendations and Control I/O
Terminal Designations on page 43 for terminal descriptions.
If Safety Inputs S1 and S2 are powered by an external +24V source, apply it only
in SELV system, PELV system or low voltage Class 2 circuit.
PowerFlex 525 Safe-TorqueOff Operation
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function disables the drives output IGBTs
by breaking the link with the drive microcontroller. When used in combination
with a safety input device, the system satisfies the requirements of EN ISO 13849
and EN62061 for safe-torque-off and helps protect against restart.
239
Appendix G
Under normal drive operation, both safety inputs (Safety 1 and Safety 2) are
energized, and the drive is able to run. If either input is de-energized, the gate
control circuit becomes disabled. To meet EN ISO 13849 operation, both safety
channels must be de-energized. Refer to the following examples for more
information.
IMPORTANT
Verify Operation
By itself, the Safe-Torque-Off function initiates a coast to stop action.

Additional protective measures will need to be applied when an application
requires a change to the stop action.
Test the safety function for proper operation after the initial setup of the
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function. Retest the safety function at the
intervals determined by the safety analysis described on page 236.
Verify that both safety channels are functioning according to the table below.
Channel Operation and Verification
Safety Function Drive In
Status
Safe State
Drive Status
Configured by t105
[Safety Open En]
Safety Input S1
Safety Input S2
IMPORTANT
No Power Applied
No Power Applied
Drive In
Drive In
Safe State
Safe State
Fault F111
Fault F111
(Safety Hardware) (Safety Hardware)
Safety Channel Operation
Power Applied
No Power Applied
No Power Applied
Power Applied
Drive
Able To Run
Ready/Run
Power Applied
Power Applied
If an external fault is present on the wiring or circuitry controlling the Safety 1

or Safety 2 inputs for a period of time, the Safe-Torque-Off function may not
detect this condition. When the external fault condition is removed the SafeTorque-Off function will allow an enable condition. Fault in the external wiring
shall either be detected by external logic, or excluded (wiring must be
protected by cable ducting or armoring), according to EN ISO 13849-2.
Discrepancy Time of the Safety Inputs

For example, if S1 is disabled and S2 did not follow after the discrepancy time,
fault F111 Safety Hardware will occur. However, if S1 is disable and S2 follows
before the discrepancy time, fault F059 Safety Open will occur.
The discrepancy time is one second for PowerFlex 525 FRN 5.xxx and later. The
discrepancy time is 10 milliseconds for PowerFlex 525 FRN 4.xxx and earlier.
240
Connection Examples
Appendix G
Example 1 Safe-Torque-Off Connection with Coast-to-Stop Action,

SIL 2/PL d
Stop Category 0 Coast
AC line
input power
PF 525
+24V DC
+24V DC
GuardMaster
Trojan
Gate
Stop
Stop
Start
Start
A1 S21 S11 S52 41 13 23 33
Gate control
power supply
MSR
E-Stop
latching
button
A2 S22 S14 S34 42 14 24 34

24V DC
common
Gate control
circuit
S1
S2
(1)
AC line
input power
PF 525
+24V DC
GuardMaster
Trojan
Gate
Stop
Stop
Start
E-Stop
latching
button
Start
Gate control
power supply
Gate control
circuit
S1
S2
(2)
M
(1) Enclosure Recommended. Note: External wiring failure modes must be considered as described in EN ISO 13849-2. Enclosure or
other measure to exclude these failure modes should be used.
(2) In some situations, a safety relay is not required if both the switch and PowerFlex 525 are installed in the same enclosure.
241
Appendix G
Stop Category 0 Coast with Two PowerFlex 525 Drives

(1)
24V DC Supply
AC line
input power
Reset
PF 525
E-Stop
AC line
input power
+24V DC
A1
S11
L12
SI
S21
Start
PF 525
Start
+24V DC
Dig. comm
Y32
S12
S22
L11
Stop
Stop
Reset 0
Stop
Stop
Gate control
power supply
S34
Start
Start
Dig. comm
AM
MM
14
23
Gate control
power supply
Gate control
circuit
13
(2)
S1
Gate control
circuit
S2
(2)
24
A2
S1
S2
24V DC COM
(1) Enclosure Recommended. Note: External wiring failure modes must be considered as described in EN ISO 13849-2. Enclosure or
other measure to exclude these failure modes should be used.
(2) Each safety input draws 6 mA from the supply.
Circuit Status
Circuit shown with guard door closed and system ready for normal drive
operation.
Operating Principle
This is a dual channel system with monitoring of the Safe-Torque-Off circuit and
drive. Opening the guard door will switch the input circuits (S13-S14 & S21S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The output circuits (13-14 &
23-24) will cause the Safe-Torque-Off Enable circuit to trip and the motor will
coast to stop. To restart the drive, the Minotaur safety relay must first be reset
followed by a valid start command to the drive.
Fault Detection
A single fault detected on the Minotaur safety input circuits will result in the
lock-out of the system at the next operation and will not cause loss of the safety
function.
A single fault detected on the PowerFlex 525 safety enable redundant inputs will
result in the lock-out of the drive and will not cause loss of the safety function.
242
Appendix G
Example 2 Safe-Torque-Off Connection with Controlled Stop Action,

SIL 2/PL d
Stop Category 1 Controlled
(1)
AC line
input power
PF 525
GuardMaster
Trojan
+24V DC
Gate
+24V DC
A1
Stop
Stop
Start
S21 S11 S52 S12 S22
37 47 57
13 23
S33 S34
Gate control
power supply
Minotaur
MSR138DP
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y39 Y40 38 48 58
Start
14 24
Y2 Y1
24V DC
Common
Gate control
circuit
S1
S2
M
(1) Enclosure Recommended. External wiring failure modes must be considered as described in EN ISO 13849-2. Enclosure or other
measure to exclude these failure modes should be used.
Circuit Status
operation.
Operating Principle
drive. Opening the guard door will switch the input circuits (S11-S12 & S21S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The output circuits (13-14)
will issue a Stop command to the drive and cause a controlled deceleration. After
the programmed delay, the timed output circuits (47-48 & 57-58) will cause the
Safe-Torque-Off Enable circuit to trip. If the motor is rotating when the trip
occurs, it will coast to stop. To restart the drive, the Minotaur safety relay must
first be reset followed by a valid start command to the drive.
Fault Detection
function.
A single fault detected on the PowerFlex 525 safety enable redundant inputs will
result in the lock-out of the drive and will not cause the loss of the safety
function.
243
Appendix G
Example 3 Safe-Torque-Off Connection with Coast-to-Stop Action

Using External +24V supply, SIL 3/PL e
Stop Category 0 Coast
(1)
AC line
input power
PF 525
External +24V DC
+24V DC
Stop
Reset
Open
A1 S11 S52 S12 13 23 33 41
Start
COM
Gate control
power supply
MSR127TP
S21 S22 S34 A2 14 24 34 42
Closed
Gate control
circuit
S1
S2
X1 AUX
X2
A1 Coil
A2
24V DC COM
13 23 33
14 24 34
External 100-C
contactor 100S-C
M
(1) Enclosure Recommended. External wiring failure modes must be considered as described in EN ISO 13849-2. Enclosure or other
measure to exclude these failure modes should be used.
Circuit Status
operation.
Operating Principle
drive. Opening the guard door will switch the input circuits (S11-S12 & S21S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The output circuits (13-14 &
23-24 & 33-34) will cause the output contact and Safe-Torque-Off Enable circuit
to trip and the motor will coast to stop. To restart the drive, the Minotaur safety
relay must first be reset followed by a valid start command to the drive.
Fault Detection
function.
244
PowerFlex 525 Certification

for Safe-Torque-Off
Appendix G
Certification information can be viewed at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/
245
Appendix G
Notes:
246
Appendix
EtherNet/IP
This section contains only basic information to setup an EtherNet/IP connection
with your PowerFlex 520-series drive. For comprehensive information about
EtherNet/IP (single and dual-port) and how to use it, see the following
publications:
PowerFlex 525 Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication
520COM-UM001.
PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Adapter User
Manual, publication 520COM-UM003.
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 523 drives support only the 25-COMM-E2P dual-port
EtherNet/IP adapter. PowerFlex 525 drives support both the embedded
EtherNet/IP adapter and the 25-COMM-E2P dual-port EtherNet/IP adapter.
It is recommended to use Allen-Bradley Ethernet RJ45 cables, shielded or
unshielded (catalog number 1585J-M8xBJM-x), for connecting your
PowerFlex 520-series drive to an EtherNet/IP network.
Establishing A Connection
With EtherNet/IP
There are three methods for configuring the Ethernet IP address:

BootP Server Use BootP if you prefer to control the IP addresses of
devices using a server. The IP address, subnet mask, and gateway addresses
will then be provided by the BootP server.
Adapter Parameters Use adapter parameters when you want more
flexibility in setting up the IP address, or need to communicate outside the
control network using a gateway. The IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway addresses will then come from the adapter parameters you set.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) (only with PowerFlex
25-COMM-E2P adapter) Use DHCP when you want additional
flexibility and ease-of-use compared to BOOTP in configuring the IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway address for the adapter using a DHCP
server.
IMPORTANT
If you are setting your network addresses manually using parameters, you
must set the appropriate drive or 25-COMM-E2P adapter parameter value to
1 Parameters. See the respective EtherNet/IP adapter user manual for more
information.
247
Appendix H
EtherNet/IP
IMPORTANT
Ground Connections for

EtherNet/IP Networks
Regardless of the method used to set the adapter IP address, each node on the
EtherNet/IP network must have a unique IP address. To change an IP address,
you must set the new value and then remove and reapply power to (or reset)
the adapter.
Connect terminal C1 to a clean ground when using a network with a star

topology. It is acceptable to ground both C1 and C2 terminals.
PowerFlex 525 Embedded Ethernet/IP Adapter
FWD
ENET LINK
EtherNet/IP
Esc
Sel
Terminals C1/C2
Terminal
Description
C1
This terminal is tied to the RJ-45 port shield. Tie this

terminal to a clean ground in order to improve noise
immunity when using external communication
peripherals.
C2
This is the signal common for the communication

signals.
Connect terminal CS1 or CS2 to a clean ground when using a network with a
ring topology.
PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Adapter
Terminal
Description
CS1/CS2
Provides a clean ground for the communication bus

cable shields.
CS1 or CS2 should be connected to a clean ground or
PE ground on the drive.
Terminals CS1/CS2
248
Appendix
Control Diagrams
This chapter contains various diagrams on the PowerFlex 520-series drive
functions and behaviors.
[Speed Reg Sel] Diagrams For Motor Tuning
A509 [Speed Reg Sel] = 0

Gain set automatically
Speed Controller
Gain
Low Speed
Control Mode
Mid Speed
Control Mode
High Speed
Control Mode
A515 [Freq 3 BW]
A513 [Freq 2 BW]

A511 [Freq 1 BW]
A510
[Freq 1]
A512
[Freq 2]
Low Speed
Control Mode
Freq (Hz)
A514
[ Freq 3]
Mid Speed
Control Mode
High Speed
Control Mode
Speed Controller
Gain
A509 [Speed Reg Sel] = 1
Gain set manually
Induction Motor Tuning

Diagrams
A525 [Freq 3 Kp]

A526 [Freq 3 Ki]
A523 [Freq 2 Kp]

A524 [Freq 2 Ki]
A521 [Freq 1 Kp]
A522 [Freq 1 Ki]
A510
[Freq 1]
A512
[Freq 2]
Freq (Hz)
A514
[Freq 3]
249
Appendix I
Control Diagrams
Adjusting Speed Control

Parameters
These settings show how to adjust the speed control for motor tuning.
Increase the bandwidth to obtain
faster speed response. If oscillation
occurs, decrease the bandwidth.
Speed Loop Bandwidth:

A511 [Freq 1 BW] = 10 Hz
A513 [Freq 2 BW] = 10 Hz
A515 [Freq 3 BW] = 10 Hz
For [Freq x Kp], gradually increase by 1%
For [Freq x Ki], gradually increase by 0.1 s
For general use, set A509

[Speed Reg Sel] to 0 (Automatic)
Set A509
[Speed Reg Sel]
A509 = 1 (Manual)
A509 = 0 (Automatic)
Set Speed Controller Gain

automatically
Run
250
Set Speed Controller Gain

manually:
A521 [Freq 1 Kp]
A522 [Freq 1 Ki]
A523 [Freq 2 Kp]
A524 [Freq 2 Ki]
A525 [Freq 3 Kp]
A526 [Freq 3 Ki]
Appendix
PowerFlex 525 PM Motor Configuration

This chapter contains instructions and diagrams on configuring the
PowerFlex 525 drive for use with a PM motor.
Download Files
Automatic Configuration Using Drive Startup Wizard
Manual Configuration Using Drive Keypad
Additional PM Motor Configuration
Optional Parameter Adjustments for Optimum Performance
See page...
252
254
261
262
266
ATTENTION: It is the responsibility of the startup engineer / end user to use

proper safety precautions with any equipment used during this startup.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or
consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this document are included solely for illustrative
purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any
particular installation, Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility or
liability of actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to the
information, circuits, equipment. Or software described in this document. Rockwell
Automation reserves the right to make changes to this document without prior
notice. When using examples in this document the user recognizes that Rockwell
Automation cannot be made liable for any damage or claims. Because there are
many application-specific variables, users MUST ensure that products are correctly
used and the appropriate architecture is deployed. Reproduction of the contents of
this document, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell
Automation, Inc. is prohibited.
To use PM motor control, you need to install the PowerFlex 525 drive firmware
revision 5.001 or later. If you wish to perform PM motor tuning by using the
PowerFlex 525 Startup Wizard in Connected Components Workbench, you also
need to install version 1.05 or later Add-on profile (AOP) and update to the
latest drive database for Connected Components Workbench.
These files are available for download at the Rockwell Automation Product
Compatibility and Download Center. For instructions, see Download Files on
page 252.
251
Appendix J
Download Files
Follow these steps to download the files for your PowerFlex 525 drive.
1. Go to the Rockwell Automation Product Compatibility and Download
Center at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/
pcdc.page
IMPORTANT
You must sign in to the Rockwell Automation website before

downloading a firmware revision.
2. Click the Find Downloads link.
252
Appendix J
3. Enter PowerFlex 525 into the Product Search field.

The results appears in the box below.
4. Select the entry and the firmware revision, then click Downloads.
5. Click the Show Downloads

icon, then click the links to download the
firmware revision and AOP files to your computer.
6. Go back to step 2 and enter AB Drives into the Product Search field.
The results appear in the box below.
7. Select both entries, then click Downloads.
8. Click the Show Downloads

icon, then click the links to download the
database files to your computer.
253
Appendix J
Automatic Configuration
Using Drive Startup Wizard
To use the PowerFlex 525 Startup Wizard in Connected Components

Workbench to automatically configure the parameters, make sure you have
installed the following:
PowerFlex 525 drive firmware revision 5.001 or later.
PowerFlex 525 drive Add-on Profile 1.05 or later.
Latest drive database for Connected Components Workbench.
For instructions, see Download Files on page 252.
Alternatively, you can manually configure the parameters by using the drive
keypad. For instructions, see Manual Configuration Using Drive Keypad on
page 261.
1. From Connected Components Workbench software, click the Wizard
Browser icon.
2. In the Available Wizards dialog box, click on PowerFlex 525 Startup

Wizard, then click Select.
254
Appendix J
3. Before tuning the drive, it is recommended to reset all parameters to their

default values. Select the option shown below.
4. Complete each step in the Startup Wizard to configure the drive.

IMPORTANT
Follow the Startup Wizard steps exactly. If not, unexpected results can
occur.
Motor Control
From the Torq Perf Mode drop-down list, select PM Motor.
This configuration can also be done by setting parameter P039 [Torq Perf Mode]
to 4 PM Motor.
255
Appendix J
Motor Data
Key in the details of your Motor Nameplate.
Feedback
If you are configuring a closed loop PM motor control, key in the details of your
incremental encoder.
IMPORTANT
256
Note the following:

PowerFlex 525 drive only supports incremental AB encoder (25-ENC-1).
Motor Feedback Type can be Quadrature or Quad Check.
Only Interior Permanent magnet motor (iPM) is supported for closed loop
control.
Appendix J
Stop Mode/Brake Type

Key in the details of your configuration.
257
Appendix J
Direction Test
IMPORTANT
When configuring a PM motor, it is required to perform a Direction Test before

proceeding to the next step (Auto Tune).
Perform a Direction Test. The direction test can be performed with or without
the load attached. Consider your application requirements when deciding to have
the load attached or removed from the motor. This test runs in V/Hz mode to
verify the motor polarity relative to the feedback polarity. The test confirms
motor rotation and feedback polarity. After the test is completed, a change can be
made, if required.
IMPORTANT
258
If the drive was never operated before (new installation), verify that safeguards
are in place to remove power safely from the drive during an unstable situation
where the drive can produce undesired motion.
Appendix J
Auto Tune
Ensure the load is uncoupled and perform a Rotate Tune test.
The Auto Tune is used to identify the correct motor flux and stator electrical
properties, including the following:
IR volt drop, which is voltage drop over resistance.
IXd volt drop, which is voltage drop over inductance.
Flux current (estimated in Static Tune and measured in Rotate Tune test).
Slip RPM, which is calculated from motor nameplate data. If an encoder is
used, the Slip RPM becomes a measured value using the encoder.
Auto Tune Window
A properly tested motor and drive helps ensure higher starting torque and better
performance at low speeds. Conversely, an improperly performed Auto Tune can
cause the motor to exhibit instability at low speeds, uneven performances when
running through the motor speed range, and can generate unnecessary faults such
as overcurrent and overvoltage faults.
259
Appendix J
Static Tune
This test is used when the motor is connected to a high friction load and cannot
easily be uncoupled from the motor, or when the load cannot be rotated due to
mechanical constraints or a limited range of movement. The Static Tune test does
not generate any motor movement. The Static tune test results may not be as
accurate as the Rotate Tune test.
Rotate Tune (preferred for PM motor tuning)

This test is used when the motor is not coupled to the load or the load is low
friction. Rotate tune is generally used to better identify motor flux and stator
electrical properties, which are used to automatically tune the torque current
loop. The Rotate Tune test causes motor rotation at different speeds while it is
executing.
ATTENTION: If the drive was never operated before (new installation), verify
that safeguards are in place to remove power safely from the drive during an
unstable situation where the drive can produce undesired motion.
After completing the configuration and running the Auto Tune test, you may
need to perform additional configuration depending on whether you have an
open loop or closed loop system.
For an open loop system (A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] = 0 None), you may need
to adjust two parameters if you encounter momentary reverse startup after a Start
command is issued.
For a closed loop system (A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] = 4 Quadrature or
5 Quad Check, you must perform an angle alignment after the Auto Tune test
before running the motor normally.
See Additional PM Motor Configuration on page 262 for instructions.
260
Manual Configuration Using

Drive Keypad
Appendix J
Besides using the PowerFlex 525 Startup Wizard in Connected Components

Workbench, you can also manually configure the parameters by using the drive
keypad. Make sure you have installed the PowerFlex 525 drive firmware revision
5.001 or later. For instructions, see Download Files on page 252.
To configure the parameters, do the following:
1. Reset all parameters to their default values.
Set P053 [Reset to Defalts] = 2 Factory Rset
2. Select the Control Mode
Set P039 [Torque Perf Mode] = 4 PM Control
3. Enter Motor nameplate data
Set P031 [Motor NP Volts]
Set P032 [Motor NP Hertz]
Set P033 [Motor OL Current]
Set P034 [Motor NP FLA]
Set P035 [Motor NP Poles]
Set P036 [Motor NP RMP]
Set P037 [Motor NP Power]
Set P043 [Minimum Freq]
Set P044 [Maximum Freq]
4. Set A440 [PWM Frequency] = 4.0 kHz (default)
5. Set A535 [Motor Fdbk Type]
= 4 Quadrature or 5 Quad Check (for Closed Loop PM)
or
= 0 None (for Open Loop PM)
A536 [Encoder PPR]
6. Enter Stop mode and dynamic brake data, if any.
P045 [Stop Mode]
A437 [DB Resistor Sel]
7. Ensure the load is uncoupled and perform a Rotate Tune test
Set P040 [Autotune] = 2 Rotate Tune
Press the Start button (Take note of your Start Source settings P046, P048,
and P050. Default setting of P046 = 1 Keypad)
ATTENTION: If the drive was never operated before (new installation), verify
that safeguards are in place to remove power safely from the drive during an
unstable situation where the drive can produce undesired motion.
After completing the configuration and running the Auto Tune test, you may
need to perform additional configuration depending on whether you have an
open loop or closed loop system.
261
Appendix J
For an open loop system (A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] = 0 None), you may need
to adjust two parameters if you encounter momentary reverse startup after a Start
command is issued.
For a closed loop system (A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] = 4 Quadrature or
5 Quad Check, you must perform an angle alignment after the Auto Tune test
before running the motor normally.
See Additional PM Motor Configuration on page 262 for instructions.
Additional PM Motor
Configuration
After completing the initial configuration, there are additional steps that need to
be performed to complete the whole PM motor setup.
For an open loop PM motor (iPM and sPM) control, some parameters need to be
adjusted to prevent reverse startup. For a closed loop PM motor (iPM), an angle
alignment procedure needs to be performed before the motor is run normally.
Additional Setup for Open Loop PM Motor

After performing an autotune on an open loop PM motor, a momentary reverse
startup may occur. To prevent this from occurring, perform the following steps:
1. Set A516 [PM Initial Sel] = 1 HFI.
2. Increase the value of A519 [PM HFI NS Cur] by 10%.
3. Perform a test run at a reference speed and check if the motor reverses.
4. If the motor reverses, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. If A519 [PM HFI NS Cur] has reached its maximum value (200%):
reset the value to the default (100%)
set A516 [PM Initial Sel] = 2 Six Pulse
6. Perform a test run at a reference speed and check if the motor reverses.
7. If the motor reverses, repeat steps 2 and 3.
8. If A519 [PM HFI NS Cur] has reached its maximum value again and a
reverse motor startup still occurs, the motor setup has failed.
262
Appendix J
Flowchart for Open Loop PM Motor (iPM and sPM) Setup

Basic setting
Load Default
P053 [Reset to Defalts]

= 2 (Factory Reset)
Control Mode
Selection

= 4 (PM Control)
Set Motor
Parameters

P034 [Motor NP FLA]
P036 [Motor NP RPM]
P043 [Minimum Freq]
P044 [Maximum Freq]
Set PG

= 0 (None)
Set Autotune
P040 [Autotune]
= 2 (Rotate Tune)
Obtain Parameters
from Autotune

Set Accel and

Decel Time
P041 [Accel Time 1]

P042 [Decel Time 1]
A439 [S Curve %]
Reverse Startup
Check
Perform a test run at

command frequency
Start Autotune
Repeat steps 2 and 3 of

Additional Setup for
Open Loop PM Motor
Do you see
reverse startup?
Yes
No
Drive is aligned and
ready to run
263
Appendix J
Additional Setup for Closed Loop PM Motor

After performing an autotune on an closed loop PM motor, a PM angle
alignment needs to be performed to complete the setup.
Align the PM Angle

To align the PM angle, do the following:
1. Uncouple the load.
2. Set these parameters to the recommended value:
A517 [PM DC Inject Cur] = 60% (default is 30%)
A518 [PM Align Time] = 5.8 s (default is 0.7 s)
A580 [Current Loop BW] = 300 Hz (default is 0 Hz)
3. Set the desired speed (10...40 Hz recommended).
Check the setting for P047 [Speed Reference 1]. Speed reference can be
from POT, control panel of Connected Components Workbench, and so
on.
4. Set the Start Source.
Check the setting for P046 [Start Source 1]. Start source can be from
POT, control panel of Connected Components Workbench, and so on.
5. Start the drive to run at the desired speed.
6. Drive will begin to align itself (move forward and reverse) and run to the
desired speed.
7. Stop the drive. The drive is now aligned.
TIP
IMPORTANT
The PM angle alignment only needs to be performed once unless the

drive is power cycled or re-tuned.
The PM angle alignment has failed when fault F012 (HW Overcurrent) or
F013 (Ground Fault) is observed during acceleration and deceleration.
Adjustments if PM Angle Alignment has Failed

If the PM angle alignment has failed, do the following:
1. Cycle drive power or set A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] = 0 None, then set
back to 4 Quadrature or 5 Quad Check.
2. Increase A517 [PM DC Inject Cur] by 50%.
3. Increase A518 [PM Align Time] by 0.2 s.
4. Repeat the Align the PM Angle instructions again, beginning from step 3.
264
Appendix J
Flowchart for Closed Loop PM Motor (iPM) Setup

Basic setting
Load Default
P053 [Reset to Defalts]

= 2 (Factory Reset)
Control Mode
Selection

= 4 (PM Control)
Set Motor
Parameters

P034 [Motor NP FLA]
P036 [Motor NP RPM]
P043 [Minimum Freq]
P044 [Maximum Freq]
PLACEHOLDER
Set PG

= 4 (Quadrature)
or 5 (Quad Check)
A536 [Encoder PPR]
A518 [Align Time]
A517 [PM DC Inject Cur]
Set Autotune
P040 [Autotune]
= 2 (Rotate Tune)
Start Autotune
Obtain Parameters
from Autotune

Set Accel and

Decel Time
P041 [Accel Time 1]

P042 [Decel Time 1]
A439 [S Curve %]
Set Alignment
Set alignment
See Align the PM Angle
See Adjustments if PM Angle
Alignment has Failed
Does drive
align successfully?
No (Fault F012 or F013 is observed

during acceleration and deceleration.)
Yes
Drive is aligned and
ready to run
265
Appendix J
Optional Parameter
Adjustments for Optimum
Performance
There are a few parameters that you can use to obtain optimum performance
during the test run. Usually, the default value of these parameters work well, but
you may need to adjust them under different conditions.
1. A517 [PM DC Inject Cur]
Maximum DC current in amps applied to the motor in order to reset the
rotor position of a PM motor.
Alignment has failed when fault F012 (HW Overcurrent) or F013
(Ground Fault) is observed during acceleration and deceleration.
Default = 30%
Increase 50 of A517 [PM DC Inject Cur] for each trial when PM speed
response is slow after adding load.
2. A518 [PM Align Time]
Magnetic pole reorientation time.
Alignment failed when fault F012 (HW Overcurrent) or F013 (Ground
Fault) is observed during acceleration and deceleration.
Default = 0.7 s
Increase A518 [PM Align Time] to > 4.7 s.
3. A527 [PM FWKn 1 Kp]
The gain to ensure good performance in field weakening region.
Default = 450%
Increase 100 of A527 [PM FWKn 1Kp] for each trial when PM speed
Decrease 100 of A527 [PM FWKn 1Kp] for each trial when speed
vibration is observed after adding load.
4. A580 [Current loop BW]
Current loop bandwidth (0 = Auto calculate the control gain of current
loop)
Default = 0 Hz
Increase 50 of A580 [Current Loop BW] for each trial when PM speed
Decrease 50 of A580 [Current Loop BW] for each trial when speed
instability is observed after adding load.
266
Appendix J
5. A584 [PM Stable 2 Kp]

The gain for stabilization loop.
Default = 250%
Increase 100 of A584 [PM Stable 2 Kp] for each trial if fault F064 (Drive
overload) is experienced at high load.
Applicable to open loop tuning especially for sPM motor. In most cases,
the default value will work.
267
Appendix J
Notes:
268
Index
Numerics
2-wire
inputs, 50
3-wire
inputs, 50
A
accel
override priority, 51
selecting, 51
accessing
control terminals, 31
power terminals, 31
applications
safety, 237
auxiliary contact
drive, 34, 36
B
basic operation, 65
drive, 60, 65, 162
programming, 65
safety, 240
C
circuit breakers
inputs, 23
ratings, 23
common bus
drive, 36
communications
positioning, 225
configuring
RS485(DSI), 202
control terminals
accessing, 31
counter
programming, 209, 212
output, 34
drive
auxiliary contact, 34, 36
basic operation, 60, 65, 162
common bus, 36
mount, 15
programming, 61, 64
safety, 239
drive damage
preventing, 19
ungrounded distribution systems, 19
E
encoder
programming, 215
wiring, 216
environment
storage, 18
Ethernet
programming, 247
F
fault monitoring
ground, 21
fuses
rating, 23
G
ground
fault monitoring, 21
motor, 21
RFI filter, 22
safety, 21
shielding, 21
H
homing
automatic, 223
manual, 223
programming, 223
decel
selecting, 51
derating
factor, 125
temperature, 17
digital inputs
selecting, 50
start source, 50
dimensions
mounting, 16, 185
disconnect
I
inputs
2-wire, 50
3-wire, 50
circuit breakers, 23
power, 20
L
logic
basic, 209, 210

timed steps, 209, 210
269
Index
M
Modbus
reading, 205, 207, 208
writing, 203, 205, 208
motor
ground, 21
start, 34
stop, 34
mount
drive, 15
mounting
dimensions, 16, 185
N
noise immunity
wiring, 37, 202
O
output
disconnect, 34
override priority
accel, 51
decel, 51
speed reference, 49
start source, 49
P
parameters
AppView, 76, 150
CustomView, 151
programming, 63, 67
PID
programming, 229
positioning
communications, 225
power
inputs, 20
power and control module
separating, 28
power terminals
accessing, 31
preventing
drive damage, 19
programming, 65
basic logic, 209, 210
counter, 209, 212
drive, 61, 64
encoder, 215
Ethernet, 247
homing, 223
parameters, 63, 67
PID, 229
positioning, 218, 220
pulse train, 215
270
timed steps, 209, 210

timer, 209, 211
tools, 64
pulse train
programming, 215
R
rating
fuses, 23
ratings
circuit breakers, 23
reading
Modbus, 205, 207, 208
recommended
wiring, 36, 239
reflected
wave protection, 34
RFI filter
ground, 22
RS485(DSI)
configuring, 202
S
safety
applications, 237
basic operation, 240
drive, 239
ground, 21
testing, 238
wiring, 239
selecting
accel, 51
decel, 51
digital inputs, 50
speed reference, 49
start source, 49
separating
power and control module, 28
shielded
wiring, 33
shielding
ground, 21
speed reference
selecting, 49
start
motor, 34
start source
digital inputs, 50
selecting, 49
stop
motor, 34
storage
environment, 18
Index
T
temperature
derating, 17
wiring, 33
testing
safety, 238
timer
tools
programming, 64
U
unshielded
wiring, 33
V
voltage reflections
wiring, 34
W
wave protection
reflected, 34
wiring
encoder, 216
noise immunity, 37, 202
recommended, 36, 239
RS485 (DSI), 201
safety, 239
shielded, 33
temperature, 33
unshielded, 33
voltage reflections, 34
writing
Modbus, 203, 205, 208
271
Index
Notes:
272
Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and
application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to
make the best use of these tools.
Rockwell Automation provides compliance certification support at [email protected].
Rockwell Automation provides environmental compliance support at [email protected].
Rockwell Automation provides country of origin certificates at [email protected].
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer
TechConnect support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada
1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada
Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html, or contact your local Rockwell

Automation representative.
New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.
www.rockwel lautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444
Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation NV, Pegasus Park, De Kleetlaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
*PN-386600*
PN-386600
Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E July 2016

Supersedes Publication 520-UM001H-EN-E April 2016
PN-386600
Copyright 2016 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.

Power Flex 525 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationPoerFlex 520 sEries

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Flex 525 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Flex 525 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable Frequency AC Drive

Important User Information

New and Updated Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Who Should Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Prepare for Drive Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Velocity StepLogic Using Timed Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Encoder and Pulse Train Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

PID Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Establishing A Connection With EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Induction Motor Tuning Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

New and Updated

This table contains the changes made to this revision.

Added PowerFlex 523 series B to Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram.

Added PowerFlex 523 series B to Control I/O Terminal Designations.

Added new sub topic for 32-bit parameters.

Added corrective action to fault F114 (uC Failure).

Added analog output to PowerFlex 523 drives.

Updated information to verify operation of the safety inputs in Appendix G.

General maintenance updates.

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Who Should Use this Manual

All the recommended documentation listed in this section is available online at

The following publications provide specific PowerFlex 520-Series information on

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

The following publications provide specific Network Communications

In this manual we refer to PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable Frequency AC

The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

The Studio 5000 Engineering and Design Environment combines

Drive Frame Sizes

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Catalog Number Explanation

Output Current @ 1 Phase, 100...120V Input

Output Current @ 1 Phase, 200...240V Input

Output Current @ 3Phase, 200...240V Input

Output Current @ 3 Phase, 380...480V Input

Output Current @ 3 Phase, 525...600V Input

(1) This rating is only available for PowerFlex 523 drives.

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Mount the drive upright on a flat, vertical and level surface.

Protect the cooling fan by avoiding dust or metallic particles.

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016

Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere.

Minimum Mounting Clearances

Vertical with Control Module Fan Kit

Horizontal with Control Module Fan Kit

Horizontal, Zero Stacking with

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001I-EN-E - July 2016